Lexmark X952 Owner S Manual User's Guide

Lexmark-Lexmark-X950-Owner-S-Manual lexmark-lexmark-x950-owner-s-manual

Lexmark-Lexmark-X954-Owner-S-Manual lexmark-lexmark-x954-owner-s-manual

2014-07-06

: Lexmark Lexmark-Lexmark-X952-Owner-S-Manual lexmark-lexmark-x952-owner-s-manual lexmark pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 363 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

X950 Series
User's Guide
May 2013 www.lexmark.com
Machine type(s):
7558
Model(s):
032, 036, 232, 236, 432, 436, 496
Contents
Safety information.......................................................................................7
Learning about the printer...........................................................................9
Finding information about the printer......................................................................................................9
Selecting a location for the printer..........................................................................................................10
Printer configurations.............................................................................................................................11
Basic functions of the scanner.................................................................................................................13
Understanding the ADF and scanner glass..............................................................................................14
Understanding the printer control panel................................................................................................15
Understanding the home screen................................................................16
Understanding the home screen.............................................................................................................16
Using the touch-screen buttons..............................................................................................................18
Setting up and using the home screen applications....................................21
Accessing the Embedded Web Server.....................................................................................................21
Showing or hiding icons on the home screen.........................................................................................21
Activating the home screen applications................................................................................................22
Setting up Forms and Favorites ........................................................................................................................22
Setting up Scan to Network ..............................................................................................................................22
Setting up My MFP ...........................................................................................................................................23
Understanding WS‑Scan ...................................................................................................................................23
Setting up Remote Operator Panel...................................................................................................................23
Exporting and importing a configuration................................................................................................24
Additional printer setup.............................................................................25
Turning on the printer.............................................................................................................................25
Installing internal options........................................................................................................................26
Installing hardware options.....................................................................................................................40
Attaching cables......................................................................................................................................43
Verifying printer setup............................................................................................................................44
Setting up the printer software...............................................................................................................45
Setting up wireless printing.....................................................................................................................47
Installing the printer on an Ethernet network........................................................................................52
Changing port settings after installing a new network Internal Solutions Port......................................55
Setting up serial printing.........................................................................................................................56
Contents 2
Minimizing your printer's environmental impact........................................59
Saving paper and toner...........................................................................................................................59
Saving energy..........................................................................................................................................60
Recycling..................................................................................................................................................63
Loading paper and specialty media............................................................64
Setting the paper size and type...............................................................................................................64
Configuring Universal paper settings......................................................................................................64
Loading the standard or optional 520‑sheet tray...................................................................................64
Loading the optional 850‑ and 1,150‑sheet trays...................................................................................67
Loading the 2000‑sheet high‑capacity feeder.........................................................................................70
Loading the multipurpose feeder............................................................................................................72
Linking and unlinking trays......................................................................................................................75
Paper and specialty media guide................................................................77
Paper guidelines......................................................................................................................................77
Supported paper sizes, types, and weights.............................................................................................81
Printing......................................................................................................88
Printing a document................................................................................................................................88
Printing from a mobile device.................................................................................................................89
Printing from a flash drive.......................................................................................................................90
Printing on specialty media.....................................................................................................................92
Printing confidential and other held jobs................................................................................................94
Printing information pages......................................................................................................................95
Canceling a print job................................................................................................................................96
Copying......................................................................................................97
Making copies.........................................................................................................................................97
Copying film photos................................................................................................................................98
Copying on specialty media.....................................................................................................................98
Customizing copy settings.......................................................................................................................99
Placing information on copies...............................................................................................................104
Canceling a copy job..............................................................................................................................104
Understanding the copy screens and options.......................................................................................105
Contents 3
E-mailing..................................................................................................108
Getting ready to e-mail.........................................................................................................................108
Creating an e-mail shortcut...................................................................................................................109
E-mailing a document............................................................................................................................110
Customizing e-mail settings...................................................................................................................111
Canceling an e-mail...............................................................................................................................112
Understanding e-mail options...............................................................................................................112
Faxing......................................................................................................115
Getting the printer ready to fax............................................................................................................115
Creating shortcuts.................................................................................................................................121
Sending a fax.........................................................................................................................................122
Customizing fax settings........................................................................................................................124
Canceling an outgoing fax.....................................................................................................................125
Understanding fax options....................................................................................................................126
Holding and forwarding faxes...............................................................................................................128
Scanning...................................................................................................130
Scanning to an FTP address...................................................................................................................130
Scanning to a computer or flash drive..................................................................................................134
Understanding printer menus...................................................................139
Menus list..............................................................................................................................................139
Supplies menu.......................................................................................................................................140
Paper menu...........................................................................................................................................142
Reports menu........................................................................................................................................153
Network/Ports menu.............................................................................................................................154
Security menu.......................................................................................................................................167
Settings menu........................................................................................................................................173
Help menu.............................................................................................................................................227
Securing the hard disk and other installed memory..................................228
Statement of Volatility..........................................................................................................................228
Erasing volatile memory........................................................................................................................228
Erasing non‑volatile memory................................................................................................................229
Erasing printer hard disk memory.........................................................................................................229
Configuring printer hard disk encryption..............................................................................................230
Contents 4
Maintaining the printer............................................................................231
Cleaning the exterior of the printer......................................................................................................231
Cleaning the scanner glass....................................................................................................................232
Cleaning the printhead lenses...............................................................................................................233
Emptying the hole punch box................................................................................................................237
Storing supplies.....................................................................................................................................238
Checking the status of parts and supplies.............................................................................................239
Ordering parts and supplies..................................................................................................................239
Replacing parts and supplies.................................................................................................................241
Moving the printer................................................................................................................................262
Administrative support............................................................................263
Finding advanced networking and administrator information.............................................................263
Checking the status of the printer.........................................................................................................263
Checking the virtual display...................................................................................................................263
Setting up e‑mail alerts.........................................................................................................................263
Viewing reports.....................................................................................................................................264
Restoring factory default settings.........................................................................................................264
Clearing jams............................................................................................265
Avoiding jams........................................................................................................................................265
Understanding jam numbers and locations..........................................................................................265
201–202 paper jams..............................................................................................................................267
203 paper jam.......................................................................................................................................268
230 paper jam.......................................................................................................................................269
231 paper jam.......................................................................................................................................270
24x paper jam........................................................................................................................................271
250 paper jam.......................................................................................................................................277
281 paper jam.......................................................................................................................................278
4yy.xx paper jams..................................................................................................................................280
455 staple jam.......................................................................................................................................285
28y.xx paper jams..................................................................................................................................287
Troubleshooting.......................................................................................288
Understanding printer messages..........................................................................................................288
Solving basic printer problems..............................................................................................................304
Contents 5
Solving printing problems.....................................................................................................................304
Solving copy problems..........................................................................................................................308
Solving scanner problems.....................................................................................................................311
Solving fax problems.............................................................................................................................313
Solving home screen applications problems.........................................................................................316
Solving option problems........................................................................................................................317
Solving paper feed problems.................................................................................................................320
Solving print quality problems..............................................................................................................321
Solving color quality problems..............................................................................................................334
Embedded Web Server does not open.................................................................................................337
Contacting customer support................................................................................................................337
Notices.....................................................................................................338
Product information..............................................................................................................................338
Edition notice........................................................................................................................................338
Power consumption..............................................................................................................................342
Index........................................................................................................353
Contents 6
Safety information
Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily accessible.
Do not place or use this product near water or wet locations.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The lithium battery in this product is not intended to be replaced. There is a
danger of explosion if a lithium battery is incorrectly replaced. Do not recharge, disassemble, or incinerate a
lithium battery. Discard used lithium batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions and local
regulations.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or
printer damage:
•Turn the printer off using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
•Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it.
•Lift the printer off the optional drawer, and set it aside instead of trying to lift the drawer and printer at the same
time.
Note: Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it off the optional drawer.
This product uses a printing process that heats the print media, and the heat may cause the media to release emissions.
You must understand the section in your operating instructions that discusses the guidelines for selecting print media
to avoid the possibility of harmful emissions.
Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce risk of fire, use only the telecommunications (RJ‑11) cord provided
with this product or a UL Listed 26 AWG or larger replacement when connecting this product to the public
switched telephone network.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Make sure that all external connections (such as Ethernet and telephone system
connections) are properly installed in their marked plug-in ports.
This product is designed, tested, and approved to meet strict global safety standards with the use of specific
manufacturer's components. The safety features of some parts may not always be obvious. The manufacturer is not
responsible for the use of other replacement parts.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not cut, twist, bind, crush, or place heavy objects on the power cord. Do not
subject the power cord to abrasion or stress. Do not pinch the power cord between objects such as furniture
and walls. If any of these things happen, a risk of fire or electrical shock results. Inspect the power cord regularly
for signs of such problems. Remove the power cord from the electrical outlet before inspecting it.
Refer service or repairs, other than those described in the user documentation, to a professional service person.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer, unplug
the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before proceeding.
Safety information 7
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or
make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning
storm.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each paper drawer or tray
separately. Keep all other drawers or trays closed until needed.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must
use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high-capacity input tray, a duplex unit and an input
option, or more than one input option. If you purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and
faxes, you may need additional furniture. For more information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
Safety information 8
Learning about the printer
Finding information about the printer
What are you looking for? Find it here
Initial setup instructions:
•Connecting the printer
•Installing the printer software
Setup documentation—The setup documentation came
with the printer and is also available on the Lexmark Web
site at http://support.lexmark.com.
Additional setup and instructions for using the printer:
•Selecting and storing paper and specialty media
•Loading paper
•Configuring printer settings
•Viewing and printing documents and photos
•Setting up and using the printer software
•Configuring the printer on a network
•Caring for and maintaining the printer
•Troubleshooting and solving problems
User's Guide and Quick Reference Guide—The guides are
available on the Software and Documentation CD.
For updates, visit our Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com.
Instructions for:
•Connecting the printer to an Ethernet network
•Troubleshooting printer connection problems
Networking Guide—Open the Software and
Documentation CD, and then look for Printer and
Software Documentation under the Pubs folder. From
the list of publications, click the Networking Guide link.
Help using the printer software Windows or Mac Help—Open a printer software program
or application, and then click Help.
Click
?
to view context‑sensitive information.
Notes:
•Help is automatically installed with the printer
software.
•The printer software is located in the printer
program folder or on the desktop, depending on
your operating system.
Learning about the printer 9
What are you looking for? Find it here
The latest supplemental information, updates, and customer
support:
•Documentation
•Driver downloads
•Live chat support
•E‑mail support
•Voice support
Lexmark Support Web site—
http://support.lexmark.com
Note: Select your country or region, and then select
your product to view the appropriate support site.
Support telephone numbers and hours of operation for
your country or region can be found on the Support Web
site or on the printed warranty that came with your
printer.
Record the following information (located on the store
receipt and at the back of the printer), and have it ready
when you contact customer support so that they may
serve you faster:
•Machine Type number
•Serial number
•Date purchased
•Store where purchased
Warranty information Warranty information varies by country or region:
•In the US—See the Statement of Limited Warranty
included with this printer, or at
http://support.lexmark.com.
•In other countries and regions—See the printed
warranty that came with your printer.
Selecting a location for the printer
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
When selecting a location for the printer, leave enough room to open trays, covers, and doors. If you plan to install any
options, then leave enough room for them also. It is important to:
•Set up the printer near a properly grounded and easily accessible electrical outlet.
•Make sure airflow in the room meets the latest revision of the ASHRAE 62 standard or the CEN Technical Committee
156 standard.
•Provide a flat, sturdy, and stable surface.
•Keep the printer:
–Away from the direct airflow of air conditioners, heaters, or ventilators
–Free from direct sunlight, humidity extremes, or temperature fluctuations
–Clean, dry, and free of dust
–Away from stray staples and paper clips
•Allow the following recommended amount of space around the printer for proper ventilation:
Learning about the printer 10
1
2
3
4
5
1Right side 307.34 mm (12.1 in.)
2Front 444.5 mm (17.5 in.)
3Left side 374.65 mm (14.75 in.)
4Rear 100 mm (3.9 in.)
5Top 304.8 mm (12 in.)
Printer configurations
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor‑mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must
use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high‑capacity input tray, a duplex unit and an input
option, or more than one input option. If you purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and
faxes, you may need additional furniture. For more information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
Learning about the printer 11
Basic model
123
4
6
7
8
5
1Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)
2ADF input tray
3ADF exit bin
4Printer control panel
5Exit tray 2
6Standard exit bin
7Standard 520‑sheet tray
8Multipurpose feeder
Configured models
You can configure your basic printer by adding optional trays. A 2,000-sheet high‑capacity feeder and a finisher bin can
also be added.
1
2
3
4
1Optional 520‑sheet tray (Tray 2)
2Optional 520‑sheet tray (Tray 2, Tray 3, and Tray 4)
3Optional 520‑sheet tray (Tray 2)
Learning about the printer 12
4Optional 2,000‑sheet tandem‑tray module
•850‑sheet tray (Tray 3)
•1,150‑sheet tray (Tray 4)
Fully configured model
1
2
1Finisher bin
The finisher bin can either be one of the following:
•Standard finisher (Punch/Stapler)
•Booklet finisher (Punch/Stapler/Booklet)
22,000‑sheet high‑capacity feeder
Basic functions of the scanner
The scanner provides copy, fax, and scan-to-network capability for large workgroups. You can:
•Make quick copies, or change the settings on the printer control panel to perform specific copy jobs.
•Send a fax using the printer control panel.
•Send a fax to multiple fax destinations at the same time.
•Scan documents and send them to your computer, an e-mail address, a flash drive, or an FTP destination.
•Scan documents and send them to another printer (PDF by way of FTP).
Learning about the printer 13
Understanding the ADF and scanner glass
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) Scanner glass
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings).
You can use the ADF or the scanner glass to scan documents.
Using the ADF
The ADF can scan multiple pages including two‑sided (duplex) pages. When using the ADF:
Note: Duplex scanning is available only in select printer models.
•Load the document into the ADF faceup, short edge first.
•Load up to 110 sheets of plain paper into the ADF.
•Scan sizes from 125 x 85 mm (4.9 x 3.35 in.) wide to 297 x 432 mm (11.69 x 17 in.) long.
•Scan media weights from 38 to 128 g/m2 (25.67 to 86.48 lb).
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings)
into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
Using the scanner glass
The scanner glass can be used to scan or copy single pages or book pages. When using the scanner glass:
•Place a document facedown on the scanner glass in the corner with the green arrow.
•Scan or copy documents up to 297 x 432 mm (11.69 x 17 in.).
•Copy books up to 12.7 mm (0.5 in.) thick.
Learning about the printer 14
Understanding the printer control panel
1@ ! . 2A B C 3D E F
4G H I 5J K L 6M N O
7P Q R S 8T U V 9W X Y Z
*0
#
124
6
75
3
Item Description
1Display Shows the status of the printer, and allows printer setup and operation
2Indicator light •Off—The printer is off.
•Blinking green—The printer is warming up, processing data, or printing.
•Solid green—The printer is on, but idle.
•Blinking red—The printer requires operator intervention is needed.
3Sleep Enables Sleep Mode or Hibernate Mode
The following are the statuses of the indicator light and the Sleep button:
•Entering or waking from Sleep Mode—The indicator light is illuminated solid green, Sleep button
is unilluminated.
•Operating in Sleep Mode—The indicator light is illuminated solid green, Sleep button is
illuminated solid amber.
•Entering or waking from Hibernate Mode—The indicator light is illuminated solid green, Sleep
button is illuminated blinking amber.
•Operating in Hibernate Mode—The indicator light is unilluminated, Sleep button is blinking
amber for 1/10 of a second, then go completely unilluminated for 1.9 seconds in pulsing pattern.
The following actions wake the printer from Sleep Mode:
•Touching the screen or any hard button presses.
•Opening an input tray, cover, or door.
•Sending a print job from the computer.
•Performing a Power On Reset (POR) with the main power switch.
4Keypad Lets you enter numbers, letter, or symbols
5Submit Lets you submit changes made in the printer settings
6Stop/Cancel Stops all printer activity
Note: A list of option is displayed once Stopped appears on the display.
7Home Lets you navigate back to the home screen
Learning about the printer 15
Understanding the home screen
Understanding the home screen
When the printer is turned on, the display shows a basic screen, referred to as the home screen. Touch the home screen
buttons and icons to initiate an action such as copying, faxing, or scanning; to open the menu screen; or to respond to
messages.
Note: Your home screen, icons, and buttons may vary depending on your home screen customization settings,
administrative setup, and active embedded solutions.
123.123.123.123
Touch To
Copy Access the Copy menus and make copies.
E-mail Access the E-mail menus and send e‑mails.
Fax Access the Fax menus and send fax.
Access the printer menus.
Note: These menus are available only when the printer is in the Ready state.
FTP Access the File Transfer Protocol (FTP) menus and scan documents directly to an FTP server.
Status message bar •Show the current printer status such as Ready or Busy.
•Show printer conditions such as Toner Low or Cartridge Low.
•Show intervention messages so the printer can continue processing.
Status/Supplies •Display a warning or error message whenever the printer requires intervention to continue
processing.
•Access the messages screen for more information on the message, and how to clear it.
USB or USB Thumbdrive View, select, print, scan, or e‑mail photos and documents from a flash drive.
Note: This button appears only when you return to the home screen while a memory card or
flash drive is connected to the printer.
Bookmarks Create, organize, and save a set of bookmarks (URL) into a tree view of folders and file links.
Note: The tree view supports only bookmarks created from this function, and not from any
other application.
Held Jobs Display all current held jobs.
Understanding the home screen 16
Other buttons that may appear on the home screen:
Touch To
Search held jobs Search on any of the following items:
•User name for held or confidential print jobs
•Job names for held jobs, excluding confidential print jobs
•Profile names
•Bookmark container or print job names
•USB container or print job names for supported file types
Release Held Fax Access the list of held faxes.
Note: This button appears only when there are held faxes with a
scheduled hold time previously set.
Lock Device Open a password entry screen. Enter the correct password to lock the
printer control panel.
Note: This button appears only when the printer is unlocked and
password has been set.
Unlock Device Open a password entry screen. Enter the correct password to unlock
the printer control panel.
Note: This button appears only when the printer is locked. The
printer control panel buttons and shortcuts cannot be used while
this appears.
Cancel Jobs Open the Cancel Jobs screen. The Cancel Jobs screen shows three
headings: Print, Fax, and Network.
The following options are available under the Print, Fax, and Network
headings:
•Print job
•Copy job
•Fax profile
•FTP
•E-mail send
Each heading has a list of jobs shown in a column under it which can
show only three jobs per screen. If more than three jobs exist in a
column, then an arrow appears enabling you to scroll through the jobs.
Change Language Launch the Change Language pop‑up window that lets you change the
primary language of the printer.
Understanding the home screen 17
Features
Feature Description
Menu trail line
Sample: Menus > Settings > Copy
Settings > Number of Copies
A menu trail line is located at the top of each menu screen. This feature shows the
path taken to arrive at the current menu.
Touch any of the underlined words to return to that menu.
Number of Copies is not underlined since this is the current screen. If you touch an
underlined word on the Number of Copies screen before the Number of Copies is
set and saved, then the selection is not saved, and it does not become the default
setting.
Attendance message alert If an attendance message affects a function, then this icon appears and the red
indicator light blinks.
Warning If an error condition occurs, then this icon appears.
Printer IP address
Sample: 123.123.123.123
The IP address of your network printer is located at the top left corner of the home
screen and appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods. You can use the
IP address when accessing the Embedded Web Server so you can view and remotely
configure printer settings even when you are not physically near the printer.
Using the touch-screen buttons
Note: Your home screen, icons, and buttons may vary depending on your home screen customization settings,
administrative setup, and active embedded solutions.
Sample touch screen
Touch To
Submit Submit changes made in the printer settings.
Sample Copy Print a sample copy.
Understanding the home screen 18
Touch To
Right arrow Scroll to the right.
Left arrow Scroll to the left.
Home Return to the home screen.
Right increase Select a higher value.
Left decrease Select a lower value.
Exit Exit from the current screen.
Tips Open a context-sensitive Help dialog on the touch screen.
Other touch-screen buttons
Touch To
Accept Save a setting.
Cancel •Cancel an action or a selection.
•Exit a screen and return to the previous screen without saving changes.
Understanding the home screen 19
Touch To
Reset Reset values on the screen.
Understanding the home screen 20
Setting up and using the home screen applications
Notes:
•Your home screen, icons, and buttons may vary depending on your home screen customization settings,
administrative setup, and active embedded applications. Some applications are supported only on select printer
models.
•There may be additional solutions and applications available for purchase. To learn more, visit
www.lexmark.com. Or, contact the place where you purchased the printer.
Accessing the Embedded Web Server
The Embedded Web Server is the printer Web page that lets you view and remotely configure printer settings even
when you are not physically near the printer.
1Obtain the printer IP address:
•From the printer control panel home screen
•From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu
•By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
3Press Enter.
Note: If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
Showing or hiding icons on the home screen
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer control panel home screen. The IP address appears as four sets
of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2Click Settings > General Settings > Home screen customization.
A list of basic printer functions appears.
3Select the check boxes to specify which icons appear on the printer home screen.
Note: Cleared check box items are hidden.
4Click Submit.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 21
Activating the home screen applications
Your printer comes with preinstalled home screen applications. Before you can use these applications, first activate
and set up these applications using the Embedded Web Server. For more information about accessing the Embedded
Web Server, see “Accessing the Embedded Web Server” on page 21.
For detailed information about configuring and using the home screen applications, visit the Lexmark Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com.
Setting up Forms and Favorites
Icon Description
The application helps you simplify and streamline work processes by letting you quickly find and print
frequently used online forms directly from the home screen.
Note: The printer must have permission to access the network folder, FTP site, or Web site where the
bookmark is stored. From the computer where the bookmark is stored, use sharing, security, and
firewall settings to allow the printer at least a read access. For help, see the documentation that
came with your operating system.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer control panel home screen. The IP address appears as four sets
of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2Click Settings > Device Solutions > Solutions (eSF) > Forms and Favorites.
3Define the bookmarks, and then customize the settings.
4Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Forms and Favorites on the printer home screen, and then navigate through form
categories, or search for forms based on a form number, name, or description.
Setting up Scan to Network
Icon Description
The application lets you capture a digital image of a hard‑copy document and route it to a shared network
folder. You can define up to 30 unique folder destinations.
Notes:
•The printer must have permission to write to the destinations. From the computer where the
destination is specified, use sharing, security, and firewall settings to allow the printer at least a
write access. For help, see the documentation that came with your operating system.
•The Scan to Network icon appears only when one or more destinations are defined.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer control panel home screen. The IP address appears as four sets
of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2Click Settings > Device Solutions > Solutions (eSF) > Scan to Network.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 22
3Specify the destinations, and then customize the settings.
4Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Scan to Network on the printer home screen, and then follow the instructions on the
printer display.
Setting up My MFP
Icon Description
The application lets you customize your touch‑screen settings and store those preferences in a flash
drive. Each time you want to copy, fax, or scan, insert the flash drive into the USB port of the printer. All
your personal preferences are automatically uploaded, including job settings, home screen preferences,
and address book.
Note: The icon appears only when a flash drive with My MFP settings is inserted into the USB port of
the printer.
To set up My MFP, insert a flash drive into the USB port of the printer, and then follow the instructions on the printer
display to run the setup wizard.
To use My MFP, insert the flash drive into the USB port of the printer when you want to copy, fax, or scan.
Understanding WS‑Scan
Icon Description
The Web Services‑Scan application lets you scan documents at the network printer, and then send the
scanned image to your computer. WS‑Scan is a Microsoft application that is similar to Scan to Network,
but has the capability of sending the scanned image to a Windows‑based application. To learn more
about WS‑Scan, see the Microsoft documentation.
Note: The icon appears on the printer home screen only when there is a computer registered with the
network printer. The computer must have either Windows 8, Windows 7, or Windows Vista operating
system installed.
Setting up Remote Operator Panel
This application shows the printer control panel on your computer screen and lets you interact with the printer control
panel, even when you are not physically near the network printer. From your computer screen, you can view the printer
status, release held print jobs, create bookmarks, and do other print-related tasks you might normally do while standing
at the network printer.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer control panel home screen. The IP address appears as four sets
of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2Click Settings > Device Solutions > Solutions (eSF) > Remote Operator Panel.
3Select the Enabled check box, and then customize the settings.
4Click Apply.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 23
To use the application, from the Embedded Web Server, click Applications > Remote Operator Panel > Launch VNC
Applet.
Exporting and importing a configuration
You can export configuration settings into a text file, and then import it to apply the settings to other printers.
Exporting a configuration to a file
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer control panel home screen. The IP address appears as four sets
of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2Click Settings or Configuration.
3Click Device Solutions > Solutions (eSF), or click Embedded Solutions.
4From Installed Solutions, click the name of the application you want to configure.
5Click Configure > Export.
6Follow the instructions on the computer screen to save the configuration file, and then type a unique file name or
use the default name.
Note: If a JVM Out of Memory error occurs, then repeat the export process until the configuration file is
saved.
Importing a configuration from a file
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer control panel home screen. The IP address appears as four sets
of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2Click Settings or Configuration.
3Click Device Solutions > Solutions (eSF), or click Embedded Solutions.
4From Installed Solutions, click the name of the application you want to configure.
5Click Configure > Import.
6Browse to the saved configuration file that was exported from a previously configured printer, and then load or
preview it.
Note: If a timeout occurs and a blank screen appears, then refresh the Web browser, and then click Apply.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 24
Additional printer setup
Turning on the printer
1Open the front door.
2Press the printer power switch.
3Close the front door.
Additional printer setup 25
Installing internal options
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Available internal options
•Memory cards
–Printer memory
–Flash memory
–Fonts
•Firmware cards
–Bar Code
–PrintCryptionTM
•Printer hard disk
•LexmarkTM Internal Solutions Ports (ISP)
–RS‑232‑C Serial ISP
–Parallel 1284‑B ISP
–MarkNetTM N8250 802.11 b/g/n Wireless ISP
–MarkNet N8130 10/100 Fiber ISP
–MarkNet N8120 10/100/1000 Ethernet ISP
Note: An external kit is needed to support the ISP.
Accessing the system board
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Additional printer setup 26
Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.
1Turn the screws counterclockwise to loosen them.
2Pull the system board forward to remove it.
3Use the following illustration to locate the appropriate connectors.
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.
Additional printer setup 27
1
2
3
1ISP connector
2Firmware and flash memory card connectors
3Memory card connectors
4Push the system board back into place.
Installing a memory card
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch
something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.
An optional memory card can be purchased separately and attached to the system board.
1Access the system board.
For more information, see “Accessing the system board” on page 26.
Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.
2Unpack the memory card.
Note: Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card.
Additional printer setup 28
3On the system board, open the memory card connector latches.
4Align the notch on the memory card to the ridge on the connector.
1
2
1Notch
2Ridge
Additional printer setup 29
5Push the memory card into the connector until it clicks into place.
Installing a flash memory or firmware card
The system board has two connections for an optional flash memory or firmware card. Only one of each may be installed,
but the connectors are interchangeable.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch
something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.
1Access the system board.
For more information, see “Accessing the system board” on page 26.
Notes:
•This task requires a flathead screwdriver.
•Do not unplug the fan cable upon opening the metal panel.
2Unpack the card.
Note: Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card.
Additional printer setup 30
3Holding the card by its sides, align the plastic pins on the card with the holes on the system board.
2
1
1Plastic pins
2Metal pins
4Push the card firmly into place.
Notes:
•The entire length of the connector on the card must touch and be flush against the system board.
•Be careful not to damage the connectors.
Installing an Internal Solutions Port
The system board supports one optional Lexmark Internal Solutions Port (ISP).
Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Additional printer setup 31
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch
something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.
1Access the system board.
For more information, see “Accessing the system board” on page 26.
2Remove the printer hard disk.
For more information, see “Removing a printer hard disk” on page 38
3Unpack the ISP kit.
2
3
4
1
1ISP solution
2Screws for the ISP solution
3Screws for the plastic bracket
4Plastic bracket
4Use the provided screws to attach the plastic bracket to the ISP solution.
Additional printer setup 32
5Use the provided screw to attach the ISP solution to the system board cage.
6Connect the ISP solution interface cable into the receptacle of the system board.
Additional printer setup 33
7Firmly connect the ISP solution to the system board cage using two screws.
Installing a printer hard disk
Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch
something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.
1Access the system board.
For more information, see “Accessing the system board” on page 26.
2Unpack the printer hard disk.
Additional printer setup 34
3Locate the appropriate connector on the system board.
Note: If an optional ISP is currently installed, then the printer hard disk must be installed onto the ISP.
To install a printer hard disk onto the ISP:
aUsing a flathead screwdriver, loosen the screws.
bRemove the screws attached to the printer hard disk mounting bracket, and then remove the bracket.
Additional printer setup 35
cAlign the standoffs of the printer hard disk to the holes in the ISP, and then press down on the printer hard disk
until the standoffs are in place.
dInsert the plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the ISP.
Note: The plugs and receptacles are color‑coded.
Additional printer setup 36
To install a printer hard disk directly on the system board:
aAlign the standoffs of the printer hard disk to the holes in the system board, and then press down on the printer
hard disk until the standoffs are in place.
bUse the two provided screws to attach the printer hard disk mounting bracket.
cInsert the plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the system board.
Note: The plugs and receptacles are color‑coded.
Additional printer setup 37
Removing a printer hard disk
Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.
Additional printer setup 38
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch
something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.
1Access the system board.
For more information, see “Accessing the system board” on page 26.
2Unplug the printer hard disk interface cable from the system board, leaving the cable attached to the printer hard
disk. To unplug the cable, squeeze the paddle at the plug of the interface cable to disengage the latch before pulling
the cable out.
Additional printer setup 39
3Remove the screws while holding the printer hard disk in place, and then remove the printer hard disk.
4Set aside the printer hard disk.
Installing hardware options
Order of installation
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must
use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high-capacity input tray, a duplex unit and an input
option, or more than one input option. If you purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and
faxes, you may need additional furniture. For more information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
Additional printer setup 40
Install the printer and any optional trays or finishers you have purchased in the following order:
Using a one‑tray module
•Optional 520‑sheet tray (Tray 2)
•Printer
•2,000‑sheet high‑capacity feeder
•Finisher
Using a three‑tray module
•Three‑tray module
•Printer
•2,000‑sheet high‑capacity feeder
•Finisher
Using a tandem‑tray module
•Tandem‑tray module
•Printer
•2,000‑sheet high‑capacity feeder
•Finisher
For information on installing a one‑tray module, three‑tray module, tandem‑tray module, high‑capacity feeder, or any
of the finishers, see the setup documentation that came with the option.
Installing optional trays
The printer supports the following optional trays:
•1‑tray module
•3‑tray module
•Tandem‑tray module
•High‑capacity feeder
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must
use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high-capacity input tray, a duplex unit and an input
option, or more than one input option. If you purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and
faxes, you may need additional furniture. For more information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
1Unpack the optional tray, and then remove all packing material.
2Place the tray near the printer.
3Turn off the printer.
Additional printer setup 41
4Align the printer with the tray, and then lower the printer into place.
1
2
11‑tray module
22,000-sheet high‑capacity feeder
2
1
13‑tray module
22,000‑sheet high‑capacity feeder
Additional printer setup 42
1
2
1Tandem‑tray module
22,000‑sheet high‑capacity feeder
5Turn the printer back on.
6Set the printer software to recognize the optional tray. For more information, see “Updating available options in
the printer driver” on page 46.
Attaching cables
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product
or make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a
lightning storm.
Connect the printer to the computer using a USB cable or Ethernet cable.
Be sure to match the following:
•The USB symbol on the cable with the USB symbol on the printer
•The appropriate Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port
Additional printer setup 43
3
4
5
1
2
1Telephone port
2Fax port
3Ethernet port
4USB printer port
5USB port
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the USB cable, any network adapter, or the printer in the area shown while
actively printing. A loss of data or a malfunction can occur.
Verifying printer setup
Once all hardware and software options are installed and the printer is turned on, verify that the printer is set up
correctly by printing the following:
•Menu settings page—Use this page to verify that all printer options are installed correctly. A list of installed options
appears toward the bottom of the page. If an option you installed is not listed, then it is not installed correctly.
Remove the option and install it again.
•Network setup page—If your printer is a network model and is attached to a network, print a network setup page
to verify the network connection. This page also provides important information that aids network printing
configuration.
Printing a menu settings page
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Menu Settings Page
Additional printer setup 44
Printing a network setup page
If the printer is attached to a network, then print a network setup page to verify the network connection. This page
also provides important information that aids network printing configuration.
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Network Setup Page
2Check the first section of the network setup page, and confirm that the status is Connected.
If the status is Not Connected, then the LAN drop may not be active, or the network cable may be malfunctioning.
Consult a system support person for a solution, and then print another network setup page.
Setting up the printer software
Installing the printer software
Notes:
•If you installed the printer software on the computer before but need to reinstall the software, then uninstall
the current software first.
•Close all open software programs before installing the printer software.
1Obtain a copy of the software installer package.
•From the Software and Documentation CD that came with your printer.
•From our Web site:
Go to http://support.lexmark.com, and then navigate to:
SUPPORT & DOWNLOAD > select your printer > select your operating system
2Double‑click the software installer package.
Wait for the installation dialog to appear.
If you are using a Software and Documentation CD and the installation dialog does not appear, then do the following:
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type D:\setup.exe > OK.
In Windows 7 or earlier
aClick or click Start, and then click Run.
bIn the Start Search or Run dialog, type D:\setup.exe.
cPress Enter, or click OK.
In Macintosh
Click the CD icon on the desktop.
Note: D is the letter of your CD or DVD drive.
3Click Install, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.
Additional printer setup 45
Updating available options in the printer driver
When any hardware options are installed, you may need to manually add the options in the printer driver to make
them available for use.
For Windows users
1Open the printers folder.
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type control printers > OK
In Windows 7 or earlier
aClick or click Start, and then click Run.
bIn the Start Search or Run dialog, type control printers.
cPress Enter, or click OK.
2Depending on your device, do either of the following:
•Press and hold the printer you want to update.
•Right‑click the printer you want to update.
3From the menu that appears, do either of the following:
•For Windows 7 or later, select Printer properties.
•For earlier versions, select Properties.
4Click the Configuration tab.
5Do either of the following:
•Click Update Now ‑ Ask Printer.
•Under Configuration Options, manually add any installed hardware options.
6Click Apply.
For Macintosh users
1From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:
•System Preferences > Print & Scan > select your printer > Options & Supplies > Driver
•System Preferences > Print & Fax > select your printer > Options & Supplies > Driver
2Add any installed hardware options, and then click OK.
Additional printer setup 46
Setting up wireless printing
Note: A Service Set Identifier (SSID) is a name assigned to a wireless network. Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP), Wi-Fi
Protected Access (WPA), WPA2, and 802.1X - RADIUS are types of security used on a network.
Preparing to set up the printer on a wireless network
Notes:
•Make sure your wireless network adapter is installed in your printer and working properly. For more
information, see the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.
•Make sure your access point (wireless router) is turned on and is working properly.
Make sure you have the following information before setting up the printer on a wireless network:
•SSID—The SSID is also referred to as the network name.
•Wireless Mode (or Network Mode)—The mode is either infrastructure or ad hoc.
•Channel (for ad hoc networks)—The channel defaults to automatic for infrastructure networks.
Some ad hoc networks will also require the automatic setting. Check with your system support person if you are
not sure which channel to select.
•Security Method—There are four basic options for Security Method:
–WEP key
If your network uses more than one WEP key, then enter up to four in the provided spaces. Select the key
currently in use on the network by selecting the default WEP transmit key.
–WPA or WPA2 preshared key or passphrase
WPA includes encryption as an additional layer of security. The choices are AES or TKIP. Encryption must be set
for the same type on the router and on the printer, or the printer will not be able to communicate on the
network.
–802.1X–RADIUS
If you are installing the printer on an 802.1X network, then you may need the following:
•Authentication type
•Inner authentication type
•802.1X user name and password
•Certificates
–No security
If your wireless network does not use any type of security, then you will not have any security information.
Note: We do not recommend using an unsecured wireless network.
Notes:
–If you do not know the SSID of the network that your computer is connected to, then launch the wireless utility
of the computer network adapter, and then look for the network name. If you cannot find the SSID or the
security information for your network, then see the documentation that came with the access point, or contact
your system support person.
–To find the WPA/WPA2 preshared key or passphrase for the wireless network, see the documentation that
came with the access point, see the Embedded Web Server associated with the access point, or consult your
system support person.
Additional printer setup 47
Installing the printer on a wireless network (Windows)
Before installing the printer on a wireless network, make sure:
•Your wireless network is set up and is working properly.
•The computer you are using is connected to the same wireless network where you want to set up the printer.
1Connect the power cord to the printer, then to a properly grounded electrical outlet, and then turn on the printer.
Note: Make sure the printer and the computer are fully on and ready.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not connect the USB cable until instructed to do so on the computer screen.
2Obtain a copy of the software installer package.
•From the Software and Documentation CD that came with your printer.
•From our Web site:
Go to http://support.lexmark.com, and then navigate to:
SUPPORT & DOWNLOAD > select your printer > select your operating system
3Double‑click the software installer package.
Wait for the installation dialog to appear.
If you are using the Software and Documentation CD and the installation dialog does not appear, then do the
following:
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type D:\setup.exe > OK
In Windows 7 or earlier
aClick or click Start, and then click Run.
bIn the Start Search or Run dialog, type D:\setup.exe.
cPress Enter or click OK.
Additional printer setup 48
Note: D is the letter of your CD or DVD drive.
4Click Install, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.
5Select Wireless connection when asked to choose a connection type.
6From the Wireless Configuration dialog, select Guided Setup (Recommended).
Note: Choose Advanced Setup only if you want to customize your installation.
7Temporarily connect a USB cable between the computer on the wireless network and the printer.
Note: After the printer is configured, the software will instruct you to disconnect the temporary USB cable so
you can print wirelessly.
8Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
Note: For more information on allowing other computers on the network to use the wireless printer, see the
Networking Guide.
Installing the printer on a wireless network (Macintosh)
Note: Make sure to disconnect the Ethernet cable when installing the printer on a wireless network.
Prepare to configure the printer
1Connect the power cord to the printer, then to a properly grounded electrical outlet, and then turn on the printer.
Additional printer setup 49
2Locate the printer MAC address.
aFrom the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Reports > > Network Setup Page >
or
> Reports > Network Setup Page
bIn the Standard Network Card section, look for UAA (MAC).
Note: You will need this information later.
Enter the printer information
1Access the AirPort options:
In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later
From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:
•System Preferences > Network > Wi‑Fi
•System Preferences > Network > AirPort
In Mac OS X version 10.4
From the Finder, navigate to:
Applications > Internet Connect > AirPort
2From the Network Name pop‑up menu, select print server [yyyyyy], where the y’s are the last six digits of the MAC
address located on the MAC address sheet.
3Open a Web browser.
4From the Bookmarks menu, select Show or Show All Bookmarks.
5Under COLLECTIONS, select Bonjour or Rendezvous, and then double‑click the printer name.
Note: The application referred to as Rendezvous in Mac OS X version 10.2 is now called Bonjour by Apple Inc.
6From the Embedded Web Server, navigate to the location of the wireless settings information.
Configure the printer for wireless access
1Type the network name (SSID) in the appropriate field.
2Select Infrastructure as your Network Mode setting if you are using an access point (wireless router).
3Select the type of security you want to use to protect the wireless network.
4Enter the security information necessary for the printer to connect to the wireless network.
5Click Submit.
6Open the AirPort application on the computer:
In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later
From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:
•System Preferences > Network > Wi‑Fi
•System Preferences > Network > AirPort
Additional printer setup 50
In Mac OS X version 10.4
From the Finder, navigate to:
Applications > Internet Connect > AirPort
7From the Network pop‑up menu, select the name of the wireless network.
Configure your computer to use the printer wirelessly
To print on a network printer, each Macintosh user must install a custom printer driver file and create a print queue in
the Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.
1Install a printer driver file on the computer:
aObtain a copy of the software installer package.
•From the Software and Documentation CD that came with your printer.
•From our Web site:
Go to http://support.lexmark.com, and then navigate to:
SUPPORT & DOWNLOAD > select your printer > select your operating system
bDouble‑click the installer package for the printer.
cFollow the instructions on the computer screen.
dSelect a destination, and then click Continue.
eFrom the Easy Install screen, click Install.
fType the user password, and then click OK.
All necessary applications are installed in the computer.
gClick Close when the installation is complete.
2Add the printer:
aFor IP printing:
In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later
1From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:
•System Preferences > Print & Scan
•System Preferences > Print & Fax
2Click +.
3If necessary, click Add Printer or Scanner or Add Other Printer or Scanner.
4Click the IP tab.
5Type the IP address of the printer in the address field, and then click Add.
In Mac OS X version 10.4
1From the Finder, navigate to:
Applications > Utilities
2Double‑click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.
3From the Printer List, choose Add, and then click IP Printer.
4Type the IP address of the printer in the address field, and then click Add.
bFor AppleTalk printing:
Notes:
•Make sure AppleTalk is activated on your printer.
Additional printer setup 51
•This feature is supported only in Mac OS X version 10.5 or earlier.
In Mac OS X version 10.5
1From the Apple menu, navigate to:
System Preferences > Print & Fax
2Click +, and then navigate to:
AppleTalk > select the printer from the list > Add
In Mac OS X version 10.4
1From the Finder, navigate to:
Applications > Utilities
2Double‑click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.
3From the Printer List, click Add.
4Click Default Browser tab > More Printers.
5From the first pop‑up menu, select AppleTalk.
6From the second pop‑up menu, select Local AppleTalk Zone.
7Select the printer from the list, and then click Add.
Installing the printer on an Ethernet network
Note: Make sure you have completed the initial setup of the printer.
For Windows users
1Obtain a copy of the software installer package.
•From the Software and Documentation CD that came with your printer.
•From our Web site:
Go to http://support.lexmark.com, and then navigate to:
SUPPORT & DOWNLOAD > select your printer > select your operating system
2Double‑click the software installer package.
Wait for the installation dialog to appear.
If you are using the Software and Documentation CD and the installation dialog does not appear, then do the
following:
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type D:\setup.exe > OK
In Windows 7 or earlier
aClick or click Start, and then click Run.
bIn the Start Search or Run dialog, type D:\setup.exe.
cPress Enter or click OK.
Note: D is the letter of your CD or DVD drive.
Additional printer setup 52
3Click Install, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.
Note: To configure the printer using a static IP address, IPv6, or scripts, select Advanced Options >
Administrator Tools.
4Select Ethernet connection, and then click Continue.
5Attach the Ethernet cable when instructed to do so.
6Select the printer from the list, and then click Continue.
Note: If the configured printer does not appear in the list, then click Modify Search.
7Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
For Macintosh users
1Allow the network DHCP server to assign an IP address to the printer.
2Obtain the printer IP address either:
•From the printer control panel
•From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu
•By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section
Note: You will need the IP address if you are configuring access for computers on a different subnet than the printer.
3Install the printer driver on the computer.
aDouble‑click the installer package for the printer.
bFollow the instructions on the computer screen.
cSelect a destination, and then click Continue.
dFrom the Easy Install screen, click Install.
eType the user password, and then click OK.
All the necessary applications are installed on the computer.
fClick Close when the installation is complete.
4Add the printer.
•For IP printing:
In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later
aFrom the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:
–System Preferences > Print & Scan
–System Preferences > Print & Fax
bClick +.
cIf necessary, click Add Printer or Scanner or Add Other Printer or Scanner.
dClick the IP tab.
eType the printer IP address in the address field, and then click Add.
In Mac OS X version 10.4 or earlier
aFrom the Finder, navigate to:
Applications > Utilities
bDouble‑click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.
Additional printer setup 53
cFrom the printer list, click Add, and then click IP Printer.
dType the scanner IP address in the address field, and then click Add.
•For AppleTalk printing:
Notes:
–Make sure AppleTalk is activated on your printer.
–This feature is supported only in Mac OS X version 10.5 or earlier.
In Mac OS X version 10.5
aFrom the Apple menu, navigate to:
System Preferences > Print & Fax
bClick +, and then navigate to:
AppleTalk > select your printer > Add
In Mac OS X version 10.4 or earlier
aFrom the Finder, navigate to:
Applications > Utilities
bDouble‑click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.
cFrom the printer list, click Add.
dClick Default Browser tab > More Printers.
eFrom the first pop‑up menu, select AppleTalk.
fFrom the second pop‑up menu, select Local AppleTalk Zone.
gSelect the device from the list, and then click Add.
Note: If the scanner does not show up in the list, then you may need to add it using the IP address. For more
information, contact your system support person.
Additional printer setup 54
Changing port settings after installing a new network Internal
Solutions Port
When a new Lexmark Internal Solutions Port (ISP) is installed in the printer, the printer configurations on computers
that access the printer must be updated since the printer will be assigned a new IP address. All computers that access
the printer must be updated with this new IP address.
Notes:
•If the printer has a static IP address, then you do not need to make any changes to the computer configurations.
•If the computers are configured to use the network name, instead of an IP address, then you do not need to
make any changes to your computer configurations.
•If you are adding a wireless ISP to a printer previously configured for an Ethernet connection, then make sure
the printer is disconnected from the Ethernet network when you configure the printer to operate wirelessly. If
the printer is connected to the Ethernet network, then the wireless configuration completes, but the wireless
ISP is inactive. To activate the wireless ISP, disconnect the printer from the Ethernet network, turn off the
printer, and then turn it back on.
•Only one network connection is active at a time. To switch between Ethernet and wireless connection types,
turn off the printer, connect the cable (to switch to an Ethernet connection) or disconnect the cable (to switch
to a wireless connection), and then turn the printer back on.
For Windows users
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer control panel. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Open the printers folder.
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type Run and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type control printers > OK
In Windows 7 or earlier
aClick , or click Start and then click Run.
bIn the Start Search or Run dialog, type control printers.
cPress Enter, or click OK.
3To select the printer that has changed, do either of the following:
•Press and hold the printer, and then select Printer properties.
•Right‑click the printer, and then select Printer properties (Windows 7 or later) or Properties (earlier versions).
Note: If there is more than one copy of the printer, then update all of them with the new IP address.
4Click the Ports tab.
5Select the port from the list, and then click Configure Port.
Additional printer setup 55
6Type the new IP address in the “Printer Name or IP Address” field.
7Click OK > Close.
For Macintosh users
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer control panel. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Add the printer.
•For IP printing:
aFrom the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:
–System Preferences > Print & Scan
–System Preferences > Print & Fax
bClick +.
cClick the IP tab.
dType the printer IP address in the address field, and then click Add.
•For AppleTalk printing:
Notes:
–Make sure AppleTalk is activated on your printer.
–This feature is supported only in Mac OS X version 10.5.
aFrom the Apple menu, navigate to:
System Preferences > Print & Fax
bClick +, and then navigate to:
AppleTalk > select the printer > Add
Setting up serial printing
Use serial printing to print even when the computer is far from the printer, or to print at a reduced speed.
After installing the serial or communication (COM) port, configure the printer and the computer. Make sure you have
connected the serial cable to the COM port on your printer.
1Set the parameters in the printer.
aFrom the printer control panel, navigate to the menu for the port settings.
bLocate the menu for the serial port settings, and then adjust the settings, if necessary.
cSave the modified settings, and then print a menu settings page.
Additional printer setup 56
2Install the printer driver.
aObtain a copy of the software installer package.
•From the Software and Documentation CD that came with your printer
•From our Web site:
Go to http://support.lexmark.com, and then navigate to:
SUPPORT & DOWNLOAD > select your printer > select your operating system
bDouble‑click the software installer package.
Wait for the installation dialog to appear.
If the your are using the Software and Documentation CD and the installation dialog does not appear, then do
the following:
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type D:\setup.exe > OK
In Windows 7 or earlier
1Click or click Start, and then click Run.
2In the Start Search or Run dialog, type D:\setup.exe.
3Press Enter, or click OK.
Note: D is the letter of your CD or DVD drive.
cClick Install.
dFollow the instructions on the computer screen.
eSelect Advanced, and then click Continue.
fFrom the Configure Printer Connection dialog, select a port.
gIf the port is not in the list, then click Refresh, or navigate to:
Add port > select a port type > enter the necessary information > OK
hClick Continue > Finish.
3Set the COM port parameters.
After installing the printer driver, set the serial parameters in the COM port assigned to the printer driver.
Note: Make sure the serial parameters in the COM port match the serial parameters you set in the printer.
aOpen Device Manager.
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type devmgmt.msc > OK
In Windows 7 or earlier
1Click , or click Start and then click Run.
2In the Start Search or Run dialog, type devmgmt.msc.
3Press Enter, or click OK.
bDouble‑click Ports (COM & LPT) to expand the list of available ports.
Additional printer setup 57
cDo either of the following:
•Press and hold the COM port where you attached the serial cable to your computer (example: COM1).
•Right‑click the COM port where you attached the serial cable to your computer (example: COM1).
dFrom the menu that appears, select Properties.
eOn the Port Settings tab, set the serial parameters to the same serial parameters set in the printer.
Check the serial heading of the menu settings page for the printer settings.
fClick OK, and then close all the dialogs.
gPrint a test page to verify printer installation.
Additional printer setup 58
Minimizing your printer's environmental impact
Lexmark is committed to environmental sustainability and is continually improving its printers to reduce their impact
on the environment. We design with the environment in mind, engineer our packaging to reduce materials, and provide
collection and recycling programs. For more information, see:
•The Notices chapter
•The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com/environment
•The Lexmark recycling program at www.lexmark.com/recycle
By selecting certain printer settings or tasks, you may be able to reduce your printer's impact even further. This chapter
outlines the settings and tasks that may yield a greater environmental benefit.
Saving paper and toner
Studies show that as much as 80% of the carbon footprint of a printer is related to paper usage. You can significantly
reduce your carbon footprint by using recycled paper and the following printing suggestions, such as printing on both
sides of the paper and printing multiple pages on one side of a single sheet of paper.
To save paper and energy using one printer setting, use Eco-Mode.
Using recycled paper
As an environmentally conscious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled office paper produced specifically for
use in laser/LED printers. For more information on recycled papers that work well with your printer, see “Using recycled
paper and other office papers” on page 79.
Conserving supplies
Use both sides of the paper
If your printer model supports duplex printing, you can control whether print appears on one or two sides of the paper
by selecting 2‑sided printing from the Print dialog or from the Lexmark Toolbar.
Place multiple pages on one sheet of paper
You can print up to 16 consecutive pages of a multiple‑page document onto one side of a single sheet of paper by
selecting a setting from the Multipage printing (N‑Up) section of the Print dialog screen.
Check your first draft for accuracy
Before printing or making multiple copies of a document:
•Use the preview feature, which you can select from the Print dialog or from the Lexmark Toolbar to see how the
document will look like before you print it.
•Print one copy of the document to check its content and format for accuracy.
Avoid paper jams
Correctly set the paper type and size to avoid paper jams. For more information, see “Avoiding jams” on page 265.
Minimizing your printer's environmental impact 59
Print in black and white
To print all text and graphics using only the black toner cartridge, set the printer to Black Only. For more information,
see “Printing in black and white” on page 88.
Use Max Speed or Max Yield settings
The Max Speed and Max Yield settings let you choose between a faster print speed or a higher toner yield. Max Speed
is the factory default setting. For more information, see “Using Max Speed and Max Yield” on page 89.
Saving energy
Using Eco‑Mode
1Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
•View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
•Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2Click Settings > General Settings > Eco‑Mode > select a setting > Submit.
Choose To
Off Use factory default settings for all settings associated with Eco‑Mode. This setting supports the performance
specifications of your printer.
Energy Reduce energy use, especially when the printer is idle.
•Printer engine motors do not start until it is ready to print. You may notice a short delay before the first
page is printed.
•The printer enters Sleep mode after one minute of inactivity.
•When the printer enters Sleep mode, the printer control panel display and the standard exit bin lights
are turned off.
•If scanning is supported, the scanner lamps are activated only when a scan job is started.
Energy/Paper Use all the settings associated with Energy mode and Paper mode.
Paper •Enable the automatic duplex feature.
•Turn off print log features.
Reducing printer noise
To select a Quiet Mode setting using the Embedded Web Server:
1Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
•View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
•Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2Click Settings > General Settings > Quiet Mode > select a setting > Submit.
Minimizing your printer's environmental impact 60
Choose To
Off
Note: Selecting Photo from the driver may disable Quiet
Mode and provide better print quality and full speed
printing.
Use factory default settings. This setting supports the
performance specifications of your printer.
On Reduce printer noise.
•Print jobs will process at a reduced speed.
•Printer engine motors do not start until a document is
ready to print. There will be a short delay before the first
page is printed.
•If your printer has faxing capability, fax sounds are
reduced or disabled, including those made by the fax
speaker and ringer. The fax is placed in standby mode.
•The alarm control and cartridge alarm sounds are turned
off.
•The printer will ignore the Advance Start command.
Adjusting Sleep Mode
To save energy, you can decrease the number of minutes before the printer enters Sleep Mode.
Available settings range from 1–240 minutes. The factory default setting is 30 minutes.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
•View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
•Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2Click Settings > General Settings > Timeouts.
3In the Sleep Mode field, enter the number of minutes you want the printer to wait before it enters Sleep Mode.
4Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Timeouts
2Touch the arrows next to Sleep Mode to select the number of minutes you want the printer to wait before it
enters Sleep Mode.
3Touch Submit.
Minimizing your printer's environmental impact 61
Using Hibernate Mode
Hibernate is an ultra‑low power operating mode. When operating in Hibernate mode, the printer is essentially off, and
all other systems and devices are powered down safely.
Note: The Hibernate and Sleep modes can be scheduled.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then you can:
•View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
•Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2Click Settings > General Settings > Sleep Button Settings.
3From the Press Sleep Button or Press and Hold Sleep Button drop‑down, select Hibernate.
4Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Press Sleep Button or Press and Hold Sleep Button > Hibernate
2Touch Submit.
Adjusting the brightness of the display
To save energy, or if you have trouble reading your display, then adjust the brightness of the display.
Available settings range from 20–100. The factory default setting is 100.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
•View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
•Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2Click Settings > General Settings.
3In the Screen Brightness field, enter the brightness percentage you want for the display.
4Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings
2Touch the arrows until Screen Brightness appears, and then select a setting.
3Touch Submit.
Minimizing your printer's environmental impact 62
Recycling
Lexmark provides collection programs and environmentally progressive approaches to recycling. For more information,
see:
•The Notices chapter
•The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com/environment
•The Lexmark recycling program at www.lexmark.com/recycle
Recycling Lexmark products
To return Lexmark products for recycling:
1Go to www.lexmark.com/recycle.
2Find the product type you want to recycle, and then select your country or region from the list.
3Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
Note: Printer supplies and hardware not listed in the Lexmark collection program may be recycled through your local
recycling center. Contact your local recycling center to determine the items they accept.
Recycling Lexmark packaging
Lexmark continually strives to minimize packaging. Less packaging helps to ensure that Lexmark printers are transported
in the most efficient and environmentally sensitive manner and that there is less packaging to dispose of. These
efficiencies result in fewer greenhouse emissions, energy savings, and natural resource savings.
Lexmark cartons are 100% recyclable where corrugated recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist in your area.
The foam used in Lexmark packaging is recyclable where foam recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist in your
area.
When you return a cartridge to Lexmark, you can reuse the box that the cartridge came in. Lexmark will recycle the
box.
Returning Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling
Lexmark Cartridge Collection Program diverts millions of Lexmark cartridges from landfills annually by making it both
easy and free for Lexmark customers to return used cartridges to Lexmark for reuse or recycling. One hundred percent
of the empty cartridges returned to Lexmark are either reused or demanufactured for recycling. Boxes used to return
the cartridges are also recycled.
To return Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling, follow the instructions that came with your printer or cartridge and
use the prepaid shipping label. You can also do the following:
1Go to www.lexmark.com/recycle.
2From the Toner Cartridges section, select your country or region.
3Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
Minimizing your printer's environmental impact 63
Loading paper and specialty media
Setting the paper size and type
The Paper Size setting is automatically sensed according to the position of the paper guides in each tray except the
multipurpose feeder. The Paper Size setting for the multipurpose feeder must be set manually from the Paper Size
menu. The Paper Type setting must be set manually for all trays that do not contain plain paper.
From the home screen navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Paper Size/Type > select a tray > select the paper size or type > Submit
Configuring Universal paper settings
The Universal Paper Size is a user‑defined setting that lets you print on paper sizes that are not preset in the printer
menus. Set paper size to Universal for the specified tray when the size you want is not available from the Paper Size
menu. Then specify all of the following Universal size settings for your paper:
•Units of Measure
•Portrait Width
•Portrait Height
The following are the supported Universal sizes:
•76.2–296.93 x 76.2–1219.2 mm (3–11.69 x 3–48 inches)
•297.18–320.29 x 76.2–609.6 mm (11.70–12.61 x 3–24 inches)
•320.55–609.6 x 76.2–320.29 mm (12.62–24 x 3–12.61 inches)
•609.85–1219.2 x 76.2–296.93 mm (24.01–48 x 3–11.69 inches)
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Universal Setup > Units of Measure > select a unit of measure
2Touch Portrait Width or Portrait Height.
3Select the width or height, and then touch Submit.
Loading the standard or optional 520‑sheet tray
The printer has one standard 520‑sheet tray (Tray 1), and may have one or more optional 520‑sheet trays. All 520‑sheet
trays support the same paper sizes and types.
Loading paper and specialty media 64
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each paper drawer or tray
separately. Keep all other drawers or trays closed until needed.
1Pull the tray out.
Notice the size indicators at the bottom of the tray. Use these indicators to help position the length and width
guides.
Loading paper and specialty media 65
2Squeeze and then slide the width guide to the correct position for the paper size loaded.
3Squeeze and then slide the length guide to the correct position for the paper size loaded.
Note: The length guide has a locking device. To unlock, slide the button on top of the length guide down. To
lock, slide the button up when a length has been selected.
4Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the edges on a level
surface.
5Load the paper stack with the recommended print side faceup.
Loading paper and specialty media 66
Notes:
•Place print side facedown for duplex printing.
•Place pre-punched paper with the holes toward the front of the tray.
•Place letterheads with the header on the left side of the tray.
•Make sure the paper is below the maximum fill line located on the edge of the paper tray.
Warning—Potential Damage: Overloading the tray can cause paper jams and possible printer damage.
6Insert the tray.
7From the printer control panel, verify the Paper Size and Paper Type setting for the tray based on the paper you
loaded.
Loading the optional 850‑ and 1,150‑sheet trays
The 850‑ and 1,150‑sheet trays support the same paper sizes and types, and require the same process for loading
paper.
Loading paper and specialty media 67
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each paper drawer or tray
separately. Keep all other drawers or trays closed until needed.
1Pull the tray out.
2Squeeze and then slide the length guide to the correct position for the paper size you are loading.
3Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the edges on a level
surface.
Loading paper and specialty media 68
4Load the paper stack with the recommended print side faceup.
Notes:
•Place print side facedown for duplex printing.
•Place pre-punched paper with the holes toward the front of the tray.
•Place letterheads faceup with the header on the left side of the tray.
•Place letterheads facedown with the header on the right side of the tray for duplex printing.
•Make sure the paper is below the maximum fill line located on the edge of the paper tray.
Warning—Potential Damage: Overloading the tray can cause paper jams and possible printer damage.
5Insert the tray.
6From the printer control panel, verify the Paper Size and Paper Type setting for the tray based on the paper you
loaded.
Loading paper and specialty media 69
Loading the 2000‑sheet high‑capacity feeder
The high‑capacity feeder can hold up to 2,000 sheets of letter‑, A4‑, and legal‑size paper (80 g/m2 or 20 lb).
1Pull the tray out.
2Adjust the width guide as necessary.
Loading paper and specialty media 70
3Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the edges on a level
surface.
4Load paper into the tray with the print side faceup.
Note: Make sure the paper is below the maximum fill line located on the edge of the paper tray. Overloading
the tray can cause paper jams and possible printer damage.
Loading paper and specialty media 71
Notes:
•Place pre-punched paper with the holes toward the front of the tray.
•Place letterheads faceup with the header on the left side of the tray.
•Place letterheads facedown with the header on the right side of the tray for duplex printing.
5Insert the tray.
Loading the multipurpose feeder
The multipurpose feeder can hold several sizes and types of print media, such as transparencies, labels, card stock, and
envelopes. It can be used for single-page or manual printing, or as an additional tray.
The multipurpose feeder can hold approximately:
•100 sheets of 75‑g/m2 (20‑lb) paper
•10 envelopes
•75 transparencies
The multipurpose feeder accepts paper or specialty media within the following dimensions:
•Width—89 mm (3.5 in.) to 229 mm (9.02 in.)
•Length—127 mm (5 in.) to 1270 mm (50 in.)
Note: Maximum width and length can be applied only to short-edge feeding.
Note: Do not add or remove paper or specialty media when the printer is printing from the multipurpose feeder or
when the printer control panel indicator light is blinking. Doing so may cause a jam.
1Pull down the multipurpose feeder door.
Loading paper and specialty media 72
2For paper or specialty media that is longer than letter-size paper, gently pull the extension until it is fully extended.
3Flex the sheets of paper or specialty media back and forth to loosen them. Do not fold or crease them. Straighten
the edges on a level surface.
Paper
Envelopes
Transparencies
Note: Avoid scratching or touching the print side.
Loading paper and specialty media 73
4Push the paper pick tab, and then load the paper or specialty media. Slide the stack gently into the multipurpose
feeder until it comes to a stop, and then release the paper pick tab.
Warning—Potential Damage: Pulling the paper out, without pushing the paper pick tab first, may cause jams or
the paper pick tab to break.
•Load paper and transparencies with the recommended print side facedown and the long edge entering the
printer first.
•For duplex letterhead printing, place the letterhead faceup and the header entering the printer last.
•Load envelopes with the flap side up and to the right.
Warning—Potential Damage: Never use envelopes with stamps, clasps, snaps, windows, coated linings, or
self‑stick adhesives. These envelopes may severely damage the printer.
Notes:
•Do not exceed the maximum stack height by forcing paper or transparencies under the stack height limiter.
•Load only one size and type of paper at a time.
Loading paper and specialty media 74
5Adjust the width guide to lightly touch the edge of the stack. Make sure the paper or specialty media fits loosely in
the multipurpose feeder, lies flat, and is not bent or wrinkled.
6From the printer control panel, set the Paper Size and Paper Type for the multipurpose feeder (MP Feeder Size and
MP Feeder Type) based on the paper or specialty media loaded.
Linking and unlinking trays
Linking trays
Tray linking is useful for large print jobs or for printing multiple copies. When one linked tray is empty, paper feeds
from the next linked tray. When the Paper Size and Paper Type settings are the same for any trays, the trays are
automatically linked. The Paper Size setting is automatically sensed according to the position of the paper guides in
each tray except Tray 1 and the multipurpose feeder. The Paper Size setting for the multipurpose feeder must be set
manually from the Paper Size menu. The Paper Type setting must be set for all trays from the Paper Type menu. The
Paper Type menu and the Paper Size menu are both available from the Paper Size/Type menu.
Unlinking trays
Note: Trays that do not have the same settings as any other tray are not linked.
Change one of the following tray settings:
•Paper Type
Paper Type names describe the paper characteristics. If the name that best describes your paper is used by linked
trays, assign a different Paper Type name to the tray, such as Custom Type [x], or define your own custom name.
•Paper Size
Load a different paper size to automatically change the Paper Size setting for a tray. Paper Size settings for the
multipurpose feeder are not automatic; they must be set manually from the Paper Size menu.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not assign a Paper Type name that does not accurately describe the type of paper
loaded in a tray. The temperature of the fuser varies according to the specified Paper Type. Prints may not be
properly processed if an inaccurate Paper Type is selected.
Loading paper and specialty media 75
Creating a custom name for a paper type
If the printer is on a network, you can use the Embedded Web Server to define a name other than Custom Type [x] for
each of the custom paper types loaded into the printer.
1Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then you can:
•View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
•Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Name > type a name > Submit.
Note: This custom name will replace the Custom Type [x] name under the Custom Types and Paper Size and
Type menus.
3Click Custom Types > select a paper type > Submit.
Assigning a custom paper type name
Assign a custom paper type name to a tray when linking or unlinking trays.
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Paper Size/Type > select a custom paper type name > select a tray > Submit
Configuring a custom name
If the printer is on a network, then you can use the Embedded Web Server to define a name other than Custom Type [x]
for each of the custom paper types loaded into the printer.
1Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then you can:
•View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
•Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Types > select the custom name you want to configure > select a paper or
specialty media type > Submit.
Loading paper and specialty media 76
Paper and specialty media guide
Notes:
•Make sure the paper size, type, and weight are set correctly on the computer or on the printer control panel.
•Flex, fan, and straighten specialty media before loading it.
•The printer may print at a reduced speed to prevent damage to the fuser.
•For more information on card stock and labels, see the Card Stock & Label Guide on the Lexmark Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com.
Paper guidelines
Paper characteristics
The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability. Consider these characteristics when evaluating
new paper stock.
Weight
The printer trays can automatically feed paper weights from 60 to 300 g/m2 (16–80 lb bond) grain long. Paper lighter
than 60 g/m2 (16 lb) might not be stiff enough to feed properly, causing jams. For best performance, use 75 g/m2 (20 lb
bond) grain long paper. For paper smaller than 182 x 257 mm (7.2 x 10.1 in.), we recommend 90 g/m2 (24 lb) or heavier
paper.
Notes:
•The duplex unit supports only 60–169 g/m2 (16–32 lb bond) paper weights.
•The multipurpose feeder supports 60–300 g/m2 (16–80 lb bond) paper weights.
Curl
Curl is the tendency for paper to curl at its edges. Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems. Curl can occur after
the paper passes through the printer, where it is exposed to high temperatures. Storing paper unwrapped in hot, humid,
cold, or dry conditions, even in the trays, can contribute to paper curling prior to printing and can cause feeding
problems.
Smoothness
Paper smoothness directly affects print quality. If paper is too rough, then toner cannot fuse to it properly. If paper is
too smooth, then it can cause paper feeding or print quality issues. Always use paper between 100 and 300 Sheffield
points; however, smoothness between 150 and 200 Sheffield points produces the best print quality.
Moisture content
The amount of moisture in paper affects both print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the paper correctly.
Leave paper in its original wrapper until it is time to use it. This limits the exposure of paper to moisture changes that
can degrade its performance.
Paper and specialty media guide 77
Store paper in its original wrapper in the same environment as the printer for 24 to 48 hours before printing. Extend
the time to several days if the storage or transportation environment is very different from the printer environment.
Thick paper may also require a longer conditioning period.
Grain direction
Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper. Grain is either grain long, running the length of
the paper, or grain short, running the width of the paper.
For 60–135 g/m2 (16–36 lb bond) paper, grain long paper is recommended. For papers heavier than 135 g/m2, grain
short is recommended.
Fiber content
Most high‑quality xerographic paper is made from 100% chemically treated pulped wood. This content provides the
paper with a high degree of stability resulting in fewer paper feeding problems and better print quality. Paper containing
fibers such as cotton can negatively affect paper handling.
Unacceptable paper
The following paper types are not recommended for use with the printer:
•Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as carbonless papers, carbonless
copy paper (CCP), or no carbon required (NCR) paper
•Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the printer
•Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser
•Preprinted papers that require a registration (the precise print location on the page) greater than ±2.3 mm (±0.9 in.),
such as optical character recognition (OCR) forms
In some cases, registration can be adjusted with a software application to successfully print on these forms.
•Coated papers (erasable bond), synthetic papers, thermal papers
•Rough‑edged, rough or heavily textured surface papers, or curled papers
•Recycled papers that fail EN12281:2002 (European)
•Paper weighing less than 60 g/m2 (16 lb)
•Multiple‑part forms or documents
Selecting paper
Using appropriate paper prevents jams and helps ensure trouble‑free printing.
To help avoid jams and poor print quality:
•Always use new, undamaged paper.
•Before loading paper, know the recommended print side of the paper. This information is usually indicated on the
paper package.
•Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
•Do not mix paper sizes, types, or weights in the same source; mixing results in jams.
•Do not use coated papers unless they are specifically designed for electrophotographic printing.
Paper and specialty media guide 78
Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead
Use these guidelines when selecting preprinted forms and letterhead:
•Use grain long for 60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to 24 lb) weight paper.
•Use only forms and letterhead printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing process.
•Avoid papers with rough or heavily textured surfaces.
Use papers printed with heat‑resistant inks designed for use in xerographic copiers. The ink must be able to withstand
temperatures up to 190°C (374°F) without melting or releasing hazardous emissions. Use inks that are not affected by
the resin in toner. Inks that are oxidation‑set or oil‑based generally meet these requirements; latex inks might not.
When in doubt, contact the paper supplier.
Preprinted papers such as letterhead must be able to withstand temperatures up to 190°C (374°F) without melting or
releasing hazardous emissions.
Using recycled paper and other office papers
As an environmentally conscientious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled paper produced specifically for
use in laser (electrophotographic) printers.
While no blanket statement can be made that all recycled paper will feed well, Lexmark consistently tests papers that
represent recycled cut size copier papers available on the global market. This scientific testing is conducted with rigor
and discipline. Many factors are taken into consideration both separately and as a whole, including the following:
•Amount of post-consumer waste (Lexmark tests up to 100% post-consumer waste content.)
•Temperature and humidity conditions (Testing chambers simulate climates from all over the world.)
•Moisture content (Business papers should have low moisture: 4–5%.)
•Bending resistance and proper stiffness means optimum feeding through the printer.
•Thickness (impacts how much can be loaded into a tray)
•Surface roughness (measured in Sheffield units, impacts print clarity and how well toner fuses to the paper)
•Surface friction (determines how easily sheets can be separated)
•Grain and formation (impacts curling, which also influences the mechanics of how the paper behaves as it moves
through the printer)
•Brightness and texture (look and feel)
Recycled papers are better than ever; however, the amount of recycled content in a paper affects the degree of control
over foreign matter. And while recycled papers are one good path to printing in an environmentally responsible manner,
they are not perfect. The energy required to de-ink and deal with additives such as colorants and “glue” often generates
more carbon emissions than does normal paper production. However, using recycled papers enables better resource
management overall.
Lexmark concerns itself with the responsible use of paper in general based on life cycle assessments of its products. To
gain a better understanding of the impact of printers on the environment, the company commissioned a number of
life cycle assessments and found that paper was identified as the primary contributor (up to 80%) of carbon emissions
caused throughout the entire life of a device (from design to end-of-life). This is due to the energy-intensive
manufacturing processes required to make paper.
Thus, Lexmark seeks to educate customers and partners on minimizing the impact of paper. Using recycled paper is
one way. Eliminating excessive and unnecessary paper consumption is another. Lexmark is well-equipped to help
customers minimize printing and copying waste. In addition, the company encourages purchasing paper from suppliers
who demonstrate their commitment to sustainable forestry practices.
Paper and specialty media guide 79
Lexmark does not endorse specific suppliers, although a converter’s product list for special applications is maintained.
However, the following paper choice guidelines will help alleviate the environmental impact of printing:
1Minimize paper consumption.
2Be selective about the origin of wood fiber. Buy from suppliers who carry certifications such as the Forestry
Stewardship Council (FSC) or The Program for the Endorsement of Forest Certification (PEFC). These certifications
guarantee that the paper manufacturer uses wood pulp from forestry operators that employ environmentally and
socially responsible forest management and restoration practices.
3Choose the most appropriate paper for printing needs: normal 75 or 80 g/m2 certified paper, lower weight paper,
or recycled paper.
Unacceptable paper examples
Test results indicate that the following paper types are at risk for use with laser printers:
•Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as carbonless papers
•Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the paper
•Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser
•Preprinted papers that require a registration (the precise location on the page) greater than ± 2.3 mm (± 0.9 in.),
such as optical character recognition (OCR) forms. In some cases, registration can be adjusted with a software
application to successfully print on these forms.)
•Coated papers (erasable bond), synthetic papers, thermal papers
•Rough-edged, rough or heavily textured surface papers or curled papers
•Recycled papers that fail EN12281:2002 (European testing)
•Paper weighing less than 60 g/m2 (16 lb)
•Multiple part forms or documents
For more information about Lexmark, visit www.lexmark.com. General sustainability-related information can be found
at the Environmental Sustainability link.
Storing paper
Use these paper storage guidelines to help avoid jams and uneven print quality:
•For best results, store paper where the temperature is 21°C (70°F) and the relative humidity is 40%. Most label
manufacturers recommend printing in a temperature range of 18 to 24°C (65 to 75°F) with relative humidity between
40 and 60%.
•Store paper in cartons when possible, on a pallet or shelf, rather than on the floor.
•Store individual packages on a flat surface.
•Do not store anything on top of individual paper packages.
Paper and specialty media guide 80
Supported paper sizes, types, and weights
The following tables provide information on standard and optional paper input sources and the types of paper they
support.
Note: To use a paper size that is unlisted, configure a Universal Paper Size.
Supported paper sizes
Paper size and dimension 520‑sheet
tray
2,000‑sheet
drawer MP feeder Manual
paper
Manual
envelope Duplex ADF Scanner
glass
A4
210 x 297 mm (8.27 x 11.7 in.)
11, 6 2, 6 2, 6 X2, 5, 6 (1, 4, 6) &
(2, 4, 5)
A5
148 x 210 mm (5.83 x 8.27 in.)
1, 5 X2, 5 2, 5 X2, 5 (1, 4,
6) & ( 1,
3, 5)
(2, 4, 6) &
(1, 3, 5, 6)
A6
105 x 148 mm (4.13 x 5.83 in.)
XX 2 2 XXX
1, 3
JIS B5
182 x 257 mm (7.17 x 10.1 in.)
1, 6 1, 6 2, 6 2, 6 X2, 6 (1, 4,
6) & ( 1,
3, 5)
(2, 4, 6) &
(1, 3, 5, 6)
Letter
216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 in.)
11, 6 2, 6 2, 6 X2, 5, 6 1, 3, 4, 5, 6
Legal
216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in.)
1X2 2 X(1, 4) &
(2, 3)
1, 3,
4
(1, 4, 6) &
(2, 3, 5)
Executive
184 x 267 mm (7.25 x 10.5 in.)
1, 6 1, 6 2, 6 2, 6 X(1, 4, 6) &
(1, 3, 5)
1, 3,
4, 5, 6
(1, 4, 6) &
(2, 3, 5)
JIS B4
257 x 364 mm
(10.12 x 14.33 in.)
1X2 2 X2 1 (2, 4) & (1,
3)
A3
297 x 420 mm
(11.69 x 16.54 in.)
1X2 2 X2 1 1, 3, 4
1 Source supports size with size sensing.
2 Source supports size without size sensing.
3 Paper size is supported if set to metric.
4 Paper size is supported if set to US.
5 Paper size is supported if loaded in short‑edge orientation.
6 Paper size is supported if loaded in long‑edge orientation.
7 Custom‑size envelope printing is not supported.
8 Source can accommodate paper size only up to 11.69 in.
Paper and specialty media guide 81
Paper size and dimension 520‑sheet
tray
2,000‑sheet
drawer MP feeder Manual
paper
Manual
envelope Duplex ADF Scanner
glass
SRA3
320 x 450 mm
(12.59 x 17.71 in.)
XXX XX
11x17
279 x 432 mm (11 x 17 in.)
1X2 2 X2 1 1, 3, 4
12 x 18
305 x 457 mm (12 x 18 in.)
XXX XX
Oficio (México)
216 x 340 mm (8.5 x 13.4 in.)
2X2 2 X2 2 2
Folio
216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 in.)
1X2 2 X21, 2,
3, 4
(2, 4) & (1,
3)
Statement
140 x 216 mm (5.5 x 8.5 in.)
1, 5 X2, 5 2, 5 X2, 5 1, 4,
5, 6
1, 4, 5, 6
Universal
•76.2–296.93 x 76.2–
1219.2 mm (3–11.69 x 3–
48 in.)
•297.18–320.29 x 76.2–
609.6 mm (11.70–
12.61 x 3–24 in.)
•320.55–609.6 x 76.2–
320.29 mm (12.62–
24 x 3–12.61 in.)
•609.85–1219.2 x 76.2–
296.93 mm (24.01–
48 x 3–11.69 in.)
2, 8 X2 2 X2 2 2
7 3/4 Envelope (Monarch)
98 x 191 mm (3.875 x 7.5 in.)
XX 2X2XXX
9 Envelope
98 x 226 mm (3.875 x 8.9 in.)
XX XXXXXX
Com 10 Envelope
105 x 241 mm (4.12 x 9.5 in.)
XX 2X2XXX
1 Source supports size with size sensing.
2 Source supports size without size sensing.
3 Paper size is supported if set to metric.
4 Paper size is supported if set to US.
5 Paper size is supported if loaded in short‑edge orientation.
6 Paper size is supported if loaded in long‑edge orientation.
7 Custom‑size envelope printing is not supported.
8 Source can accommodate paper size only up to 11.69 in.
Paper and specialty media guide 82
Paper size and dimension 520‑sheet
tray
2,000‑sheet
drawer MP feeder Manual
paper
Manual
envelope Duplex ADF Scanner
glass
DL Envelope
110 x 220 mm (4.33 x 8.66 in.)
XX 2X2XXX
C5 Envelope
162 x 229 mm (6.38 x 9.01 in.)
XX 2X2XXX
B5 Envelope
176 x 250 mm (6.93 x 9.84 in.)
XX XXXXXX
Other Envelope7
76.22 x 76.22 mm (3 x 3 in.)
up to 296.93 x 427.48 mm
(11.69 x 16.83 in.)
XX XXXXXX
1 Source supports size with size sensing.
2 Source supports size without size sensing.
3 Paper size is supported if set to metric.
4 Paper size is supported if set to US.
5 Paper size is supported if loaded in short‑edge orientation.
6 Paper size is supported if loaded in long‑edge orientation.
7 Custom‑size envelope printing is not supported.
8 Source can accommodate paper size only up to 11.69 in.
Supported paper types and weights
Printer
The printer supports 60–300 g/m2 (16–80 lb) paper weights. The duplex unit supports 60–169 g/m2 (16–32 lb) paper
weights.
Note: Labels, transparencies, envelopes, and card stock always print at reduced speed.
Paper type 520‑shee
t tray
2,000‑sh
eet
drawer
MP feeder Manual
paper
Manual
envelope
Duplex ADF Scanner
glass
Paper
•Plain
•Bond
•Glossy
•Colored
•Letterhead
•Light
•Heavy
•Preprinted
•Recycled
X
Paper and specialty media guide 83
Paper type 520‑shee
t tray
2,000‑sh
eet
drawer
MP feeder Manual
paper
Manual
envelope
Duplex ADF Scanner
glass
Heavy Glossy XX
Custom Type [x]
Rough/Cotton XX
Rough Envelope
Card stock XXX
Transparencies XXX
Labels
•Paper
•Vinyl
XXX
Envelopes X X XXX
Finisher
Use this table to determine the possible exit destinations of print jobs which use supported paper types and weights.
The paper capacity of each exit bin is listed in parentheses. Paper capacity estimations are calculated based on
75 g/m2 (20 lb) paper.
The finisher standard bin supports 60–300 g/m2 (16–80 lb) paper weights, bin 1 supports 60–220 g/m2 (16–60 lb) paper
weights, and bin 2 (booklet‑maker) supports 60–90 g/m2 (16–24 lb) paper weights plus one additional cover weighted
up to 220 g/m2 (60 lb).
Paper type Standard
500‑sheet bin
Second exit bin Bin 1 Bin 2 Bin 3
Plain paper
Card stock X
Transparency
Recycled XX
Glossy X
Heavy glossy X
Labels XX X
Vinyl labels X X X X X
Bond
Envelope XX X
Rough envelope XX X
Paper and specialty media guide 84
Paper type Standard
500‑sheet bin
Second exit bin Bin 1 Bin 2 Bin 3
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored paper
Light paper
Heavy paper X
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type [x]
Supported finishing features
4
1
2
3
1Finisher standard bin
2Finisher bin 1
3Finisher bin 2 (booklet‑maker)
4Paper transport
Notes:
•The finisher shown is the booklet finisher. Bin 2 is available only when the booklet finisher is installed.
•All paper tray capacities are based on 75‑g/m2 (20‑lb) paper.
Paper transport
•The paper capacity is 50 sheets.
•Finishing options are not supported in this bin.
Paper and specialty media guide 85
•Envelopes are routed here.
•Universal paper is routed here when it is longer than 483 mm (19 inches) or shorter than 148 mm (6 inches).
Finisher standard bin
•The paper capacity is 500 sheets.
•Envelopes and executive‑size paper are not supported in this bin.
•Finishing options are not supported in this bin.
Bin 1
•The paper capacity is 3,000 sheets when the standard finisher is installed.
•The paper capacity is 1,500 sheets when the booklet finisher is installed.
Size Punch*Offset Single/Double staple Double dual staple
A3
A4
A5 X X X X
Executive X
Folio X X
JIS B4 X
JIS B5 X
Legal X X
Letter
Statement X X X
Tabloid X
Universal
Envelopes (any size) X X X X
* For the Universal paper size, the finishing edge must be at least 9 in. (229 mm) for a 3‑hole punch and 10 in. (254 mm) for
a 4‑hole punch.
Punch—Select from two‑, three‑, or four‑hole punch
Single staple—Use only one staple
Double staple—Use two staples
Double dual staple—Use two sets of two staples. This setting is supported only for widths between 8 in. (203 mm) and
12 in. (297 mm) with lengths between 7 in. (182 mm) and 17 in. (432 mm).
Bin 2 (booklet‑maker)
Bin 2 is available only when the booklet finisher is installed. The paper capacity of bin 2 (booklet‑maker) is 270 sheets
or 18 sets of 15‑sheet booklets.
Paper and specialty media guide 86
Size Bi fold Booklet fold Saddle staple
A3
A4 (only SEF)
A5 X X X
Executive X X X
SRA3
12 x 18
Folio
JIS B4
JIS B5 X X X
Legal
Letter (only SEF)
Statement X X X
Tabloid
Universal X X X
Envelopes (any size) X X X
SEF—The paper is loaded in the short edge orientation. The short edge of the paper enters the printer first.
Bi fold—Each page is individually folded and stacked separately.
Booklet fold—A multiple-page job is folded along the center into a single booklet.
Saddle staple—A booklet‑fold print job is stapled along the center fold.
Setting the finisher exit bin
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Bin setup > Output bin
2Select a bin, and then touch Submit.
Notes:
•This feature is available only when a finisher is installed.
•The standard finisher bin is the factory default setting.
Paper and specialty media guide 87
Printing
The selection and handling of paper and specialty media can affect how reliably documents print. For more information,
see “Avoiding jams” on page 265 and “Storing paper” on page 80.
Printing a document
Printing a document
1From the printer control panel Paper menu, set the Paper Type and Paper Size to match the loaded paper.
2Send the print job:
For Windows users
aWith a document open, click File > Print.
bClick Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
cAdjust settings as necessary.
dClick OK > Print.
For Macintosh users
aCustomize the settings as needed in the Page Setup dialog:
1With a document open, choose File > Page Setup.
2Choose a paper size or create a custom size to match the loaded paper.
3Click OK.
bCustomize the settings as needed in the Print dialog:
1With a document open, choose File > Print.
If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.
2From the Print dialog and pop‑up menus, adjust the settings as needed.
Note: To print on a specific paper type, adjust the paper type setting to match the loaded paper, or
select the appropriate tray or feeder.
3Click Print.
Printing in black and white
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Print Mode > Black Only > Submit
Adjusting toner darkness
1Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Printing 88
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
•View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
•Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2Click Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Toner Darkness.
3Adjust the toner darkness setting.
4Click Submit.
Using Max Speed and Max Yield
The Max Speed and Max Yield settings let you choose between a faster print speed or a higher toner yield. Max Yield
is the factory default setting.
•Max Speed—Prints in color unless Black Only is selected in the driver. Prints in black only if the Black Only driver
setting is selected.
•Max Yield—Switches from black to color based on the color content found on each page. Frequent color mode
switching can result in slower printing if the content of pages is mixed.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
•View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
•Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2Click Configuration > Print Settings > Setup Menu.
3From the Printer Usage list, select Max Speed or Max Yield.
4Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1Navigate to:
> Settings > Print Settings > Setup Menu
2From the Printer Usage list, select Max Speed or Max Yield.
3Touch Submit.
Printing from a mobile device
For the list of supported mobile devices and to download a compatible mobile printing application, visit
http://lexmark.com/mobile.
Note: Mobile printing applications may also be available from your mobile device manufacturer.
Printing 89
Printing from a flash drive
Printing from a flash drive
Notes:
•Before printing an encrypted PDF file, enter the file password from the printer control panel.
•You cannot print files for which you do not have printing permissions.
1Insert a flash drive into the USB port.
Notes:
•If you insert the flash drive when the printer requires attention, such as when a jam has occurred, then the
printer ignores the flash drive.
•If you insert the flash drive while the printer is processing other print jobs, then Busy appears. After these
print jobs are processed, you may need to view the held jobs list to print documents from the flash drive.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the USB cable, any network adapter, any connector, the memory
device, or the printer in the areas shown while actively printing, reading, or writing from the memory device. A
loss of data can occur.
Printing 90
2From the printer control panel, touch the document you want to print.
3Touch the arrows to increase the number of copies to print, and then touch Print.
Notes:
•Do not remove the flash drive from the USB port until the document has finished printing.
•If you leave the flash drive in the printer after leaving the initial USB menu screen, then you can still print
files from the flash drive as held jobs.
Supported flash drives and file types
Flash drive File type
•Lexar JumpDrive 2.0 Pro (256MB, 512MB, or 1GB sizes)
•SanDisk Cruzer Mini (256MB, 512MB, or 1GB sizes)
Notes:
•Hi‑Speed USB flash drives must support the full‑speed standard. Devices supporting only
USB low‑speed capabilities are not supported.
•USB flash drives must support the File Allocation Table (FAT) system. Devices formatted
with New Technology File System (NTFS) or any other file system are not supported.
Documents:
•.pdf
•.xps
•.html
Images:
•.dcx
•.gif
•.JPEG or .jpg
•.bmp
•.pcx
•.TIFF or .tif
•.png
Printing 91
Printing on specialty media
Tips on using letterhead
•Use letterhead designed specifically for laser/LED printers.
•Print samples on the letterhead being considered for use before buying large quantities.
•Before loading letterhead, flex the sheets to prevent them from sticking together.
•Page orientation is important when printing on letterhead.
Source Print side Paper orientation
Standard and optional trays (simplex printing) Preprinted letterhead
design is placed faceup.
When feeding short edge, the top
edge of the sheet with the logo is
placed at the right side of the tray.
When feeding long‑edge, the
letter head should go to the rear
of the printer.
Standard and optional trays (duplex printing) Preprinted letterhead
design is placed facedown.
The top edge of the sheet with the
logo is placed at the right side of
the tray.
Multipurpose feeder (simplex printing) Preprinted letterhead
design is placed facedown.
The top edge of the sheet with the
logo should enter the
multipurpose feeder first.
Multipurpose feeder (duplex printing) Preprinted letterhead
design is placed faceup.
The top edge of the sheet with the
logo should enter the
multipurpose feeder last.
Note: Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether the chosen preprinted letterhead is acceptable
for laser/LED printers.
Tips on using transparencies
•Print samples on the transparencies being considered for use before buying large quantities.
•Feed transparencies from the standard tray or from the multipurpose feeder.
•From the Paper menu, set the Paper Type to Transparency.
•Use transparencies designed specifically for laser/LED printers. Transparencies must be able to withstand
temperatures of 230°C (446°F) without melting, discoloring, offsetting, or releasing hazardous emissions.
•To prevent print quality problems, avoid getting fingerprints on the transparencies.
•Before loading transparencies, flex the stack to prevent sheets from sticking together.
•We recommend Lexmark transparencies. For ordering information, see the Lexmark Web site at
www.lexmark.com.
Printing 92
Tips on using envelopes
Print samples on the envelopes being considered for use before buying large quantities.
•Use envelopes designed specifically for laser/LED printers. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure that
the envelopes can withstand temperatures up to 220°C (446°F) without sealing, wrinkling, curling excessively, or
releasing hazardous emissions.
•For best performance, use envelopes made from 90 g/m2 (24 lb bond) paper or 25% cotton. All‑cotton envelopes
must not exceed 70 g/m2 (20 lb bond) weight.
•Use only new envelopes from undamaged packages.
•To optimize performance and minimize jams, do not use envelopes that:
–Have excessive curl or twist
–Are stuck together or damaged in any way
–Have windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, or embossing
–Have metal clasps, string ties, or folding bars
–Have an interlocking design
–Have postage stamps attached
–Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position
–Have bent corners
–Have rough, cockle, or laid finishes
•Adjust the width guides to fit the width of the envelopes.
Note: A combination of high humidity (over 60%) and the high printing temperature may wrinkle or seal envelopes.
Tips on using labels
Notes:
•Single‑sided paper labels designed for laser/LED printers are supported for occasional use.
•It is recommended to print no more than 20 pages of paper labels a month.
•Vinyl, pharmacy, and dual‑sided labels are not supported.
For detailed information on label printing, characteristics, and design, see the Card Stock & Label Guide available on
the Lexmark Web site at http://support.lexmark.com.
When printing on labels:
•Use labels designed specifically for laser/LED printers. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to verify that:
–The labels can withstand temperatures up to 210°C (410°F) without sealing, excessive curling, wrinkling, or
releasing hazardous emissions.
Note: Labels can be printed at a higher fusing temperature up to 220°C (428°F) if Label Weight is set to
Heavy. Select this setting using the Embedded Web Server, or from the printer control panel Paper menu.
–Label adhesives, face sheet (printable stock), and topcoats can withstand up to 25 psi (172 kPa) pressure without
delaminating, oozing around the edges, or releasing hazardous fumes.
•Do not use labels with slick backing material.
•Use full label sheets. Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing, resulting in a jam. Partial sheets
also contaminate the printer and the cartridge with adhesive, and could void the printer and cartridge warranties.
•Do not use labels with exposed adhesive.
Printing 93
•Do not print within 1 mm (0.04 in.) of the edge of the label, of the perforations, or between die‑cuts of the label.
•Be sure adhesive backing does not reach to the sheet edge. Zone coating of the adhesive at least 1 mm (0.04 in.)
away from edges is recommended. Adhesive material contaminates the printer and could void the warranty.
•If zone coating of the adhesive is not possible, then remove a 1.6 mm (0.06 in.) strip on the leading and driver edge,
and use a non‑oozing adhesive.
•Portrait orientation works best, especially when printing bar codes.
Tips on using card stock
Card stock is heavy, single‑ply specialty media. Many of its variable characteristics, such as moisture content, thickness,
and texture, can significantly impact print quality. Print samples on the card stock being considered for use before
buying large quantities.
•From the Paper menu, set the Paper Type to Card Stock.
•Select the appropriate Paper Texture setting.
•Be aware that preprinting, perforation, and creasing may significantly affect the print quality and cause jams or
other paper handling problems.
•Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure the card stock can withstand temperatures up to 220°C (446°F)
without releasing hazardous emissions.
•Do not use preprinted card stock manufactured with chemicals that may contaminate the printer. Preprinting
introduces semi‑liquid and volatile components into the printer.
•Use grain short card stock when possible.
Printing confidential and other held jobs
Storing print jobs in the printer
You can set the printer to store print jobs in the printer memory until you start the print job from the printer control
panel.
All print jobs that can be initiated by the user at the printer are called held jobs.
Note: Confidential, Verify, Reserve, and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to
process additional held jobs.
Print job type Description
Confidential Confidential lets you hold print jobs in the computer until you enter the PIN from
the control panel.
Note: The PIN is set from the computer. It must be four digits, using the
numbers 0–9.
Verify Verify lets you print one copy of a print job while the printer holds the remaining
copies. It allows you to examine if the first copy is satisfactory. The print job is
automatically deleted from the printer memory once all copies are printed.
Reserve Reserve allows the printer to store print jobs for printing at a later time. The print
jobs are held until deleted from the Help Jobs menu.
Repeat Repeat prints and stores print jobs in the printer memory for reprinting.
Printing 94
Printing confidential and other held jobs
Note: Confidential and Verify print jobs are automatically deleted from memory after printing. Repeat and Reserve
jobs are held in the printer until you choose to delete them.
For Windows users
1With a document open, click File > Print.
2Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
3Click Print and Hold.
4Select the print job type (Confidential, Repeat, Reserve, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential
print job, also enter a four‑digit PIN.
5Click OK or Print.
6From the printer home screen, release the print job.
•For confidential print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > your user name > Confidential Jobs > enter PIN > select print job > specify number of copies >
Print
•For other print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > your user name > select print job > specify number of copies > Print
For Macintosh users
1With a document open, choose File > Print.
If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.
2From the print options or Copies & Pages pop‑up menu, choose Job Routing.
3Select the print job type (Confidential, Repeat, Reserve, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential
print job, also enter a four‑digit PIN.
4Click OK or Print.
5From the printer home screen, release the print job.
•For confidential print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > your user name > Confidential Jobs > enter PIN > select print job > specify number of copies >
Print
•For other print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > your user name > select print job > specify number of copies > Print
Printing information pages
Printing a font sample list
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Print Fonts
2Touch PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts.
Printing 95
Printing a directory list
A directory list shows the resources stored in a flash memory or on the printer hard disk.
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Print Directory
Canceling a print job
Canceling a print job from the printer control panel
1From the printer control panel, touch Cancel Job or press on the keypad.
2Touch the print job you want to cancel, and then touch Delete Selected Jobs.
Note: If you press on the keypad, then touch Resume to return to the home screen.
Canceling a print job from the computer
For Windows users
1Open the printers folder.
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type control printers > OK
In Windows 7 or earlier
aClick or click Start, and then click Run.
bIn the Start Search or Run dialog, type control printers.
cPress Enter, or click OK.
2Double‑click the printer icon.
3Select the print job you want to cancel.
4Click Delete.
For Macintosh users
1From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:
•System Preferences > Print & Scan > select your printer > Open Print Queue
•System Preferences > Print & Fax > select your printer > Open Print Queue
2From the printer window, select the print job you want to cancel, and then delete it.
Printing 96
Copying
ADF Scanner glass
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings).
Making copies
Making a quick copy
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2Adjust the paper guides when loading a document into the ADF.
Note: Make sure the size of the original document and the copy paper size are the same. Failure to set the
proper size may result to a cropped image.
3From the printer control panel, press to start copying.
Copying using the ADF
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2Adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > change the copy settings > Copy It
Copying 97
Copying using the scanner glass
1Place an original document facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
2From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > change the copy settings > Copy It
3If you have more pages to scan, then place the next document on the scanner glass, and then touch Scan the Next
Page.
4Touch Finish the Job to return to the home screen.
Copying film photos
1Place a photo facedown on the upper left corner of the scanner glass.
2From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Content > Photo > > Photo/Film > > Copy It > Scan the Next Page or Finish the Job
Copying on specialty media
Copying on transparencies
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > size of the original document >
4Touch Copy to, and then select the tray that contains transparencies, or touch Manual Feeder Size.
5Load transparencies in the multipurpose feeder.
6From the home screen, navigate to:
> select the desired size of the transparencies > Manual Feeder Type > > Copy It
Copying on letterhead
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > size of the original document > Copy to > Manual Feeder
Copying 98
4Place the letterhead faceup, top edge first in the multipurpose feeder.
5Select the size of the letterhead.
6Navigate to:
Continue > Letterhead > Continue > Copy It
Customizing copy settings
Copying to a different size
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3On the home screen, touch Copy.
4Touch Copy from > select the size of the original document > .
5Touch Copy to > select the size of the copy > .
Note: The printer will scale the size automatically.
6Touch Copy It.
Making copies using paper from a selected tray
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > size of the original document > Copy to
4Touch Manual Feeder or select the tray that contains the paper type you want to use.
Note: If you choose Manual Feeder, then you will also need to select the paper size and type.
5Touch Copy It.
Copying 99
Copying different paper sizes
Use the ADF to copy original documents with different paper sizes. Depending on the paper sizes loaded and the “Copy
to” and “Copy from” settings, each copy is either printed on mixed paper sizes (Example 1) or scaled to fit a single paper
size (Example 2).
Example 1: Copying on mixed paper sizes
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > Mixed Sizes > > Copy to > Auto Size Match > > Copy It
The scanner identifies the different paper sizes as they are scanned. Copies are printed on mixed paper sizes
corresponding to the paper sizes of the original document.
Example 2: Copying on a single paper size
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > Mixed Sizes > > Copy to > Letter > > Copy It
The scanner identifies the different paper sizes as they are scanned, and then scales the mixed paper sizes to fit on
the paper size selected.
Copying on both sides of the paper (duplexing)
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3On the home screen, touch Copy.
4From the Sides (Duplex) area, touch the button for your preferred duplexing method.
The first number represents sides of the original documents; the second number represents sides of the copy. For
example, select 1‑sided to 2‑sided if you have 1-sided original documents and you want 2‑sided copies.
5Touch , and then Copy It.
Copying 100
Reducing or enlarging copies
Copies can be reduced to 25% of the original document size or enlarged to 400% of the original document size. The
factory default setting for Scale is Auto. If you leave Scale set to Auto, the content of your original document will be
scaled to fit the size of the paper onto which you are copying.
To reduce or enlarge a copy:
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3On the home screen, touch Copy.
4From the Scale area, touch the arrows to enlarge or reduce your copies.
Touching “Copy to” or “Copy from” after setting Scale manually changes the scale value back to Auto.
5Touch Copy It.
Adjusting copy quality
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Content
4Touch the button that best represents the content type of the document you are copying:
•Text—Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
•Graphics—Use when the original document is mostly business‑type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and
animations.
•Text/Photo—Use when the original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
•Photo—Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image.
5Touch .
6Touch the button that best represents the content source of the document you are copying:
•Color Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer.
•Black/White Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
•Inkjet—Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
•Photo/Film—Use when the original document is a photo from film.
•Magazine—Use when the original document is from a magazine.
•Newspaper—Use when the original document is from a newspaper.
Copying 101
•Press—Use when the original document was printed using a printing press.
•Other—Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
7Touch > Copy It.
Collating copies
If you print multiple copies of a document, then you can choose to print each copy as a set (collated) or to print the
copies as groups of pages (not collated).
Collated Not collated
By default, Collate is set to On. If you do not want to collate your copies, then change the setting to Off:
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > enter the number of copies > Collate > Off > > Copy It
Placing separator sheets between copies
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Separator Sheets
Note: Collate must be set to On for the separator sheets to be placed between copies. If Collate is set to Off,
then the separator sheets are added to the end of the print job.
4Select one of the following:
•Between Copies
•Between Jobs
•Between Pages
•Off
5Touch , and then Copy It.
Copying 102
Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet
In order to save paper, you can copy either two or four consecutive pages of a multiple‑page document onto a single
sheet of paper.
Notes:
•The Paper Size must be set to Letter, Legal, A4, or JIS B5.
•The Copy Size must be set to 100%.
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Paper Saver > select desired output > > Copy It
Creating a custom copy job (job build)
The custom copy job or job build is used to combine one or more sets of original documents into a single copy job. Each
set may be scanned using different job parameters. When a copy job is submitted and Custom Job is enabled, the
scanner scans the first set of original documents using the supplied parameters, and then it scans the next set with the
same or different parameters.
The definition of a set depends on the scan source:
•If you scan a document on the scanner glass, then a set consists of one page.
•If you scan multiple pages using the ADF, then a set consists of all scanned pages until the ADF becomes empty.
•If you scan one page using the ADF, then a set consists of one page.
For example:
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Options > Custom Job > On > Done > Copy It
When the end of a set is reached, the scan screen appears.
4Load the next document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass, and then touch
Scan the Automatic Document Feeder or Scan the flatbed.
Note: If required, change the job settings.
5If you have another document to scan, then repeat the previous step. Otherwise, touch Finish the job.
Copying 103
Placing information on copies
Placing the date and time at the top of each page
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Header/Footer
4Pick an area of the page where you want to place the date and time.
5Touch Yes or No > > Copy It.
Placing an overlay message on each page
An overlay message can be placed on each page. The message choices are Urgent, Confidential, Copy, Custom or Draft.
To place a message on the copies:
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Overlay > select overlay message > .
4Touch Copy It.
Canceling a copy job
Canceling a copy job while the document is in the ADF
When the ADF begins processing a document, the scanning screen appears. To cancel the copy job, touch Cancel Job
on the touch screen.
A “Canceling scan job” screen appears. The ADF clears all pages in the ADF and cancels the job.
Canceling a copy job while copying pages using the scanner glass
Touch Cancel Job on the touch screen.
A “Canceling scan job” screen appears. Once the job is canceled, the copy screen appears.
Copying 104
Canceling a copy job while pages are being printed
1From the printer control panel, touch Cancel Job or press on the keypad.
2Touch the job you want to cancel, and then touch Delete Selected Jobs.
Note: If you press on the keypad, then touch Resume to return to the home screen.
Understanding the copy screens and options
Copy from
This option opens a screen where you can enter the paper size of the original document.
•Touch a paper size that matches the original document.
•Touch Mixed Sizes to copy an original document that contains mixed paper sizes with the same width.
•Touch Auto Size Sense to allow the scanner to automatically determine the size of the original document.
Copy to
This option opens a screen where you can enter the paper size and type on which your copies will be printed.
•Touch the paper size and type that matches the paper loaded.
•If the settings for “Copy from” and “Copy to” are different, then the printer automatically adjusts the Scale setting
to accommodate the difference.
•If the paper type or size that you want to copy onto is not loaded in one of the trays, then touch Manual Feeder,
and manually load the paper in the multipurpose feeder.
•When “Copy to” is set to Auto Size Match, each copy matches the paper size of the original document. If a matching
paper size is not in one of the trays, then Paper size not found appears and prompts to load a paper in a
tray or multipurpose feeder.
Copies
This option allows you to set the number of copies to be printed.
Scale
This option creates an image from your copy that is proportionally scaled anywhere between 25% and 400%. Scale can
also be set for you automatically.
•When you want to copy from one size of paper to another, such as from legal‑size to letter‑size paper, setting the
“Copy from” and “Copy to” paper sizes automatically changes the scale to keep all the original document information
on your copy.
•Touch the left arrow to decrease the value by 1%; touch the right arrow to increase the value by 1%.
•Hold your finger on an arrow to make a continuous increment change.
•Hold your finger on an arrow for two seconds to cause the pace of the change to accelerate.
Copying 105
Darkness
This option adjusts how light or dark your copies will turn out in relation to the original document.
Sides (Duplex)
Use this option to select duplex settings. You can print copies on one or two sides, make two-sided copies (duplex) of
two-sided original documents, make two-sided copies from one-sided original documents, or make one-sided copies
(simplex) from two-sided original documents.
Collate
This option keeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies of the document. The
factory default setting for Collate is on; the output pages of your copies will be ordered (1,2,3) (1,2,3) (1,2,3). If you
want all the copies of each page to remain together, turn Collate off, and your copies will be ordered (1,1,1) (2,2,2)
(3,3,3).
Content
This option lets you set the original document type and source.
Choose content type from Text, Text/Photo, Photo, or Graphics.
•Text—Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
•Graphics—Use when the original document is mostly business‑type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and
animations.
•Text/Photo—Use when the original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
•Photo—Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image.
Choose content source from Color Laser, Black/White Laser, Inkjet, Photo/Film, Magazine, Newspaper, Press, or Other.
•Color Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer.
•Black/White Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
•Inkjet—Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
•Photo/Film—Use when the original document is a photo from film.
•Magazine—Use when the original document is from a magazine.
•Newspaper—Use when the original document is from a newspaper.
•Press—Use when the original document was printed using a printing press.
•Other—Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
Color
This option enables or disables color for the scanned image.
Copying 106
Advanced Options
Touching the Advanced Options button opens a screen where you can change the following settings:
•Advanced Duplex—Use to specify the document orientation, whether documents are one-sided or two-sided, and
how documents are bound.
Note: Some Advanced Duplex options are available only on select printers.
•Advanced Imaging—Use to change or adjust Auto Center, Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout,
Contrast, Mirror Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature settings
before you copy the document.
•Create Booklet—Use to create a booklet. You can choose between 1‑sided and 2‑sided.
Note: This option appears only when a print duplexer and printer hard disk are installed.
•Cover Page Setup—Use to set copy cover page and booklet cover page.
•Custom Job—Use to combine multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
•Edge Erase—Use to eliminate smudges or information around the edges of a document. You can choose to eliminate
an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever is within
the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
•Header/Footer—Use to turn on Date/Time, Page number, Bates number, or Custom text, and prints them in the
specified header or footer location.
•Margin Shift—Use to increase the size of the margin of a specified distance by shifting the scanned image. This can
be useful in providing space to bind or hole-punch copies. Use the increase or decrease arrows to set how much of
a margin you want. If the additional margin is too large, then the copy will be cropped.
•Overlay—Use to create a watermark (or message) that overlays the content of your copy. You can choose from
Urgent, Confidential, Copy, and Draft, or you can enter a custom message in the ”Enter custom text” field. The word
you pick will appear, faintly, in large print across each page.
Note: A custom overlay can also be created by your system support person. When a custom overlay is created, a
button with an icon of that overlay will be available.
•Paper Saver—Use to print two or more sheets of an original document together on the same page. Paper Saver is
also called N-up printing. The N stands for Number. For example, 2-up would print two pages of your document on
a single page, and 4-up would print four pages of your document on a single page. Touching Print Page Borders
adds or removes the outline border surrounding the original document pages on the output page.
•Separator Sheets—Use to place a blank piece of paper between copies, pages, or print jobs. The separator sheets
can be drawn from a tray that contains a type or color of paper that is different from the paper your copies are
printed on.
Save As Shortcut
This option allows the current settings to be saved as a shortcut by assigning a number.
Copying 107
E-mailing
ADF Scanner glass
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings).
You can use the printer to e‑mail scanned documents to one or more recipients. There are three ways to send an e‑mail
from the printer. You can type the e‑mail address, use a shortcut number, or use the address book.
Getting ready to e-mail
Setting up the e-mail function
1Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
•View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
•Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2Click Settings.
3Under Default Settings, click E-mail/FTP Settings.
4Click E-mail Settings > Setup E-mail Server.
5Fill in the fields with the appropriate information.
6Click Submit.
Configuring e‑mail settings
1Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
E-mailing 108
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
•View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
•Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2Click Settings > E-mail/FTP Settings > E-mail Settings.
3Fill in the fields with the appropriate information.
4Click Submit.
Creating an e-mail shortcut
Creating an e-mail shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
1Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
•View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
•Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2Click Settings.
3Under Other Settings, click Manage Shortcuts > E-mail Shortcut Setup.
4Type a unique name for the recipient, and then enter the e-mail address.
Note: If you are entering multiple addresses, then separate each address with a comma (,).
5Select the scan settings (Format, Content, Color, and Resolution).
6Enter a shortcut number, and then click Add.
If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
Creating an e-mail shortcut using the touch screen
1From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient > type an e‑mail address
To create a group of recipients, touch Next address, and then type the next recipient’s e-mail address.
2Touch .
3Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then touch Done.
4Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK.
If the name or number is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.
E-mailing 109
E-mailing a document
Sending an e-mail using the touch screen
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
Note: Make sure the size of the original document and the copy paper size are the same. Failure to set the
proper size may result to a cropped image.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient
4Enter the e‑mail address, or press and then enter the shortcut number.
To enter additional recipients, touch Next Address, and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to
add.
Note: You can also enter an e‑mail address using the address book.
5Touch Done > Send It.
Sending an e‑mail using a shortcut number
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3Press , enter the shortcut number using the keypad, and then touch .
To enter additional recipients, touch Next address, and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to
add.
4Touch Send It.
Sending an e‑mail using the address book
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail >Recipient(s) > > enter the name of recipient > Browse shortcuts
E-mailing 110
4Touch the name of the recipients.
To enter additional recipients, touch Next address, and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to
add, or search the address book.
5Touch Done.
Customizing e-mail settings
Adding e-mail subject and message information
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, touch E-mail.
4Type an e‑mail address.
5Touch Options > Subject.
6Type the e-mail subject.
7Touch Done > Message.
8Type an e-mail message.
9Touch Done > E-mail It.
Changing the output file type
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient > type an e‑mail address > Send as
4Touch the button that represents the file type you want to send.
•PDF—Use this to create a single file with multiple pages, viewable with Adobe Reader. Adobe Reader is provided
free by Adobe at www.adobe.com.
•Secure PDF—Use this to create an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access.
•TIFF—Use this to create multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the
Embedded Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent
JPEG.
E-mailing 111
•JPEG—Use this to create and attach a separate file for each page of your original document, viewable by most
Web browsers and graphics programs.
•XPS—Use this to create a single XML Paper Specification (XPS) file with multiple pages, viewable using an Internet
Explorer-hosted viewer and the .NET Framework, or by downloading a third‑party standalone viewer.
5Touch E‑mail It.
Note: If you selected Secure PDF, you will be prompted to enter your password twice.
Canceling an e-mail
•When using the ADF, touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears.
•When using the scanner glass, touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears, or while Scan the Next Page /
Finish the Job appears.
Understanding e-mail options
Recipients
This option lets you enter the destination of your e-mail. You may enter multiple e‑mail addresses.
Subject
This option lets you enter a subject line for your e-mail.
Message
This option lets you enter a message that will be sent with your scanned attachment.
File Name
This option lets you customize the attachment file name.
Original Size
This option opens a screen where you can choose the size of the documents you are going to e-mail.
•Touch a paper size button to select that size as the Original Size setting. The e‑mail screen appears with the new
setting displayed.
•When “Original Size” is set to Mixed Sizes, you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes.
•When “Original Size” is set to Auto Size Sense, the scanner automatically determines the size of the original
document.
E-mailing 112
Resolution
Adjusts the output quality of your e-mail. Increasing the image resolution increases the e-mail file size and the time
needed to scan your original document. Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the e-mail file size.
Color
This option sets the output color for the scanned image. Touch to enable or disable color.
Content
This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document.
Choose content type from Text, Text/Photo, Photo, or Graphics.
•Text—Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
•Graphics—Use when the original document is mostly business‑type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and
animations.
•Text/Photo—Use when the original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
•Photo—Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image.
Choose content source from Color Laser, Black/White Laser, Inkjet, Photo/Film, Magazine, Newspaper, Press, or Other.
•Color Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer.
•Black/White Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
•Inkjet—Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
•Photo/Film—Use when the original document is a photo from film.
•Magazine—Use when the original document is from a magazine.
•Newspaper—Use when the original document is from a newspaper.
•Press—Use when the original document was printed using a printing press.
•Other—Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
Darkness
This option adjusts how light or dark your scanned documents will turn out in relation to the original document.
Send As
This option sets the output (PDF, TIFF, JPEG or XPS) for the scanned image.
•PDF—Creates a single file with multiple pages, viewable with Adobe Reader. Adobe Reader is provided free by
Adobe at www.adobe.com.
•Secure PDF—Creates an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access
•TIFF—Creates multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded
Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.
•JPEG—Creates and attaches a separate file for each page of your original document, viewable by most Web browsers
and graphics programs
•XPS—Creates a single XPS file with multiple pages, viewable using an Internet Explorer-hosted viewer and the .NET
Framework, or by downloading a third party standalone viewer
E-mailing 113
Page Setup
This option lets you change the Sides (Duplex), Orientation, and Binding.
•Sides (Duplex)— Specifies if the original document is simplex (printed on one page) or duplex (printed on both
sides). This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the e-mail.
•Orientation— Specifies the orientation of the original document, and then changes Sides and Binding to match the
orientation.
•Binding— Specifies if the original document is bound on the long‑edge or short‑edge side.
Scan Preview
This option displays the first page of the image before it is included in the e-mail. When the first page is scanned, the
scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
Advanced Options
Touching this button opens a screen where you can change the following settings:
•Advanced Imaging—Use to adjust the Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, JPEG Quality,
Mirror Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature settings before you
e‑mail the document.
•Custom Job—Use to combine multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
•Edge Erase—Use to eliminate smudges or information around the edges of a document. You can choose to eliminate
an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever is within
the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
•Transmission Log—Use to print the transmission log or transmission error log.
E-mailing 114
Faxing
Note: The fax function is available only in select printer models.
ADF Scanner glass
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings).
Getting the printer ready to fax
The following connection methods may not be applicable in all countries or regions.
Note: During the initial printer setup, deselect Fax and any other function you plan to set up later, and then touch
Continue. The indicator light may blink red if the fax function is enabled and not fully set up.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or
make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning
storm.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch cables or the printer in the area shown while actively sending or
receiving a fax.
Faxing 115
Initial fax setup
Many countries and regions require outgoing faxes to contain the following information in a margin at the top or bottom
of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission: station name (identification of the business, other
entity, or individual sending the message) and station number (telephone number of the sending fax machine, business,
other entity, or individual).
To enter your fax setup information, use the printer control panel, or use your browser to access the Embedded Web
Server and then enter the Settings menu.
Note: If you do not have a TCP/IP environment, then you must use the printer control panel to enter your fax setup
information.
Using the printer control panel for fax setup
When the printer is turned on for the first time or if the printer has been off for an extended time, a series of start‑up
screens appear. If the printer has fax capabilities, then the following screens appear:
Fax Name or Station Name
Fax Number or Station Number
1When Fax Name or Station Name appears, enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.
2After entering the Fax Name or Station Name, touch Submit.
3When Fax Number or Station Number appears, enter the printer fax number.
4After entering the Fax Number or Station Number, touch Submit.
Using the Embedded Web Server for fax setup
1Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
•View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
•Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
Faxing 116
2Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
3In the Fax Name or Station Name field, enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.
4In the Fax Number or Station Number field, enter the printer fax number.
5Click Submit.
Choosing a fax connection
Notes:
•The printer is an analog device that works best when directly connected to the telephone wall outlet. Other
devices(such as a telephone or answering machine) can be successfully attached to pass through the printer, as
described in the setup steps.
•If you want a digital connection such as ISDN, DSL, or ADSL, then a third-party device (such as a DSL filter) is
required. Contact your DSL provider for a DSL filter. The DSL filter removes the digital signal on the telephone
line that can interfere with the ability of the printer to fax properly.
•You do not need to attach the printer to a computer, but you do need to connect it to an analog telephone line
to send and receive faxes.
Equipment and service options Fax connection setup
Connect directly to the telephone line. See “Connecting to an analog telephone line” on page 117.
Connect to a Digital Subscriber Line (DSL or ADSL) service. See “Connecting to a DSL service” on page 118.
Connect to a Private Branch eXchange (PBX) or Integrated
Services Digital Network (ISDN) system.
See “Connecting to a PBX or ISDN system” on page 118.
Use a Distinctive Ring service. See “Connecting to a distinctive ring service” on page 119.
Connect through an adapter used in your area. See “Connecting to an adapter for your country or region” on
page 119.
Connecting to an analog telephone line
If your telecommunications equipment uses a US‑style (RJ11) telephone line, then follow these steps to connect the
equipment:
1Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port .
2Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.
Faxing 117
Connecting to a DSL service
If you subscribe to a DSL service, then contact the DSL provider to obtain a DSL filter and telephone cord, and then
follow these steps to connect the equipment:
1Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port .
2Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the DSL filter.
Note: Your DSL filter may look different than the one in the illustration.
3Connect the DSL filter cable to an active telephone wall jack.
3
21
Connecting to a PBX or ISDN system
If you use a PBX or ISDN converter or terminal adapter, then follow these steps to connect the equipment:
1Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port .
2Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the port designated for fax and telephone use.
Notes:
•Make sure the terminal adapter is set to the correct switch type for your region.
•Depending on the ISDN port assignment, you may have to connect to a specific port.
•When using a PBX system, make sure the call waiting tone is off.
•When using a PBX system, dial the outside line prefix before dialing the fax number.
•For more information on using the fax with a PBX system, see the documentation that came with your PBX
system.
Faxing 118
Connecting to a distinctive ring service
A distinctive ring service may be available from your telephone service provider. This service allows you to have multiple
telephone numbers on one telephone line, with each telephone number having a different ring pattern. This may be
useful for distinguishing between fax and voice calls. If you subscribe to a distinctive ring service, then follow these
steps to connect the equipment:
1Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port .
2Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.
3Change the Distinctive Rings setting to match the setting you want for the printer to answer:
Note: The factory default setting for distinctive rings is On. This allows the printer to answer single, double, and
triple ring patterns.
aFrom the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Settings > Distinctive Rings
bSelect the pattern setting you want to change, and then touch Submit.
Connecting to an adapter for your country or region
The following countries or regions may require a special adapter to connect the telephone cable to the active telephone
wall jack:
Country/Region
•Austria
•Cyprus
•Denmark
•Finland
•France
•Germany
•Ireland
•Italy
•New Zealand
•Netherlands
•Norway
•Portugal
•Sweden
•Switzerland
•United Kingdom
For some countries or regions, a telephone line adapter is included in the box. Use this adapter to connect an answering
machine, telephone, or other telecommunications equipment to the printer.
1Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port
2Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the adapter, and then connect the adapter to the active telephone
wall jack.
Note: Your telephone adapter may look different than the one shown. It will fit the wall jack used in your
location.
Faxing 119
Setting the outgoing fax or station name and number
1Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
•View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
•Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
3In the Fax Name or Station Name field, enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.
4In the Fax Number or Station Number field, enter the printer fax number.
5Click Submit.
Setting the date and time
You can set the date and time so that they are printed on every fax you send. If there is a power failure, then you may
have to reset the date and time.
1Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then you can:
•View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
•Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2Click Security > Set Date and Time.
3In the Set Date & Time field, enter the current date and time.
4Click Submit.
Note: It is recommended to use the network time.
Faxing 120
Configuring the printer to observe daylight saving time
The printer can be set to automatically adjust for daylight saving time:
1Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then you can:
•View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
•Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2Click Security > Set Date and Time.
3Select the Automatically Observe DST checkbox, and then enter the DST start and end dates in the Custom Time
Zone Setup section.
4Click Submit.
Creating shortcuts
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
Instead of entering the entire phone number of a fax recipient on the printer control panel each time you want to send
a fax, you can create a permanent fax destination and assign a shortcut number. A shortcut can be created to a single
fax number or a group of fax numbers.
1Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
•View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
•Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2Click Settings > Manage Shortcuts > Fax Shortcut Setup.
Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, get one from your system support
person.
3Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then enter the fax number.
To create a multiple‑number shortcut, enter the fax numbers for the group.
Note: Separate each fax number in the group with a semicolon (;).
4Assign a shortcut number.
If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
5Click Add.
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the touch screen
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
Faxing 121
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax > enter the fax number
To create a group of fax numbers, touch Next number, and then enter the next fax number.
4Navigate to:
> enter a name for the shortcut > Done > OK > Fax It
Sending a fax
Sending a fax using the touch screen
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, touch Fax.
4Enter the fax number or a shortcut using the touch screen or keypad.
To add recipients, touch Next Number and then enter the recipient's telephone number or shortcut number, or
search the address book.
Note: To place a dial pause within a fax number, press . The dial pause appears as a comma in the “Fax to”
box. Use this feature if you need to dial an outside line first.
5Touch Fax It.
Sending a fax using the computer
The printer driver fax option lets you send a print job to the printer, which sends the job as a fax. The fax option works
as a normal fax machine, but is controlled through the printer driver instead of the printer control panel.
1With a document open, click File > Print.
2Select the printer, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
3Navigate to:
Fax tab > Enable fax
4Enter the recipient fax number or numbers in the “Fax number(s)” field.
Note: Fax numbers can be entered manually or by using the Phone Book feature
5If necessary, enter a prefix in the “Dialing prefix” field.
6Select the appropriate paper size and page orientation.
7If you want to include a cover page with the fax, then select Include cover page with fax, and then enter the
appropriate information.
8Click OK.
Faxing 122
Notes:
•The Fax option is available for use only with the PostScript driver or the Universal Fax Driver. For information on
installing these drivers, see the Software and Documentation CD.
•The Fax option must be configured and enabled in the PostScript driver under the Configuration tab before it
can be used.
•If the Always display settings prior to faxing check box is selected, then you are prompted to verify the
recipient information before the fax is sent. If this check box is cleared, then the queued document is sent
automatically as a fax when you click OK on the Fax tab.
Sending a fax using shortcuts
Fax shortcuts are just like the speed dial numbers on a telephone or fax machine. A shortcut number (1–99999) can
contain a single recipient or multiple recipients.
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not place postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3Press , and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad.
4Touch Fax It.
Sending a fax using the address book
The address book enables you to search for bookmarks and network directory servers.
Note: If the address book feature is not enabled, then contact your system support person.
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax > > Browse shortcuts
4Using the virtual keyboard, type the name or part of the name of the person whose fax number you want to find.
Note: Do not attempt to search for multiple names at the same time.
5Touch Done > Fax It.
Faxing 123
Customizing fax settings
Changing the fax resolution
Settings range from Standard (fastest speed) to Ultra Fine (slowest speed, best quality).
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax > enter the fax number > Options
4From the Resolution area, touch the arrows to change to the resolution you want.
5Touch Fax It.
Making a fax lighter or darker
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax > enter the fax number > Options
4From the Darkness area, touch the arrows to adjust the darkness of the fax.
5Touch Fax It.
Sending a fax at a scheduled time
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax > enter the fax number > Options > Advanced Options > Delayed Send
Note: If Fax Mode is set to Fax Server, the Delayed Send button will not appear. Faxes waiting for transmission
are listed in the Fax Queue.
Faxing 124
4Touch the arrows to adjust the time the fax will be transmitted.
The time is increased or decreased in increments of 30 minutes. If the current time is shown, the left arrow is
unavailable.
5Touch Fax It.
Note: The document is scanned and then faxed at the scheduled time.
Viewing a fax log
1Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
•View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
•Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2Click Settings > Reports > Fax Job Log or Fax Call Log.
Blocking junk faxes
1Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
•View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
•Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Block No Name Fax.
Notes:
•This option blocks all incoming faxes that have a private caller ID or no fax station name.
•In the Banned Fax List field, enter the phone numbers or fax station names of specific fax callers you want to
block.
Canceling an outgoing fax
Canceling a fax while the original documents are still scanning
•When using the ADF, touch Cancel Job while Scanning… appears.
•When using the scanner glass, touch Cancel Job while Scanning… appears or while Scan the Next Page /
Finish the Job appears.
Faxing 125
Canceling a fax after the original documents have been scanned to memory
1On the home screen, touch Cancel Jobs.
The Cancel Jobs screen appears.
2Touch the job or jobs you want to cancel.
Only three jobs appear on the screen; touch the down arrow until the job you want appears, and then touch the
job you want to cancel.
3Touch Delete Selected Jobs.
The Deleting Selected Jobs screen appears, the selected jobs are deleted, and then the home screen appears.
Understanding fax options
Content
This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document.
Choose content type from Text, Text/Photo, Photo, or Graphics.
•Text—Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
•Graphics—Use when the original document is mostly business‑type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and
animations.
•Text/Photo—Use when the original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
•Photo—Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image.
Choose content source from Color Laser, Black/White Laser, Inkjet, Photo/Film, Magazine, Newspaper, Press, or Other.
•Color Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer.
•Black/White Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
•Inkjet—Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
•Photo/Film—Use when the original document is a photo from film.
•Magazine—Use when the original document is from a magazine.
•Newspaper—Use when the original document is from a newspaper.
•Press—Use when the original document was printed using a printing press.
•Other—Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
Resolution
This options increases how closely the scanner examines the document you want to fax. If you are faxing a photo, a
drawing with fine lines, or a document with very small text, then increase the Resolution setting. This will increase the
amount of time required for the scan and will increase the quality of the fax output.
•Standard—Suitable for most documents
•Fine 200 dpi—Recommended for documents with small print
•Super fine 300 dpi—Recommended for original documents with fine detail
•Ultra fine 600 dpi—Recommended for documents with pictures or photos
Note: Fine 200 dpi and Super fine 300 dpi is displayed when color printing is selected.
Faxing 126
Darkness
This option adjusts how light or dark your faxes will turn out in relation to the original document.
Color
This option enables or disables color in faxing.
Page Setup
This option lets you change the Sides (Duplex), Orientation, and Binding settings.
•Sides (Duplex)—Use to specify if the original document is simplex (printed on one page) or duplex (printed on both
sides). This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the fax.
•Orientation—Use to specify the orientation of the original document, and then changes Sides and Binding to match
the orientation.
•Binding—Use to specify if the original document is bound on the long‑edge or short‑edge side.
Scan Preview
This option displays the first page of the image before it is included in the fax. When the first page is scanned, the
scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
Delayed Send
This lets you send a fax at a later time or date.
1Set up your fax.
2From the home screen, navigate to:
Delayed Send > enter the date and time you want to send your fax > Done
Note: If the printer is turned off when the delayed fax is scheduled to be sent, then the fax is sent the next time the
printer is turned on.
This setting can be especially useful in sending information to fax lines that are not readily available during certain
hours, or when transmission times are cheaper.
Advanced Options
Touching the Advanced Options button opens a screen where you can change the following settings:
•Advanced Imaging—Use to adjust the Background Removal, Contrast, Color Balance, Negative Image, Mirror Image,
Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature settings before you fax the document.
•Custom Job—Use to combine multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
•Edge Erase—Use to eliminate smudges or information around the edges of a document. You can choose to eliminate
an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever is within
the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
•Transmission Log—Use to print the transmission log or transmission error log.
Faxing 127
Holding and forwarding faxes
Holding faxes
This option lets you hold received faxes from printing until they are released. Held faxes can be released manually or
at a scheduled day or time.
1Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
•View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
•Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Holding Faxes.
3In the Print Faxes Password field, enter a password.
4From the Held Fax Mode menu, select one of the following:
•Off
•Always On
•Manual
•Scheduled
5If you selected Scheduled, then continue with the following steps:
aClick Fax Holding Schedule.
bFrom the Action menu, select Hold faxes.
cFrom the Time menu, select the time you want the held faxes released.
dFrom the Day(s) menu, select the day you want the held faxes released.
6Click Add.
Forwarding a fax
This option lets you print and forward received faxes to a fax number, e‑mail address, FTP site, or LDSS.
1Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
•View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
•Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2Click Settings > Fax Settings.
3From the Fax Forwarding menu, select one of the following:
•Print
•Print and Forward
•Forward
Faxing 128
4From the “Forward to” menu, select one of the following:
•Fax
•E‑mail
•FTP
•LDSS
•eSF
5In the Forward to Shortcut field, enter the shortcut number where you want the fax forwarded.
Note: The shortcut number must be valid for the setting selected in the “Forward to” menu.
6Click Submit.
Faxing 129
Scanning
Scanning to an FTP address
ADF Scanner glass
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings).
The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server. Only one FTP address may be
sent to the server at a time.
Once an FTP destination has been configured by your system support person, the name of the destination becomes
available as a shortcut number, or it is listed as a profile under the Held Jobs icon. An FTP destination could also be
another PostScript printer; for example, a color document can be scanned and then sent to a color printer.
Creating shortcuts
Instead of entering the entire FTP site address on the printer control panel each time you want to send a document to
an FTP server, you can create a permanent FTP destination and assign a shortcut number. There are two methods for
creating shortcut numbers: using the Embedded Web Server or using the printer touch screen.
Creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
1Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
•View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
•Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2Click Settings.
3Under Other Settings, click Manage Shortcuts.
Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, get one from your system support
person.
4Click FTP Shortcut Setup.
Scanning 130
5Enter the appropriate information.
6Enter a shortcut number.
If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
7Click Add.
Creating an FTP shortcut using the touch screen
1From the home screen, navigate to:
FTP > type the FTP address > > enter a name for the shortcut > Done
2Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK. If the name or number is incorrect, then
touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.
If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
3Touch Submit.
Scanning to an FTP address
Scanning to an FTP address using the touch screen
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
FTP > FTP > type the FTP address > Send It
Scanning to an FTP address using a shortcut number
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3Press , and then enter the FTP shortcut number.
4Touch Send It.
Scanning to an FTP address using the address book
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.
Scanning 131
3From the home screen, navigate to:
FTP > FTP > > enter the name of recipient > Browse shortcuts > name of recipient > Search
Understanding FTP options
FTP
This option lets you enter the IP address for the FTP destination.
Note: Addresses should be in dot notation form (for example: yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy).
File Name
This option lets you enter the file name of the scanned document.
Original Size
This option opens a screen where you can choose the size of the documents for FTP sending.
•Touch a paper size button to select that size as the Original Size setting. The FTP screen appears with the new setting
displayed.
•When “Original Size” is set to Mixed Sizes, you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes.
•When “Original Size” is set to Auto Size Sense, the scanner automatically determines the size of the original
document.
Send As
This option sets the output (PDF, TIFF, JPEG or XPS) for the scanned image.
•PDF—Creates a single file with multiple pages, viewable with Adobe Reader. Adobe Reader is provided free by
Adobe at www.adobe.com.
•Secure PDF—Creates an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access
•TIFF—Creates multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded
Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.
•JPEG—Creates and attaches a separate file for each page of your original document, viewable by most Web browsers
and graphics programs
•XPS—Creates a single XPS file with multiple pages, viewable using an Internet Explorer-hosted viewer and the .NET
Framework, or by downloading a third party standalone viewer
Color
This option enables or disables color for the scanned image.
Resolution
This option adjusts the output quality of your file. Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the time
needed to scan your original document. Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the file size.
Scanning 132
Darkness
This option adjusts how light or dark your files will turn out in relation to the original document.
Page Setup
This option lets you change the Sides (Duplex), Orientation, and Binding.
•Sides (Duplex)— Specifies if the original document is simplex (printed on one page) or duplex (printed on both
sides). This also identifies what needs to be scanned.
•Orientation— Specifies the orientation of the original document, and then changes the Sides and Binding settings
to match the orientation.
•Binding— Specifies if the original document is bound on the long‑edge or short‑edge side.
Content
This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document.
Choose content type from Text, Text/Photo, Photo, or Graphics.
•Text—Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
•Graphics—Use when the original document is mostly business‑type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and
animations.
•Text/Photo—Use when the original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
•Photo—Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image.
Choose content source from Color Laser, Black/White Laser, Inkjet, Photo/Film, Magazine, Newspaper, Press, or Other.
•Color Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer.
•Black/White Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
•Inkjet—Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
•Photo/Film—Use when the original document is a photo from film.
•Magazine—Use when the original document is from a magazine.
•Newspaper—Use when the original document is from a newspaper.
•Press—Use when the original document was printed using a printing press.
•Other—Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
Scan Preview
This option displays the first page of the original document before it is scanned completely. When the first page is
scanned, the scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
Scanning 133
Advanced Options
Touching the Advanced Options button opens a screen where you can change the following settings:
•Advanced Imaging—Use to adjust the Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, JPEG Quality,
Negative Image, Mirror Image, Scan edge to edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature image output
settings before sending the image.
•Edge Erase—Use to eliminate smudges or information around the edges of a document. You can choose to eliminate
an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever is within
the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
•Transmission Log—Use to print the transmission log or transmission error log.
•Custom Job—Use to combine multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
Scanning to a computer or flash drive
ADF Scanner glass
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings).
The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a computer or a flash drive. The computer does not have to be directly
connected to the printer for you to receive Scan to PC images. You can scan the document back to the computer over
the network by creating a scan profile on the computer and then downloading the profile to the printer.
Scanning to a computer
1Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
•View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
•Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2Click Scan Profile > Create.
3Select your scan settings, and then click Next.
4Select a location on your computer where you want to save the scanned output file.
Scanning 134
5Enter a scan name.
The scan name is the name that appears in the Scan Profile list on the display.
6Click Submit.
7Review the instructions on the Scan Profile screen.
A shortcut number was automatically assigned when you clicked Submit. You can use this shortcut number when
you are ready to scan your documents.
aLoad an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
bIf you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
cPress , and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad, or touch Held Jobs on the home screen, and
then touch Profiles.
dAfter entering the shortcut number, the scanner scans and sends the document to the directory or program
you specified. If you touched Profiles on the home screen, then locate your shortcut on the list.
8Return to the computer to view the file.
The output file is saved in the location or launched in the program you specified.
Scanning to a flash drive
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3Insert the flash drive into the USB port on the front of the printer.
The USB Drive home screen appears.
4Select the destination folder, and then touch Scan to USB drive.
5Adjust the scan settings.
6Touch Scan It.
Understanding the Scan Center features
The Scan Center software lets you modify scan settings and select where to send the scanned output. Scan settings
modified with the Scan Center software can be saved and used for other scan jobs.
The following features are available:
•Scan and send images to your computer
•Convert scanned images to text
•Preview the scanned image and adjust the brightness and contrast
•Make larger scans without losing detail
•Scan two‑sided documents
Scanning 135
Using the ScanBack Utility
You can use the Lexmark ScanBackTM Utility to create scan‑to‑PC profiles. The ScanBack Utility can be downloaded from
the Lexmark Web site on http://support.lexmark.com.
1Set up a scan‑to‑PC profile:
aLaunch the ScanBack Utility.
bSelect the printer.
If no printers are listed, then contact your system support person, or click Setup to manually search for an IP
address or host name.
cFollow the instructions on your computer screen to define the type of document being scanned and what kind
of output you want to create.
dSelect any of the following:
•Show MFP Instructions—View or print the instructions.
•Create Shortcut—Save this group of settings to use again.
eClick Finish.
A dialog box appears with your scan profile information and the status of the received images.
2Scan original documents:
aLoad all pages in the ADF or on the scanner glass.
bFrom the printer control panel, navigate to:
Scan/Email > Profiles > select your scan profile > Submit
Note: The output file is saved in a directory or launched in the application you specified.
Understanding scan profile options
Original Size
This option sets the size of the documents you are going to scan. When Original Size is set to Mixed Sizes, you can scan
an original document that contains mixed paper sizes (letter‑ and legal‑size pages).
Resolution
This option adjusts the output quality of your file. Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the time
needed to scan your original document. Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the file size.
Color
This option enables or disables color for the scanned image.
Content
This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document.
Scanning 136
Choose content type from Text, Text/Photo, Photo, or Graphics.
•Text—Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
•Graphics—Use when the original document is mostly business‑type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and
animations.
•Text/Photo—Use when the original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
•Photo—Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image.
Choose content source from Color Laser, Black/White Laser, Inkjet, Photo/Film, Magazine, Newspaper, Press, or Other.
•Color Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer.
•Black/White Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
•Inkjet—Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
•Photo/Film—Use when the original document is a photo from film.
•Magazine—Use when the original document is from a magazine.
•Newspaper—Use when the original document is from a newspaper.
•Press—Use when the original document was printed using a printing press.
•Other—Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
Darkness
This option adjusts how light or dark your scanned documents will turn out in relation to the original document.
Page Setup
This option lets you change the Sides (Duplex), Orientation, and Binding.
•Sides (Duplex)— Use this to specify if the original document is simplex (printed on one page) or duplex (printed on
both sides). This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the e-mail.
•Orientation— Use this to specify the orientation of the original document, and then change Sides and Binding to
match the orientation.
•Binding— Use this to specify if the original document is bound on the long‑edge or short‑edge of the page.
Scan Preview
This option displays the first page of the image before it is included in the e-mail. When the first page is scanned, the
scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
Advanced Options
Touching the Advanced Options button opens a screen where you can change the following settings:
•Advanced Imaging—Use to change or adjust Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, JPEG
Quality, Mirror Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature settings
before scanning a document.
•Custom Job—Use to combine multiple scan jobs into a single scan job.
Scanning 137
•Edge Erase—Use to remove smudges or information around the edges of a document. You can choose to eliminate
an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever is within
the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scanned image.
•Transmission Log—Use to print the transmission log or transmission error log.
Scanning 138
Understanding printer menus
Menus list
Supplies Paper Menu Reports Settings
Replace Supply
Cyan Cartridge
Magenta Cartridge
Yellow Cartridge
Black Cartridge
Cyan Photoconductor Unit
Magenta Photoconductor Unit
Yellow Photoconductor Unit
Black Photoconductor Unit
Separator Roll and Pick Assembly
Waste Toner Bottle
Staple Cartridge
Hole Punch Box
160K Maintenance Kit
320K Maintenance Kit
480K Maintenance Kit
Default Source
Paper Size/Type
Configure MP
Substitute Size
Paper Texture
Paper Loading
Custom Types
Custom Names
Custom Scan Sizes
Custom Bin Names
Universal Setup
Bin Setup
Menu Settings Page
Device Statistics
Network Setup Page
Network [x] Setup Page
Shortcut List
Fax Job Log
Fax Call Log
Copy Shortcuts
E-mail Shortcuts
Fax Shortcuts
FTP Shortcuts
Profiles List
Print Fonts
Print Directory
Asset Report
General Settings
Copy Settings
Fax Settings
E‑mail Settings
FTP Settings
Flash Drive Menu
Print Settings
Security Network/Ports Help Manage Shortcuts
Edit Security Setups
Miscellaneous Security Settings
Confidential Print
Disk Wiping
Security Audit Log
Set Date and Time
Active NIC
Network1
Standard USB
Parallel [x]
Serial [x]
SMTP Setup
Print All Guides
Copy Guide
E-mail Guide
Fax Guide
FTP Guide
Print Defects Guide
Information Guide
Supplies Guide
Fax Shortcuts
E-mail Shortcuts
FTP Shortcuts
Copy Shortcuts
Profile Shortcuts
Option Card Menu
A list of installed DLEs (Download Emulators) appears.2
1 Depending on the printer setup, this menu appears as Standard Network or Network [x].
2 This menu appears only when one or more DLEs are installed.
Understanding printer menus 139
Supplies menu
Menu item Description
Replace Supply
Separator Roll and Pick Assembly
Yes
No
Provides the option to reset the supply counter for the
separator roll and pick assembly
•Select Yes to reset the supply counter.
•Select No to exit.
Cyan Cartridge
Cartridge Nearly Low
Cartridge Low
Cartridge Very Low
Cartridge Critically Low
Invalid
Replace
Missing or Defective
OK
Unsupported
Shows the status of the cyan toner cartridge
Magenta Cartridge
Cartridge Nearly Low
Cartridge Low
Cartridge Very Low
Cartridge Critically Low
Invalid
Replace
Missing or Defective
OK
Unsupported
Shows the status of the magenta toner cartridge
Yellow Cartridge
Cartridge Nearly Low
Cartridge Low
Cartridge Very Low
Cartridge Critically Low
Invalid
Replace
Missing or Defective
OK
Unsupported
Shows the status of the yellow toner cartridge
Understanding printer menus 140
Menu item Description
Black Cartridge
Cartridge Nearly Low
Cartridge Low
Cartridge Very Low
Cartridge Critically Low
Invalid
Replace
Missing or Defective
OK
Unsupported
Shows the status of the black toner cartridge
Cyan Photoconductor Unit
Early Warning
Low
Replace
Missing
OK
Shows the status of the cyan photoconductor unit
Magenta Photoconductor Unit
Early Warning
Low
Replace
Missing
OK
Shows the status of the magenta photoconductor unit
Yellow Photoconductor Unit
Early Warning
Low
Replace
Missing
OK
Shows the status of the yellow photoconductor unit
Separator Roll and Pick Assembly
OK
Replace
Shows the status of the separator roll and pick assembly
Waste Toner Bottle
Near Full
Replace
Missing
OK
Shows the status of the waste toner bottle
Staple Cartridge
Early Warning
Low
Replace
Missing
OK
Shows the status of the staple cartridge
Understanding printer menus 141
Menu item Description
Hole Punch Box
Near Full
Replace
Missing
OK
Shows the status of the hole punch box
160K Maintenance Kit
Near End of Life
End of Life
OK
Shows the status of the maintenance kit
320K Maintenance Kit
Near End of Life
End of Life
OK
Shows the status of the maintenance kit
480K Maintenance Kit
Near End of Life
End of Life
OK
Shows the status of the maintenance kit
Paper menu
Default Source menu
Menu item Description
Default Source
Tray [x]
MP Feeder
Manual Paper
Manual Envelope
Sets a default paper source for all print jobs
Notes:
•Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.
•From the Paper menu, Configure MP feeder must be set to Cassette for
MP feeder to appear as a menu setting.
•If the same size and type of paper are in two trays and the Paper Size and
Paper Type settings match, then the trays are automatically linked. When
one tray is empty, the print job continues using the linked tray.
Understanding printer menus 142
Paper Size/Type menu
Menu item Description
Tray [x] Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
JIS‑B4
A3
11 x 17
Oficio (México)
Folio
Statement
Universal
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Specifies the paper size loaded in each tray
Notes:
•Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
•For trays with automatic size sensing, only the size detected by the
hardware appears.
•If the same size and type of paper are in two trays and the Paper Size
and Paper Type settings match, then the trays are automatically linked.
When one tray is empty, the print job uses the linked tray.
Tray [x] Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Glossy
Heavy Glossy
Labels
Bond
Envelope
Rough Envelope
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton Paper
Custom Type [x]
Specifies the paper type loaded in each tray
Notes:
•Plain Paper is the factory default setting for Tray 1. Custom Type [x] is
the factory default setting for all other trays.
•If available, then a user‑defined name will appear instead of Custom
Type [x].
•Use this menu to configure automatic tray linking.
Note: Only installed trays are listed in this menu.
Understanding printer menus 143
Menu item Description
MP Feeder Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
JIS‑B4
A3
11 x 17
Oficio (México)
Folio
Statement
Universal
7 3/4 Envelope
10 Envelope
DL Envelope
C5 Envelope
Other Envelope
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Specifies the paper size loaded in the multipurpose feeder
Notes:
•Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
•From the Paper menu, Configure MP Feeder must be set to Cassette for
MP Feeder to appear as a menu.
•Other Envelope printing is not supported.
MP Feeder Type
Custom Type [x]
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Glossy
Heavy Glossy
Labels
Bond
Envelope
Rough Envelope
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton Paper
Specifies the paper type loaded in the multipurpose feeder
Notes:
•Custom Type [x] is the factory default setting.
•From the Paper menu, Configure MP Feeder must be set to Cassette for
MP Feeder Type to appear as a menu setting.
Note: Only installed trays are listed in this menu.
Understanding printer menus 144
Menu item Description
Manual Paper Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
JIS‑B4
A3
11 x 17
Oficio (México)
Folio
Statement
Universal
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Specifies the paper size being manually loaded
Note: Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
Manual Paper Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Glossy
Heavy Glossy
Labels
Bond
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton Paper
Custom Type [x]
Specifies the paper type being manually loaded
Note: Plain Paper is the factory default setting.
Manual Envelope Size
10 Envelope
DL Envelope
C5 Envelope
Other Envelope
7 3/4 Envelope
Specifies the envelope size being manually loaded
Notes:
•10 Envelope is the US factory default setting. DL Envelope is the
international factory default setting.Printing a custom size envelope is
not supported.
•Other Envelope printing is not supported.
Manual Envelope Type
Envelope
Rough Envelope
Custom Type [x]
Specifies the envelope type being manually loaded
Note: Envelope is the factory default setting.
Note: Only installed trays are listed in this menu.
Understanding printer menus 145
Configure MP menu
Menu item Description
Configure MP
Cassette
Manual
Determines when the printer selects paper from the multipurpose feeder
Notes:
•Cassette is the factory default setting. This configures the multipurpose
feeder as the automatic paper source.
•Manual sets the multipurpose feeder only for manual feed print jobs.
Substitute Size menu
Menu item Description
Substitute Size
All Listed
Off
Statement/A5
Letter/A4
11 x 17/A3
Substitutes a specified paper size if the requested paper size is not available
Notes:
•All Listed is the factory default setting. All available substitutions are
allowed.
•Off indicates that no size substitutions are allowed.
•Setting a size substitution lets the print job continue without a Change
Paper message appearing.
Paper Texture menu
Menu item Description
Plain Texture
Normal
Rough
Smooth
Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded
Card Stock Texture
Normal
Rough
Smooth
Specifies the relative texture of the card stock loaded
Note: Settings appear only if card stock is supported.
Transparency Texture
Normal
Rough
Smooth
Specifies the relative texture of the transparencies loaded
Recycled Texture
Normal
Rough
Smooth
Specifies the relative texture of the recycled paper loaded
Note: Normal is the factory default setting for all paper types except bond, rough envelope and rough/cotton paper.
Understanding printer menus 146
Menu item Description
Glossy Texture
Normal
Rough
Smooth
Specifies the relative texture of the glossy paper loaded
Heavy Glossy Texture
Normal
Rough
Smooth
Specifies the relative texture of the glossy paper loaded
Labels Texture
Normal
Rough
Smooth
Specifies the relative texture of the labels loaded
Bond Texture
Rough
Smooth
Normal
Specifies the relative texture of the bond paper loaded
Envelope Texture
Normal
Rough
Smooth
Specifies the relative texture of the envelopes loaded
Rough Envelope Texture
Rough
Specifies the relative texture of the envelopes loaded
Letterhead Texture
Normal
Rough
Smooth
Specifies the relative texture of the letterhead loaded
Preprinted Texture
Normal
Rough
Smooth
Specifies the relative texture of the preprinted paper loaded
Colored Texture
Normal
Rough
Smooth
Specifies the relative texture of the colored paper loaded
Light Texture
Normal
Rough
Smooth
Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded
Note: Normal is the factory default setting for all paper types except bond, rough envelope and rough/cotton paper.
Understanding printer menus 147
Menu item Description
Heavy Texture
Normal
Rough
Smooth
Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded
Rough/Cotton Texture
Rough
Specifies the relative texture of the cotton paper loaded
Custom [x] Texture
Normal
Rough
Smooth
Specifies the relative texture of the custom paper loaded
Note: Settings appear only if the custom type is supported.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting for all paper types except bond, rough envelope and rough/cotton paper.
Paper Loading menu
Menu item Description
Card Stock Loading
Off
Duplex
Determines whether 2‑sided printing occurs for all print jobs that
specify Card Stock as the paper type
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Recycled Loading
Off
Duplex
Determines whether 2‑sided printing occurs for all print jobs that
specify Recycled as the paper type
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Glossy Loading
Off
Duplex
Determines whether 2‑sided printing occurs for all print jobs that
specify Glossy as the paper type
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Heavy Glossy Loading
Off
Duplex
Determines whether 2‑sided printing occurs for all print jobs that
specify Heavy Glossy as the paper type
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Labels Loading
Off
Duplex
Determines whether 2‑sided printing occurs for all print jobs that
specify Labels as the paper type
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Vinyl Labels Loading
Off
Duplex
Determines whether 2‑sided printing occurs for all print jobs that
specify Vinyl Labels as the paper type
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Bond Loading
Off
Duplex
Determines whether 2‑sided printing occurs for all print jobs that
specify Bond as the paper type
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Notes:
•Duplex sets the printer default to 2‑sided printing for every print job unless 1‑sided printing is selected from Print
Properties.
•If Duplex is selected, then all print jobs are sent through the duplex unit, including 1‑sided print jobs.
Understanding printer menus 148
Menu item Description
Letterhead Loading
Off
Duplex
Determines whether 2‑sided printing occurs for all print jobs that
specify Letterhead as the paper type
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Preprinted Loading
Off
Duplex
Determines whether 2‑sided printing occurs for all print jobs that
specify Preprinted as the paper type
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Colored Loading
Off
Duplex
Determines whether 2‑sided printing occurs for all print jobs that
specify Colored as the paper type
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Light Loading
Off
Duplex
Determines whether 2‑sided printing occurs for all print jobs that
specify Light as the paper type
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Heavy Loading
Off
Duplex
Determines whether 2‑sided printing occurs for all print jobs that
specify Heavy as the paper type
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Rough/Cotton Loading
Off
Duplex
Determines whether 2‑sided printing occurs for all print jobs that
specify Rough or Cotton as the paper type
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Custom [x] Loading
Off
Duplex
Determines whether 2‑sided printing occurs for all print jobs that
specify Custom [x] as the paper type
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•Custom [x] Loading is available only if the custom paper type is
supported.
Notes:
•Duplex sets the printer default to 2‑sided printing for every print job unless 1‑sided printing is selected from Print
Properties.
•If Duplex is selected, then all print jobs are sent through the duplex unit, including 1‑sided print jobs.
Understanding printer menus 149
Custom Types menu
Menu item Description
Custom Type [x]
Paper
Card Stock
Letterhead
Transparency
Glossy
Rough/Cotton
Labels
Bond
Envelope
Associates a paper or specialty media type with a factory default Custom
Type [x] name or a user‑defined custom name created from the Embedded
Web Server or from MarkVisionTM Professional
Notes:
•Paper is the factory default setting.
•The custom paper type must be supported by the selected tray or
multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source.
Recycled
Paper
Card Stock
Letterhead
Transparency
Glossy
Rough/Cotton
Labels
Bond
Envelope
Specifies a paper type when the Recycled setting is selected in other menus
Notes:
•Paper is the factory default setting.
•The custom paper type must be supported by the selected tray or
multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source.
Custom Names menu
Menu item Definition
Custom Name [x]
[none]
Specify a custom name for a paper type. This name replaces the Custom
Type [x] name in the printer menus.
Understanding printer menus 150
Custom Scan Sizes menu
Menu item Description
Custom Scan Size [x]
Scan Size Name
Width
1–11.69 inches (25–297 mm)
Height
1–17 inches (25–432 mm)
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
2 scans per side
Off
On
Specifies a custom scan size name, scan sizes, and options. The custom scan
size name replaces Custom Scan Size [x] in the printer menus.
Notes:
•11.69 inches is the US factory default setting for Width. 297 millimeters
is the international factory default setting for Width.
•17 inches is the US factory default setting for Height. 432 millimeters is
the international factory default setting for Height.
•Portrait is the factory default setting for Orientation.
•Off is the factory default setting for 2 scans per side.
Universal Setup menu
Menu item Description
Units of Measure
Inches
Millimeters
Identifies the unit of measure
Note: Inches is the US factory default setting. Millimeters is the
international factory default setting.
Portrait Width
3–48 inches
76–1219 mm
Sets the portrait width
Notes:
•11.69 inches is the US factory default setting. Inches can be
increased in 0.01‑inch increments.
•296.9 mm is the international factory default setting. Millimeters
can be increased in 1‑mm increments.
•If the width exceeds the maximum, then the printer uses the
maximum width allowed.
Portrait Height
3–48 inches
76–1219 mm
Sets the portrait height
Notes:
•48 inches is the US factory default setting. Inches can be increased in
0.01‑inch increments.
•1219 mm is the international factory default setting. Millimeters can
be increased in 1‑mm increments.
•If the height exceeds the maximum, then the printer uses the
maximum height allowed.
Understanding printer menus 151
Menu item Description
Feed Direction
Short Edge
Long Edge
Specifies the feed direction
Notes:
•Short Edge is the factory default setting.
•Long Edge appears only if the longest edge is shorter than the
maximum width supported by the tray.
Bin Setup menu
Menu item Description
Output Bin
Standard Bin
Bin [x]
Specifies the default exit bin
Note: Standard Bin is the factory default setting.
Configure Bins
Mailbox
Link
Link Optional
Type Assignment
Specifies configuration options for exit bins
Notes:
•Mailbox is the factory default setting. This setting
treats each bin as a separate mailbox.
•Link configures all available bins as one large exit bin.
•Link Optional links together all available exit bins
except the standard bin and only appears when at
least two optional bins are installed.
•Type Assignment assigns each paper type to an
output bin or linked bin set.
•Bins assigned the same name are automatically
linked unless Link Optional is selected.
Overflow Bin
Standard Bin
Bin [x]
Specifies an alternate exit bin when a designated bin is full
Note: Standard Bin is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 152
Menu item Description
Assign Type/Bin
Plain Paper Bin
Card Stock Bin
Transparency Bin
Recycled Bin
Glossy Bin
Heavy Glossy Bin
Labels Bin
Bond Bin
Envelope Bin
Rough Envelope Bin
Letterhead Bin
Preprinted Bin
Colored Bin
Light Paper Bin
Heavy Paper Bin
Rough/Cotton Bin
Custom [x] Bin
Selects an exit bin for each supported paper type
Available selections for each type are:
Disabled
Standard Bin
Bin [x]
Note: Disabled is the factory default setting.
Reports menu
Reports menu
Menu item Description
Menu Settings Page Prints a report containing information about the paper loaded into trays, installed
memory, total page count, alarms, timeouts, printer control panel language,
TCP/IP address, status of supplies, status of the network connection, and other
information
Device Statistics Prints a report containing printer statistics such as supply information and details
about printed pages
Network Setup Page Prints a report containing information about the network printer settings, such
as the TCP/IP address information
Note: This menu item appears only in network printers or printers connected
to print servers.
Network [x] Setup Page Prints a report containing information about the network printer settings, such
as the TCP/IP address information
Notes:
•This menu item is available when there is more than one network option
installed.
•This menu item appears only in network printers or printers connected to
print servers.
Shortcut List Prints a report containing information about configured shortcuts
Understanding printer menus 153
Menu item Description
Fax Job Log Prints a report containing information about the last 200 completed faxes
Note: This menu item is available only when Enable Job Log is set to On in the
Fax Settings menu.
Fax Call Log Prints a report containing information about the last 100 attempted, received,
and blocked calls
Note: This menu item is available only when Enable Job Log is set to On in the
Fax Settings menu.
Copy Shortcuts Prints a report containing information about copy shortcuts
E‑mail Shortcuts Prints a report containing information about e‑mail shortcuts
Fax Shortcuts Prints a report containing information about fax shortcuts
FTP Shortcuts Prints a report containing information about FTP shortcuts
Profiles List Prints a list of profiles stored in the printer
Print Fonts Prints a report of all the fonts available for the printer language currently set in
the printer
Print Directory Prints a list of all the resources stored on an optional flash memory card or printer
hard disk
Notes:
•Job Buffer Size must be set to 100%.
•Make sure the optional flash memory or printer hard disk is installed
correctly and working.
Asset Report Prints a report containing asset information including the printer serial number
and model name. The report contains text and UPC barcodes that can be scanned
into an asset database.
Network/Ports menu
Active NIC menu
Menu item Description
Active NIC
Auto
[list of available network cards]
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•This menu item appears only if an optional network card is installed.
Standard Network or Network [x] menus
Note: Only active ports appear in this menu; all inactive ports are omitted.
Understanding printer menus 154
Menu item Description
PCL SmartSwitch
On
Off
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job requires
it, regardless of the default printer language
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•When Off is used, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer
uses PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default
printer language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.
PS SmartSwitch
On
Off
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job requires
it, regardless of the default printer language
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•When Off is used, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer
uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer
language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
NPA Mode
Auto
Off
Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Network Buffer
Auto
3KB to [maximum size allowed]
Sets the size of the network input buffer
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•The value can be changed in 1‑KB increments.
•The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or
Off.
•To increase the maximum size range for the Network Buffer, disable or
reduce the size of the parallel, serial, and USB buffers.
•Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Job Buffering
Off
On
Auto
Temporarily stores print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing. This menu
only appears if a formatted disk is installed.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk.
•Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another
input port.
•Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Understanding printer menus 155
Menu item Description
Mac Binary PS
Auto
On
Off
Sets the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
•On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
Standard Network Setup
Reports
Network Card
TCP/IP
IPv6
Wireless
AppleTalk
Displays and sets the printer network settings.
Note: The Wireless menu appears only when the printer is connected to a wireless
network.
Network [x] Setup
Reports
Network Card
TCP/IP
IPv6
Wireless
AppleTalk
Network Reports menu
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:
Network/Ports > Standard Network or Network [x] > Standard Network Setup or Network Setup > Reports or Network
Reports
Menu item Description
Print Setup Page Prints a report containing information about the network printer settings, such as the TCP/IP address
Network Card menu
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:
Network/Ports > Standard Network or Network [x] > Standard Network Setup or Network [x] Setup > Network Card
Menu item Description
View Card Status
Connected
Disconnected
Lets you view the connection status of the Network Card
View Card Speed Lets you view the speed of a currently active network card
Understanding printer menus 156
Menu item Description
Network Address
UAA
LAA
Lets you view the network addresses
Job Timeout
0
10–225
Sets the amount of time in seconds before a network print job is canceled
Note: 90 seconds is the factory default setting.
Banner Page
Off
On
Allows the printer to print a banner page
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
TCP/IP menu
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:
Network/Ports > Standard Network or Network [x] > Standard Network Setup or Network [x] Setup > TCP/IP
Note: This menu is available only in network models or printers attached to print servers.
Menu item Description
Activate
On
Off
Activates TCP/IP
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Set Hostname Lets you set the current TCP/IP hostname
Note: This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.
IP Address Lets you view or change the current TCP/IP address
Note: Manually setting the IP address sets the Enable DHCP and Enable Auto IP
settings to Off. It also sets Enable BOOTP and Enable RARP to Off on systems that
support BOOTP and RARP.
Netmask Lets you view or change the current TCP/IP netmask
Gateway Lets you view or change the current TCP/IP gateway
Enable DHCP
On
Off
Specifies the DHCP address and parameter assignment setting
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Enable RARP
On
Off
Specifies the RARP address assignment setting
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Enable BOOTP
On
Off
Specifies the BOOTP address assignment setting
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Enable AutoIP
Yes
No
Specifies the Zero Configuration Networking setting
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 157
Menu item Description
Enable FTP/TFTP
Yes
No
Enables the built-in FTP server, which allows you to send files to the printer using File
Transfer Protocol.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Enable HTTP Server
Yes
No
Enables the built-in web server (Embedded Web Server). When enabled, the printer
can be monitored and managed remotely using a web browser.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
WINS Server Address Lets you view or change the current WINS server address
Enable DDNS
Yes
No
Lets you view or change the current DDNS setting
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Enable mDNS
Yes
No
Lets you view or change the current mDNS setting
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
DNS Server Address Lets you view or change the current DNS server address
Enable HTTPS
Yes
No
Lets you view or change the current HTTPS setting
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
IPv6 menu
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:
Network/Ports > Standard Network or Network [x] > Standard Network Setup or Network [x] Setup > IPv6
Note: This menu is available only for network models or printers attached to print servers.
Menu item Description
Enable IPv6
On
Off
Enables IPv6 in the printer
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Auto Configuration
On
Off
Specifies whether the network adapter accepts the automatic IPv6
address configuration entries provided by a router
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Set Hostname Lets you set the hostname
Note: These settings can be changed only from the Embedded Web
Server.
View Address
View Router Address
Enable DHCPv6
On
Off
Enables DHCPv6 in the printer
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 158
Wireless menu
Use the following menu items to view or configure the wireless internal print server settings.
Note: This menu is available only in printer models connected to a wireless network.
The Wireless menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:
Network/Ports > Standard Network or Network [x] > Standard Network Setup or Network [x] Setup > Wireless
Menu item Description
Wi-Fi Protected Setup
Start Push Button
Lets you connect the printer to a wireless network by pressing buttons on
both the printer and the access point (wireless router) within a given
period of time
Wi-Fi Protected Setup
Start PIN Method
Lets you connect the printer to a wireless network by using a PIN on the
printer and entering it into the wireless settings of the access point
Enable/Disable WPS Autodetection
Enable
Disable
Automatically detects the connection method that an access point with
WPS uses—WPS Push Button Configuration (PBC) or WPS Personal
Identification Number (PIN)
Note: Disable is the factory default setting.
Network Mode
Infrastructure
Ad hoc
Specifies the network mode
Notes:
•Ad hoc is the factory default setting. This configures wireless
connection directly between the printer and a computer.
•Infrastructure lets the printer access a network using an access
point.
Compatibility
802.11b/g
802.11b/g/n
Specifies the wireless standard for the wireless network
Note: The 802.11b/g/n is the factory default setting.
Choose Network
[list of available networks]
Lets you select an available network for the printer to use
View Signal Quality Lets you view the quality of the wireless connection
View Security Mode Lets you view the encryption method that a wireless network uses
Note: Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) is a simple and secure configuration that lets you establish a wireless network
and enable network security without requiring prior knowledge of Wi‑Fi technology. It is no longer necessary to
configure the network name (SSID) and WEP key or WPA passphrase for network devices.
AppleTalk menu
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:
Network/Ports > Standard Network or Network [x] > Standard Network Setup or Network [x] Setup > AppleTalk
Understanding printer menus 159
Menu item Description
Activate
Yes
No
Activates AppleTalk support
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
View Name Shows the assigned AppleTalk name
Note: The name can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.
View Address Shows the assigned AppleTalk address
Note: The address can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.
Set Zone
[default]
[list of zones available on the network]
Provides a list of AppleTalk zones available on the network
Note: When “default” is selected, the printer uses the AppleTalk zone that the
router identifies as the default zone for the network. If no default zone exists,
then the zone marked with an * is the default setting.
Standard USB menu
Menu item Description
PCL SmartSwitch
On
Off
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received
through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer language
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PostScript emulation if the PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default
printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PS SmartSwitch is set to
Off.
PS SmartSwitch
On
Off
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received
through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer language
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PCL emulation if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer
language specified in the Setup menu if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
NPA Mode
Auto
On
Off
Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting. Auto sets the printer to examine data,
determine the format, and then process it appropriately.
•Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Understanding printer menus 160
Menu item Description
USB Buffer
Auto
3KB to [maximum size allowed]
Disabled
Sets the size of the USB input buffer
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•Disabled turns off job buffering. Any jobs already buffered on the printer hard
disk are printed before normal processing resumes.
•The USB buffer size value can be changed in 1-KB increments.
•The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or
Off.
•To increase the maximum size range for the USB Buffer, disable or reduce the
size of the parallel, serial, and network buffers.
•Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Job Buffering
Off
On
Auto
Temporarily stores print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•On buffers jobs on the printer hard disk.
•Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another
input port.
•Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Mac Binary PS
Auto
On
Off
Sets the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
•Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
ENA Address
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Sets the network address information for an external print server
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
ENA Netmask
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Sets the netmask information for an external print server
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
ENA Gateway
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Sets the gateway information for an external print server
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
Understanding printer menus 161
Parallel [x] menu
Menu item Description
PCL SmartSwitch
On
Off
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received
through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer
language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.
PS SmartSwitch
On
Off
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received
through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer
language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
NPA Mode
Auto
On
Off
Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Parallel Buffer
Auto
3KB to [maximum size allowed]
Disabled
Sets the size of the parallel input buffer
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•Disabled turns off job buffering. Any print jobs already buffered on the printer
hard disk are printed before normal processing resumes.
•The parallel buffer size setting can be changed in 1‑KB increments.
•The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or
Off.
•To increase the maximum size range for the Parallel Buffer, disable or reduce
the size of the USB, serial, and network buffers.
•Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Understanding printer menus 162
Menu item Description
Job Buffering
Off
On
Auto
Temporarily stores print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk.
•Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another
input port.
•Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Advanced Status
On
Off
Enables bidirectional communication through the parallel port
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•Off disables parallel port negotiation.
Protocol
Fastbytes
Standard
Specifies the parallel port protocol
Notes:
•Fastbytes is the factory default setting. It provides compatibility with most
existing parallel ports and is the recommended setting.
•Standard tries to resolve parallel port communication problems.
Honor Init
Off
On
Determines if the printer honors printer hardware initialization requests from the
computer
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•The computer requests initialization by activating the Init signal from the
parallel port. Many personal computers activate the Init signal each time the
computer is turned on.
Parallel Mode 2
On
Off
Determines if the parallel port data is sampled on the leading or trailing edge of a
strobe
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Mac Binary PS
Auto
On
Off
Sets the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
•On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
ENA Address
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Sets the network address information for an external print server
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
ENA Netmask
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Sets the netmask information for an external print server
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
Understanding printer menus 163
Menu item Description
ENA gateway
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Sets the gateway information for an external print server
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
Serial [x] menu
Menu item Description
PCL SmartSwitch
On
Off
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received
through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer
language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.
PS SmartSwitch
On
Off
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received
through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer
language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
NPA Mode
Auto
On
Off
Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting. Auto sets the printer to examine data,
determine the format, and then processes it appropriately.
•When set to On, the printer performs NPA processing. If the data is not in NPA
format, it is rejected as bad data.
•When set to Off, the printer does not perform NPA processing.
•Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Understanding printer menus 164
Menu item Description
Serial Buffer
Auto
3KB to [maximum size allowed]
Disabled
Sets the size of the serial input buffer
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•Disabled turns off job buffering. Any jobs already buffered on the disk are
printed before normal processing is resumed.
•The serial buffer size setting can be changed in 1‑KB increments.
•The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or
Off.
•To increase the maximum size range for the Serial Buffer, disable or reduce
the size of the parallel, serial, and network buffers.
•Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Job Buffering
Off
On
Auto
Temporarily stores print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting. The printer does not buffer print jobs on the
printer hard disk.
•On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk.
•Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another
input port.
•Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Protocol
DTR
DTR/DSR
XON/XOFF
XON/XOFF/DTR
XONXOFF/DTRDSR
Selects the hardware and software handshaking settings for the serial port
Notes:
•DTR is the factory default setting.
•DTR/DSR is a hardware handshaking setting.
•XON/XOFF is a software handshaking setting.
•XON/XOFF/DTR and XON/XOFF/DTR/DSR are combined hardware and
software handshaking settings.
Robust XON
Off
On
Determines whether the printer communicates availability to the computer
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•This menu item applies only to the serial port if Serial Protocol is set to
XON/XOFF.
Understanding printer menus 165
Menu item Description
Baud
9600
19200
38400
57600
115200
138200
172800
230400
345600
1200
2400
4800
Specifies the rate at which data can be received through the serial port
Notes:
•9600 is the factory default setting.
•138200, 172800, 230400, and 345600 baud rates are only displayed in the
Standard Serial menu. These settings do not appear in the Serial Option 1,
Serial Option 2, or Serial Option 3 menus.
Data Bits
8
7
Specifies the number of data bits sent in each transmission frame
Note: 8 is the factory default setting.
Parity
None
Ignore
Even
Odd
Sets the parity for serial input and output data frames
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Honor DSR
Off
On
Determines whether the printer uses the DSR Signal
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•DSR is a handshaking signal used by most serial cables. The serial port uses
DSR to distinguish data sent by the computer from data created by electrical
noise in the serial cable. The electrical noise can cause stray characters to
print. Set this to On to prevent stray characters from printing.
SMTP Setup menu
Menu item Description
Primary SMTP Gateway Specifies SMTP server gateway and port information
Note: 25 is the default SMTP gateway port.
Primary SMTP Gateway Port
Secondary SMTP Gateway
Secondary SMTP Gateway Port
SMTP Timeout
5–30
Specifies the amount of time in seconds before the server stops trying to
send an e‑mail
Note: 30 seconds is the factory default setting.
Reply Address Specifies a reply address of up to 128 characters in the e-mail sent by the
printer
Understanding printer menus 166
Menu item Description
Use SSL
Disabled
Negotiate
Required
Sets the printer to use SSL for increased security when connecting to the
SMTP server
Notes:
•Disabled is the factory default setting.
•When the Negotiate setting is used, the SMTP server determines if
SSL will be used.
SMTP Server Authentication
No authentication required
Login/Plain
CRAM‑MD5
Digest‑MD5
NTLM
Kerberos 5
Specifies the type of user authentication required for scan to e‑mail
privileges
Note: “No authentication required” is the factory default setting.
Device‑Initiated E‑mail
None
Use Device SMTP Credentials
Specifies what credentials will be used when communicating to the SMTP
server. Some SMTP servers require credentials to send an e-mail.
Notes:
•None is the factory default setting for Device and User‑Initiated
E‑mail.
•Device Userid and Device Password are used to log in to the SMTP
server when Use Device SMTP Credentials is selected.
User‑Initiated E‑mail
None
Use Device SMTP Credentials
Use Session User ID & Password
Use Session E‑mail address & Password
Prompt User
Device Userid
Device Password
Kerberos 5 Realm
NTLM Domain
Security menu
Editing Security Setups menu
Menu item Description
Edit Backup Password Creates a backup password
Note: This menu item will only appear if a backup password exists.
Edit Building Blocks Edits the Internal Accounts, NTLM, various Setups, Password, and PIN
Edit Security Templates Adds or edits a Security Template
Edit Access Controls Controls access to printer menus, firmware updates, held jobs, and other access
points
Understanding printer menus 167
Miscellaneous Security Settings menu
Menu item Description
Login Restrictions
Login failures
Failure time frame
Lockout time
Panel Login Timeout
Remote Login Timeout
Limits the number and time frames of failed login attempts from the printer control
panel before all users are locked out
Notes:
•“Login failures” specifies the number of failed login attempts before users are
locked out. Settings range from 1–10 attempts is the factory default setting.
•“Failure time frame” specifies the time frame during which failed login
attempts can be made before users are locked out. Settings range from 1–60
minutes. 5 minutes is the factory default setting.
•“Lockout time” specifies how long users are locked out after exceeding the
login failures limit. Settings range from 1–60 minutes. 5 minutes is the factory
default setting. 1indicates the printer does not impose a lockout time.
•“Panel Login Timeout” specifies how long the printer remains idle on the
Home screen before automatically logging the user off. Settings range from 1–
900 seconds. 30 seconds is the factory default setting.
•“Remote Login Timeout” specifies how long a remote interface remains idle
before automatically logging the user off. Settings range from 1–120 seconds.
10 minutes is the factory default setting.
Security Reset Jumper
Access controls=”No Security”
No Effect
Reset factory security defaults
Changes the value of the security settings
Notes:
•Access controls=”No Security” retains all the security information that the user
has defined. “No Security" is the factory default setting.
•“No Effect” means the reset has no effect on the device’s security
configuration.
•“Reset factory security defaults” deletes all security information that the user
has defined, and assigns the factory default value to each setting in the
Miscellaneous Security Settings section of both the panel and the Web page.
LDAP Certificate Verification
Demand
Try
Allow
Never
Allows the user to request a server certificate
Notes:
•“Demand” means a server certificate is requested. If a bad certificate is
provided or if no certificate is provided, the session is terminated immediately.
“Demand” is the factory default setting.
•“Try” means a server certificate is requested. If no certificate is provided, the
session proceeds normally. If a bad certificate is provided, the session is
terminated immediately.
•“Allow” means a server certificate is requested. If no certificate is provided,
the session proceeds normally. If a bad certificate is provided, it will be
ignored and the session proceeds normally.
•“Never” means no server certificate is requested.
Minimum PIN Length
1–16
Limits the digit length of the PIN.
Note: 4 is the is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 168
Confidential Print menu
Menu item Description
Max Invalid PIN
Off
2–10
Limits the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered
Notes:
•This menu appears only if a formatted, non-defective printer hard disk is installed.
•Once the limit is reached, the print job for that user name and that PIN are deleted.
Confidential Job Expiration
Off
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Limits the amount of time a confidential print job stays in the printer before it is deleted
Notes:
•If the Job Expiration setting is changed while confidential print jobs reside on the
printer RAM or printer hard disk, then the expiration time for those print jobs does not
change to the new default value.
•If the printer is turned off, then all confidential jobs held in printer RAM are deleted.
Repeat Job Expiration
Off
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Sets a time limit on how long the printer stores print jobs
Verify Job Expiration
Off
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Sets a time limit on how long the printer stores print jobs needing verification
Reserve Job Expiration
Off
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Sets a time limit on how long the printer stores print jobs for printing at a later time
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Disk Wiping menu
Disk Wiping erases only print job data on the printer hard disk that are not currently in use by the file system. All
permanent data on the printer hard disk are preserved, such as downloaded fonts, macros, and held jobs.
Note: This menu appears only when a formatted, non-defective printer hard disk is installed.
Understanding printer menus 169
Menu item Description
Wiping Mode
Auto
Manual
Off
Specifies the mode for disk wiping
Note: Auto is the factory default setting. The printer determines when to initiate a
disk wipe.
Scheduled Wiping
Time
Day
Sets the schedule for disk wiping
Notes:
•Time is used to set the time for scheduled wiping.
•Day is used to set the specific day or period for scheduled wiping. Values are
Sunday to Friday, Everyday, Weekdays, and Weekends.
•Scheduled wipes are initiated without displaying a user warning or
confirmation message.
•Both manual and scheduled wiping allow the file system to reuse marked disk
space without first having to wipe it.
Manual Wiping
Do not start now
Start now
Overwrites all disk space that has been used to hold data from a print job that has
been processed (printed). This type of wipe does not erase any information related
to an unprocessed print job.
Notes:
•“Do not start now “is the factory default setting.
•If the Disk Wiping access control is activated, then a user must successfully
authenticate and have the required authorization in order to initiate the disk
wipe.
Automatic Method
Single pass
Multiple pass
Marks all disk space used by a previous print job and does not permit the file system
to reuse this space until it has been cleared
Notes:
•“Single pass” is the factory default setting.
•Only automatic wiping enables users to activate disk wiping without having to
turn the printer off for an extended amount of time.
•Highly confidential information should be wiped using only the Multiple pass
method.
Manual Method
Single pass
Multiple pass
Allows the file system to reuse marked disk space without having to wipe it first
Notes:
•“Single pass” is the factory default setting.
•Highly confidential information should be wiped using the Multiple pass
method only.
Scheduled Method
Single pass
Multiple pass
Allows the file system to reuse marked disk space without having to wipe it first
Note: “Single pass” is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 170
Security Audit Log menu
Menu item Description
Export Log Enables an authorized user to export the security log
Notes:
•To export the log from the printer control panel, a flash drive must be
attached to the printer.
•From the Embedded Web Server, the log can be downloaded to a computer.
Delete Log
Yes
No
Specifies whether audit logs are deleted
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Configure Log
Enable Audit
Enable Remote Syslog
Remote Syslog Server
Remote Syslog Port
Remote Syslog Method
Remote Syslog Facility
Log full behavior
Admin’s e-mail address
Digitally sign exports
Severity of events to log
Remote Syslog non-logged
events
E-mail log cleared alert
E-mail log wrapped alert
E-mail % full alert
% full alert level
E-mail log exported alert
E-mail log settings changed alert
Log line endings
Specifies whether and how the audit logs are created
Note: Factory default settings enable the security audit log.
Set Date and Time menu
Menu item Description
Current Date and Time Lets you view the current date and time settings for the printer
Manually Set Date and Time Note: Date/Time is set in YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS format.
Time Zone Note: GMT is the factory default setting.
Automatically Observe DST
On
Off
Note: On is the factory default setting and uses the applicable Daylight Saving Time
associated with the Time Zone setting.
Understanding printer menus 171
Menu item Description
Custom Time Zone Setup
DST Start Week
DST Start DayOff
DST Start Month
DST Start Time
DST End Week
DST End Day
DST End Month
DST End Time
DST Offset
Enables the user to set up the time zone
Enable NTP
On
Off
Enables Network Time Protocol, which synchronizes the clocks of devices on a
network
Note: On is the factory default setting.
NTP Server Lets you view the NTP Server Address
Enable Authentication
Off
On
Lets you change the authentication setting to on or off
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 172
Settings menu
General Settings menu
Menu item Description
Display Language
English
Francais
Deutsch
Italiano
Espanol
Greek
Dansk
Norsk
Nederlands
Svenska
Portuguese
Suomi
Russian
Polski
Magyar
Turkce
Cesky
Simplified Chinese
Traditional Chinese
Korean
Japanese
Sets the language of the text appearing on the display
Note: All languages may not be available for all printers.
Eco-Mode
Off
Energy
Energy/Paper
Paper
Minimizes the use of energy, paper, or specialty media
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting. Off resets the printer to its
factory default settings.
•The Energy setting minimizes the power used by the printer.
Performance may be affected, but print quality is not.
•Energy/Paper minimizes the use of power and of paper and
specialty media.
•Paper minimizes the amount of paper and specialty media
needed for a print job. Performance may be affected, but
print quality is not.
ADF Loaded Beep
Enabled
Disabled
Specifies whether or not the ADF sounds a beep when paper is
loaded
Note: Disabled is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 173
Menu item Description
Quiet Mode
Off
On
Reduces the amount of noise produced by the printer
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting. This setting supports the
performance specifications for your printer.
•“On” configures the printer to produce as little noise as
possible. This setting is best suited for printing text and line
art.
•For optimal printing of color‑rich documents, set Quiet Mode
to Off.
•Selecting Photo from the printer driver may disable Quiet
Mode and provide better print quality and full speed
printing.
Run Initial setup
Yes
No
Instructs the printer to run the setup wizard
Notes:
•Yes is the factory default setting.
•After completing the setup wizard by selecting Done at the
Country select screen, the default becomes No.
Understanding printer menus 174
Menu item Description
Keyboard
Keyboard Type
English
Francais
Francais Canadien
Deutsch
Italiano
Espanol
Greek
Dansk
Norsk
Nederlands
Svenska
Suomi
Portuguese
Russian
Polski
Swiss German
Swiss French
Turkce
Korean
Custom Key [x]
Accents/Symbols Tab
On
Off
Russian/Polish Tab
On
Off
Korean Tab
On
Off
Specifies a language and custom key information for the printer
control panel keyboard. The additional tabs enable access to accent
marks and symbols from the printer control panel keyboard.
Paper Sizes
US
Metric
Specifies the default paper measurement
Notes:
•Initial setting is determined by your country or region
selection in the initial setup wizard.
•Changing this setting also changes the default for each input
source in the Paper Size/Paper Type menu.
Scan to PC Port Range
[port range]
Specifies a valid port range for printers behind a port blocking
firewall. The valid ports are specified by two sets of numbers
separated by a semicolon.
Note: 9751:12000 is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 175
Menu item Description
Displayed Information
Left side
Right side
Custom Text [x]
[text entry]
[x] Cartridge
[x] Photoconductor
Fuser
Transfer Module
Specifies what is displayed on the upper left and right corners of
the home screen
For the Left side and Right side menus, choose from the following
options:
None
IP Address
Hostname
Contact Name
Location
Date/Time
mDNS/DDNS Service Name
Zero Configuration Name
Cartridge Level
Custom Text [x]
For [x] Cartridge, [x] Photoconductor, Fuser, and Transfer Module,
choose from the following options:
When to display
Do not display
Display
Message to Display
Default
Alternate
Default
[text entry]
Alternate
[text entry]
Notes:
•IP Address is the factory default setting for Left side.
•Date/Time is the factory default setting for Right side.
•Off is the factory default setting for Display When Supply
Registers.
•Default is the factory default setting for Type of Message to
Display.
Understanding printer menus 176
Menu item Description
Displayed Information (continued)
Waste Toner Bottle
Paper Jam
Load Paper
Service Errors
Specifies what is displayed for Paper Jam, Load Paper, and Service
Errors. Available options for each button are:
Activate
Yes
No
Type of Message to Display
Default
Alternate
Default Message
[text entry]
Alternate Message
[text entry]
Notes:
•No is the factory default setting for Activate.
•Default is the factory default setting for Type of Message to
Display.
Home screen customization
Change Language
Copy
Copy Shortcuts
Fax
Fax Shortcuts
E‑mail
E‑mail Shortcuts
FTP
FTP Shortcuts
Search Held Jobs
Held Jobs
USB Drive
Profiles and Solutions
Bookmarks
Jobs by user
Forms and Favorites
Lets you add or remove icons and buttons that appear on the home
screen
Available selections for each button are:
Display
Do Not Display
Date Format
MM‑DD‑YYYY
DD‑MM‑YYYY
YYYY‑MM‑DD
Formats the printer date
Time Format
12 hour A.M./P.M.
24 hour clock
Formats the printer time
Screen Brightness
20–100
Specifies the brightness of the printer control panel screen
Understanding printer menus 177
Menu item Description
One Page Copy
On
Off
Sets copies from the scanner glass to only one page at a time
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Output Lighting
Standard Bin LED
Normal/Standby Mode
Bright
Dim
Off
Power Saver
Bright
Dim
Off
Output Option Bin LEDs
Normal/Standby Mode
Bright
Dim
Off
Power Saver
Bright
Dim
Off
Sets the amount of light from the standard bin or an optional exit
bin
Notes:
•In Normal/Standby Mode, the factory default setting is
Bright.
•In Power Saver Mode, the factory default is Dim.
Audio Feedback
Button Feedback
On
Off
Volume
1–10
Sets the audio volume for the buttons
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting for Button Feedback.
•5 is the factory default setting for Volume.
Tactile Touchscreen Feedback
On
Off
Provides touch screen sensation feedback
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Show Bookmarks
On
Off
Specifies whether bookmarks are displayed from the Held Jobs area
Note: On is the factory default setting. When On is selected,
bookmarks appear in the Held Jobs area.
Allow Background Removal
On
Off
Specifies whether image background removal is allowed in copy,
fax, e‑mail, FTP, or scan‑to‑USB jobs
Note: On is the factory default setting. The background of the
image will be removed.
Allow Custom Job Scans
On
Off
Lets you scan multiple jobs to one file
Note: On is the factory default setting. If On is selected, the Allow
Custom Job Scans setting can be enabled for specific jobs.
Understanding printer menus 178
Menu item Description
Scanner Jam Recovery
Job level
Page level
Specifies how a scanned job should be reloaded if a paper jam
occurs in the ADF
Notes:
•Job level is the factory default setting.
•If Job level is selected, then the entire job must be rescanned
if any pages jam.
•If Page level is selected, then rescan from the jammed page
forward.
Web Page Refresh Rate
30–300
Specifies the number of seconds between Embedded Web Server
refreshes
Note: 120 seconds is the factory default setting.
Contact Name Specifies a contact name for the printer
Note: The contact name will be stored on the Embedded Web
Server.
Location Specifies the location of the printer
Note: The location will be stored on the Embedded Web Server.
Alarms
Alarm Control
Cartridge Alarm
Staple Alarm
Hole Punch Alarm
Sets an alarm to sound when the printer requires operator
intervention
Available selections for each alarm type are:
Off
Single
Continuous
Notes:
•Single is the factory default setting for Alarm Control. Single
sounds three quick beeps.
•Off is the factory default setting for Cartridge Alarm. Off
means no alarm will sound.
•Continuous repeats three beeps every 10 seconds.
Timeouts
Standby Mode
Disabled
1–240
Specifies the number of minutes of inactivity before the printer
enters a lower power state
Note: 15 minutes is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 179
Menu item Description
Timeouts
Sleep Mode
2–240
Sets the amount of time the printer waits after a job is printed
before it goes into a reduced power state
Notes:
•30 minutes is the factory default setting.
•Lower settings conserve more energy, but may require
longer warm‑up times.
•Select the lowest setting if the printer shares an electrical
circuit with room lighting or you notice lights flickering in the
room.
•Select a high setting if the printer is in constant use. Under
most circumstances, this keeps the printer ready to print
with minimum warm‑up time.
Timeouts
Screen Timeout
15–300
Sets the amount of time in seconds the printer waits before
returning the printer display to a Ready state
Note: 30 seconds is the factory default setting.
Timeouts
Print Timeout
Disabled
1–255
Sets the amount of time in seconds the printer waits to receive an
end‑of‑job message before canceling the remainder of the print job
Notes:
•90 seconds is the factory default setting.
•When the timer expires, any partially printed page still in the
printer is printed, and then the printer checks to see if any
new print jobs are waiting.
•Print Timeout is available only when using PCL emulation.
This setting has no effect on PostScript emulation print jobs.
Timeouts
Wait Timeout
Disabled
15–65535
Sets the amount of time in seconds the printer waits for additional
data before canceling a print job
Notes:
•40 seconds is the factory default setting.
•Wait Timeout is available only when the printer is using
PostScript emulation. This setting has no effect on PCL
emulation print jobs.
Timeouts
Job Hold Timeout
5–255
Sets the amount of time the printer waits for user intervention
before it holds jobs that require unavailable resources and
continues to print other jobs in the print queue
Notes:
•30 seconds is the factory default setting.
•This menu appears only when a printer hard disk is installed.
Print Recovery
Disabled
Auto Continue
5–255
Lets the printer automatically continue printing from certain offline
situations when not resolved within the specified time period
Note: Disabled is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 180
Menu item Description
Print Recovery
Jam Recovery
Auto
On
Off
Specifies whether the printer reprints jammed pages
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting. The printer reprints
jammed pages unless the memory required to hold the
pages is needed for other printer tasks.
•On sets the printer to always reprint jammed pages.
•Off sets the printer to never reprint jammed pages.
Print Recovery
Page Protect
Off
On
Lets the printer successfully print a page that may not have printed
otherwise
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting. Off prints a partial page
when there is not enough memory to print the whole page.
•On sets the printer to process the whole page so that the
entire page prints.
Press Sleep Button
Sleep
Hibernate
Do Nothing
Determines how the printer responds when pressing the Sleep
button when the printer is idle
Notes:
•Sleep is the factory default setting.
•Sleep or Hibernate sets the printer to operate at a lower
power configuration.
•If the printer is in Sleep Mode, then the touch screen
appears off and the Sleep button turns amber in color.
•Touch anywhere on the touch screen or press a button on
the printer control panel to exit Sleep Mode.
•If the printer is in Hibernate mode, then the touch screen is
completely off and the Sleep button turns amber in color and
is blinking.
Press and Hold Sleep Button
Do Nothing
Sleep
Hibernate
Determines how the printer responds when pressing the Sleep
button when the printer is idle
Notes:
•Do Nothing is the factory default setting.
•Sleep or Hibernate sets the printer to operate at a lower
power configuration.
•If the printer is in Sleep Mode, then the touch screen
appears off and the Sleep button turns amber in color.
•Press and hold the Sleep button for 3 seconds or longer to
enter Hibernate mode.
•Touch anywhere on the touch screen or press a button on
the printer control panel to exit Sleep Mode.
Understanding printer menus 181
Menu item Description
Factory Defaults
Do Not Restore
Restore Now
Returns the printer settings to the factory default settings
Notes:
•Do Not Restore is the factory default setting. Do Not Restore
keeps the user‑defined settings.
•Restore Now returns all printer settings to the factory
default settings except Network/Ports menu settings. All
downloads stored in RAM are deleted. Downloads stored in
flash memory or on a printer hard disk are not affected.
Copy Settings menu
Menu item Description
Content Type
Text/Photo
Text
Graphics
Photo
Specifies the content of the original document
Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Content Source
Color Laser
Inkjet
Magazine
Press
Black/White Laser
Photo/Film
Newspaper
Other
Specifies how the original document was produced
Note: Color Laser is the factory default setting.
Color
On
Off
Specifies whether or not copies are printed in color
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Allow color copies
On
Off
Lets you enable or disable color in copying
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•Setting this to Off will hide all color‑specific menus.
•This setting overrides the Color setting.
Understanding printer menus 182
Menu item Description
Sides (Duplex)
1 sided to 1 sided
1 sided to 2 sided
2 sided to 1 sided
2 sided to 2 sided
Specifies whether an original document is duplex (two‑sided) or simplex (one-sided),
and then specifies whether the copy should be duplex or simplex
Notes:
•1 sided to 1 sided—The original document has print on one side and the copy
will also have print on one side.
•1 sided to 2 sided—The original document has print on one side, while the
copy will have print on both sides.
•2 sided to 1 sided—The original document has print on both sides, while the
copy will have print on just one side.
•2 sided to 2 sided—The original document has print on both sides, and the
copy will also have print on both sides.
Paper Saver
Off
2 on 1 Portrait
2 on 1 Landscape
4 on 1 Portrait
4 on 1 Landscape
Allows copying two or four sheets of a document on one page
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Print Page Borders
Off
On
Specifies whether or not a border is printed
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Collate
On [1,2,1,2,1,2]
Off [1,1,1,2,2,2]
Keeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Punch
Off
2 holes
3 holes
4 holes
Specifies the type of hole punch finishing to be used in a print or copy job
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Staple
Off
Auto
Back
Dual
Dual Double
Front
Lets you enable or disable the staple finisher
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•This menu only appears when a staple finisher is installed.
Understanding printer menus 183
Menu item Description
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Tabloid
Folio
Statement
Universal
4 x 6 in.
3 x 5 in.
Business Card
ID Card
Custom Scan Size [x]
A3
A4
A5
Oficio (Mexico)
A6
JIS B4
JIS B5
Book Original
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
Specifies the paper size of the original document
Notes:
•Letter is the US factory default setting.
•A4 is the international factory default setting.
Copy To Source
Tray [x]
Auto Size Match
Manual Feeder
Specifies the paper source for copy jobs
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Transparency Separators
On
Off
Places a sheet of paper between transparencies
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Separator Sheets
Off
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages
Places a sheet of paper between pages, copies, or jobs
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Separator Sheet Source
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder
Specifies the separator sheet source
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Darkness
1–9
Specifies the level of darkness for the copy job
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 184
Menu item Description
Output Bin
Standard Bin
Bin [x]
Specifies the exit bin to be used for the copy job
Notes:
•Standard Bin is the factory default setting.
•Bin [x] only appears when at least one optional exit bin is installed.
Number of Copies
1–999
Specifies the number of copies for the copy job
Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Header/Footer
[Location]
Off
Date/Time
Page number
Custom text
Print on
All pages
First page only
All but first page
Custom text
Specifies header/footer information and its location on the page
For the location, choose from the following options:
•Top left
•Top middle
•Top right
•Bottom left
•Bottom middle
•Bottom right
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting for the location.
•“All pages” is the factory default setting for “Print on.”
Overlay
Off
Confidential
Copy
Draft
Urgent
Custom
Specifies the overlay text printed on each page of the copy job
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Custom Overlay Specifies the custom overlay text
Note: A maximum of 64 characters is allowed.
Allow priority copies
On
Off
Allows interruption of a print job to copy a page or document
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Custom Job scanning
Off
On
Lets you copy, in a single copy job, a document that contains mixed paper sizes
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•This menu appears only when a valid printer hard drive is installed.
Allow Save as Shortcut
On
Off
Lets you save custom copy settings as shortcuts
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Background Removal
‑4 to 4
Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 185
Menu item Description
Auto Center
Off
On
Lets you automatically center the content on the page
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Color Balance
Cyan - Red
Magenta - Green
Yellow - Blue
Enables an equal balance of colors in the output
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Specifies which color to drop during copies, and how much to increase or decrease
the dropout
Notes:
•None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
•128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Contrast
Best for content
0–5
Specifies the contrast used for the copy job
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Mirror Image
Off
On
Creates a mirror image of the original document
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Negative Image
Off
On
Creates a negative image of the original document
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4
Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a copy
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Scan edge to edge
Off
On
Specifies if the original document is scanned edge-to‑edge
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Sharpness
1–5
Adjusts the amount of sharpness of a copy
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Temperature
‑4 to 4
Enables the user to specify “warm” or “cool” outputs. "Cool” values generate a bluer
output than the default, while “warm” values generate a redder output than the
default.
Sample Copy
Off
On
Creates a sample copy of the original document
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 186
Fax Settings menu
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup) menu
Analog Fax Setup mode sends the fax job by way of a telephone line.
Menu item Description
Fax Name or Station Name Specifies the name of the fax in the printer
Fax Number or Station Number Specifies the number assigned to the fax
Station ID
Fax Name or Station Name
Fax Number or Station Number
Specifies how the fax is identified
Enable Manual Fax
Off
On
Sets the printer to fax manually only, which requires a line splitter and a telephone
handset
Notes:
•Use a regular telephone to answer an incoming fax job and to dial a fax
number.
•Touch # 0 on the numeric keypad to go directly to the Manual Fax function.
Memory Use
Equal
Mostly sent
All send
All receive
Mostly receive
Defines the allocation of non-volatile memory between sending and receiving fax jobs
Notes:
•Equal is the factory default setting. Equal splits the memory for sending and
receiving fax jobs into equal amounts.
•Mostly sent specifies that most of the memory is set to send fax jobs.
•All send specifies that all the memory is set to send fax jobs.
•All receive specifies that all the memory is set to receive fax jobs.
•Mostly receive specifies that most of the memory is set to receive fax jobs.
Cancel Faxes
Allow
Don't Allow
Specifies whether or not the printer cancels fax jobs
Caller ID
On
Off
Alternate
Specifies the type of caller ID being used
Fax number masking
Off
From left
From right
Specifies the direction from where digits are masked in an outgoing fax number
Note: The number of characters masked is determined by the “Digits to mask”
setting.
Digits to mask
0–58
Specifies the number of digits to mask in an outgoing fax number
Understanding printer menus 187
Menu item Description
Fax Cover Page
Fax Cover Page
Off by default
On by default
Never use
Always use
Include to field
On
Off
Include from field
Off
On
From
Include Message field
Off
On
Message
Include Logo
Off
On
Include Footer [x]
Footer [x]
Configures the fax cover page
Note: “Off by default” is the factory default setting for all Fax Cover Page options.
Menu item Description
Resolution
Standard
Fine 200 dpi
Super Fine 300 dpi
Ultra Fine 600 dpi
Specifies quality in dots per inch (dpi). A higher resolution gives greater print quality,
but increases the fax transmission time for outgoing faxes.
Note: Standard is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 188
Menu item Description
Original Size
Mixed Sizes
Letter
Legal
Executive
Tabloid
Folio
Statement
Universal
4 x 6 in.
3 x 5 in.
Business Card
Custom Scan Size [x]
A3
A4
A5
Oficio (Mexico)
A6
JIS B4
JIS B5
Book Original
Auto Size Sense
Specifies the paper size of the original document
Note: Mixed Sizes is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
Sides (Duplex)
Off
Long edge
Short edge
Specifies how text and graphics are oriented on a page
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for
portrait and top edge for landscape).
•Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait and left edge for landscape).
Content Type
Text
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo
Specifies the content of the original document
Note: Text is the factory default setting.
Content Source
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Black and White Laser
Specifies how the original document was produced
Note: Color Laser is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 189
Menu item Description
Darkness
1–9
Lightens or darkens the output
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Dial Prefix Lets you enter a dialing prefix, such as 99. A numeric entry field is provided.
Dialing Prefix Rules
Prefix Rule [x]
Establishes a dialing prefix rule
Automatic Redial
0–9
Specifies the number of times the printer tries to send the fax to a specified number
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Redial Frequency
1–200
Specifies the number of minutes between redials
Behind a PABX
No
Yes
Enables or disables switchboard blind dialing without a dial tone
Enable ECM
Yes
No
Enables or disables Error Correction Mode for fax jobs
Enable Fax Scans
On
Off
Lets you fax files that are scanned at the printer
Driver to fax
Yes
No
Allows the printer driver to send fax jobs
Allow Save as Shortcut
On
Off
Lets you save fax numbers as shortcuts in the printer
Dial Mode
Tone
Pulse
Specifies the dialing sound, either as a tone or a pulse
Max Speed
2400
4800
9600
14400
33600
Specifies the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are sent
Custom Job scanning
Off
On
Lets you scan a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single file
Scan Preview
Off
On
Specifies whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs
Understanding printer menus 190
Menu item Description
Background Removal
‑4 to 4
Adjusts the amount of background visible on a scanned image
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Color Balance
Cyan - Red
Magenta - Green
Yellow - Blue
Enables an equal balance of colors in the scanned image
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Specifies which color to drop, and how much to increase or decrease the dropout
Notes:
•None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
•128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Contrast
Best for content
0–5
Specifies the contrast in the scanned image
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Mirror Image
Off
On
Creates a mirror image of the original document
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Negative Image
Off
On
Creates a negative image of the original document
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4
Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Scan edge to edge
Off
On
Specifies if the original document is scanned edge-to‑edge prior to faxing
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Sharpness
0–5
Adjusts the sharpness of a fax
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Temperature
‑4 to 4
Enables the user to specify “warm” or “cool” outputs. "Cool” values generate a bluer
output than the default while “warm” values generate a redder output than the
default.
Enable Color Fax Scans
Off by default
On by default
Never use
Always use
Enables color faxing
Note: “Off by default” is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 191
Menu item Description
Auto Convert Color Faxes to Mono
Faxes
On
Off
Converts all outgoing faxes to black and white
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Menu item Description
Enable Fax Receive
On
Off
Allows fax jobs to be received by the printer
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Fax Job Waiting
None
Toner
Toner and Supplies
Removes fax jobs that request specific unavailable resources from the print queue
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Rings to Answer
1–25
Specifies the number of rings before answering an incoming fax job
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Auto Reduction
On
Off
Scales an incoming fax job so that it fits the size of the paper loaded in the designated
fax source
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Paper Source
Auto
Tray [x]
Multi‑Purpose Feeder
Specifies the paper source selected to supply paper for the printer to print an incoming
fax
Sides (Duplex)
Off
On
Enables duplex printing (two-sided printing) for incoming fax jobs
Separator Sheets
Off
Before Job
After Job
Enables the printer to include separator sheets for incoming fax jobs
Separator Sheet Source
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder
Specifies where the printer will pick the separator sheet
Output Bin
Standard Bin
Bin [x]
Specifies an exit bin for received faxes
Note: Bin 1 is available only when the finisher is installed.
Fax Footer
Off
On
Prints the transmission information at the bottom of each page from a received fax
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 192
Menu item Description
Max Speed
2400
4800
9600
14400
33600
Specifies the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are received
Fax Forwarding
Print
Print and Forward
Forward
Enables forwarding of received faxes to another recipient
Forward to
Fax
E‑mail
FTP
LDSS
eSF
Specifies the type of recipient to which faxes will be forwarded
Note: This menu is available only from the printer Embedded Web Server.
Forward to Shortcut Lets you enter the shortcut number which matches the recipient type (Fax, E-mail,
FTP, LDSS, or eSF)
Block No Name Fax
Off
On
Enables blocking of incoming faxes sent from devices with no station ID specified
Banned Fax List Enables the list of banned fax numbers stored in the printer
Holding Faxes
Held Fax Mode
Off
Always On
Manual
Scheduled
Fax Holding Schedule
Enables fax holding all of the time or according to set schedule
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Punch
Off
On
Specifies whether prints are punched
Staple
Off
1 staple
2 staples
4 staples
Specifies whether prints are stapled
Enable Color Fax Receive
On
Off
Enables the device to receive fax in color
Understanding printer menus 193
Menu item Description
Transmission Log
Print log
Do not print log
Print only for error
Enables printing of a transmission log after each fax job
Receive Error Log
Print Never
Print on Error
Enables printing of a receive error log following a receive error
Auto Print Logs
On
Off
Enables automatic printing of fax logs
Note: Logs print after every 200 fax jobs.
Log Paper Source
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder
Specifies the source of the paper used for printing logs
Logs Display
Remote Fax Name or Remote
Station Name
Dialed Number
Specifies whether printed logs display the dialed number or the station name returned
Enable Job Log
On
Off
Enables access to the Fax Job log
Enable Call Log
On
Off
Enables access to the Fax Call log
Log Output Bin
Standard Bin
Bin [x]
Specifies the exit bin where fax logs are printed
Menu item Description
Speaker Mode
On until Connected
Always On
Always Off
Specifies the mode of the speaker.
Notes:
•“On until Connected” is the factory default setting. A sound is issued until the
fax connection is made.
•Always On turns the speaker on.
•Always Off turns the speaker off.
Speaker Volume
High
Low
Controls the volume setting
Note: High is the factory default setting.
Ringer Volume
On
Off
Controls the fax speaker ringer volume
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 194
Menu item Description
All Rings
Single Ring Only
Double Ring Only
Triple Ring Only
Single or Double Rings Only
Single or Triple Rings Only
Double or Triple Rings Only
Specifies ring patterns when device is answering calls
Note: All Rings is the factory default setting.
Fax Mode (Fax Server Setup) menu
Fax Server mode sends the fax job to a fax server for transmission.
Menu item Description
To Format Lets you enter the information using the virtual keyboard on the printer touch screen
Reply Address
Subject
Message
SMTP Setup Specifies SMTP setup information
Primary SMTP Gateway Specifies SMTP server port information
Secondary SMTP Gateway
Image Format
PDF (.pdf)
XPS (.xps)
TIFF (.tif)
Specifies the image type for scan to fax
Content Type
Text
Text/Photo
Graphics
Photo
Specifies the content of the original document
Note: Text is the factory default setting.
Content Source
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Specifies how the original document was produced
Note: Color Laser is the factory default setting.
Fax Resolution
Standard
Fine 200 dpi
Super Fine 300 dpi
Ultra Fine 600 dpi
Specifies the resolution level for scan to fax
Understanding printer menus 195
Menu item Description
Darkness
1–9
Lightens or darkens the output
Note: 5 factory default setting.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Specifies the orientation of the scanned image
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Tabloid
Folio
Statement
Universal
4 x 6 in.
3 x 5 in.
Business Card
Custom Scan Size [x]
A3
A4
A5
Oficio (Mexico)
JIS B4
JIS B5
Book Original
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scanned
Note: Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default
setting.
Use Multi‑Page TIFF
On
Off
Provides a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files. For a
multiple-page scan to fax job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages,
or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Enable Analog Receive
Off
On
Enables analog fax receive
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 196
E‑mail Settings menu
Menu item Description
E‑mail Server Setup
Subject
Message
Base file name
Specifies e‑mail server information
Notes:
•The subject box has a limitation of 255 characters.
•The message box has a limitation of 512 characters.
E‑mail Server Setup
Send me a copy
Never appears
On by default
Off by default
Always On
Sends a copy of the e-mail back to the sender
Note: “Never appears” is the factory default setting.
E‑mail Server Setup
Max E‑mail size
0–65535 KB
Specifies the maximum e-mail size in kilobytes
Note: E-mails above the specified size are not sent.
E‑mail Server Setup
Size error message
Sends a message when an e-mail is greater than the configured size limit
E‑mail Server Setup
Limit destinations
Specifies a domain name, such as a company domain name, and then limits e‑mail
destinations to that domain name only
Notes:
•E-mail can be sent only to the specified domain.
•The limit is one domain.
E‑mail Server Setup
Web Link Setup
Server
Login
Password
Path
Base file name
Web Link
Defines the e‑mail server path name; for example: /directory/path
Note: The characters * : ? < > | are invalid entries for a path name.
Format
PDF (.pdf)
Secure PDF
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)
Specifies the format of the scanned file
Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.
PDF Version
1.2–1.6
A–1a
Sets the version of the PDF file that will be scanned for e‑mailing
Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 197
Menu item Description
Content Type
Text/Photo
Photo
Text
Graphics
Specifies the content of the original document
Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Content Source
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Black and White Laser
Specifies how the original document was produced
Note: Color Laser is the factory default setting.
Color
On
Off
Specifies whether or not copies are printed in color
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Resolution
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi
75 dpi
Specifies the resolution of the scan in dots per inch
Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.
Darkness
1–9
Lightens or darkens the output
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Specifies the orientation of the scanned image
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 198
Menu item Description
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Tabloid
Folio
Statement
Universal
4 x 6 in.
3 x 5 in.
Business Card
Custom Scan Size [x]
A3
A4
A5
Oficio (Mexico)
A6
JIS B4
JIS B5
Book Original
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
Specifies the paper size of the document being scanned
Notes:
•A4 is the international factory default setting.
•Letter is the US factory default setting.
Sides (Duplex)
Off
Long edge
Short edge
Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on the page
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for
portrait and top edge for landscape ).
•Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait and left edge for landscape ).
JPEG Quality
Best for content
5–90
Sets the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality of the image
Notes:
•“Best for content” is the factory default setting.
•5 reduces the file size and quality of the image.
•90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.
•This menu applies to all scan functions.
Text Default
5–90
Sets the quality of a text image in relation to file size and quality of the image
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Text/Photo Default
5–90
Sets the quality of a text or photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the
image
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Photo Default
5–90
Sets the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image
Note: 50 is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 199
Menu item Description
E‑mail images sent as
Attachment
Web Link
Specifies how the images will be sent
Note: Attachment is the factory default setting.
Use Multi‑Page TIFF
On
Off
Provides a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files. For a
multiple-page scan‑to‑e-mail job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the
pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•This menu applies to all scan functions.
Transmission Log
Print log
Do not print log
Print only for error
Specifies whether or not the transmission log prints
Note: Print log is the factory default setting.
Log Paper Source
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder
Specifies the paper source for printing e-mail logs
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
E‑mail Bit Depth
8 bit
1 bit
Enables the Text/Photo mode to produce smaller file sizes by using 1‑bit images when
Color is set to Off
Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.
Custom Job scanning
Off
On
Lets you copy, in a single copy job, a document that contains mixed paper sizes
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Scan Preview
Off
On
Specifies whether or not a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Allow Save as Shortcut
On
Off
Lets you save e-mail addresses as shortcuts
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•When set to Off, the Save as Shortcut button does not appear on the e-mail
Destination screen.
Background Removal
‑4 to 4
Adjusts the amount of background visible on a scanned image
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Color Balance
Cyan - Red
Magenta - Green
Yellow - Blue
Enables an equal balance of colors in the output
Understanding printer menus 200
Menu item Description
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Specifies which color to drop during scanning, and how much to increase or decrease
the dropout
Notes:
•None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
•128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Contrast
Best for content
0–5
Specifies the contrast of the output
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Mirror Image
Off
On
Creates a mirror image of the original document
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Negative Image
Off
On
Creates a negative image of the original document
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4
Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Scan edge to edge
Off
On
Specifies whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Sharpness
1–5
Adjusts the amount of sharpness on a scanned image
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Temperature
‑4 to 4
Enables the user to specify “warm” or “cool” outputs. "Cool” values generate a bluer
output than the default while “warm” values generate a redder output than the
default.
Use cc:/bcc:
Off
On
Enables the use of the cc: and bcc: fields
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 201
FTP Settings menu
Menu item Description
Format
PDF (.pdf)
Secure PDF (.pdf)
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)
Specifies the format of the FTP file
Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.
PDF Version
1.2–1.6
A–1a
Sets the version level of the PDF file for FTP sending
Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.
Content Type
Text/Photo
Photo
Text
Graphics
Specifies the content of the original document
Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Content Source
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Black and White Laser
Specifies how the original document was produced
Note: Color Laser is the factory default setting.
Color
On
Off
Specifies whether or not copies are printed in color
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Resolution
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi
75 dpi
Specifies the quality of the scan in dots per inch
Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.
Darkness
1–9
Lightens or darkens the output
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Specifies the orientation of the scanned image
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 202
Menu item Description
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Tabloid
Folio
Statement
Universal
4 x 6 in.
3 x 5 in.
Business Card
Custom Scan Size [x]
A3
A4
A5
Oficio (Mexico)
A6
JIS B4
JIS B5
Book Original
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
Specifies the paper size of the original document
Notes:
•Letter is the US factory default setting.
•A4 is the international factory default setting.
Sides (Duplex)
Off
Long edge
Short edge
Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on the page
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for
portrait and top edge for landscape ).
•Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait and left edge for landscape ).
JPEG Quality
Best for content
5–90
Sets the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the
image
Notes:
•“Best for content” is the factory default setting.
•5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.
•90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.
•This menu applies to all scan functions.
Text Default
5–90
Sets the quality of the text in relation to file size and the quality of the image
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Text/Photo Default
5–90
Sets the quality of a text/photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the
image
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 203
Menu item Description
Photo Default
5–90
Sets the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image
Note: 50 is the factory default setting.
Use Multi‑Page TIFF
On
Off
Provides a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files. For a
multiple-page scan‑to‑FTP job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages,
or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•This menu applies to all scan functions.
Transmission Log
Print log
Do not print log
Print only for error
Specifies whether the transmission log prints
Note: “Print log” is the factory default setting.
Log Paper Source
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder
Specifies a paper source when printing FTP logs
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Log Output Bin
Standard Bin
Bin [x]
Specifies an exit bin for FTP logs
Notes:
•Standard Bin is the factory default setting.
•Bin [x] only appears when at least one optional exit bin is installed.
FTP bit Depth
8 bit
1 bit
Enables the Text/Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1‑bit images when
Color is set to Off
Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.
Base File Name Lets you enter a base file name
Note: The limitation is 53 characters.
Custom Job Scanning
Off
On
Lets you copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single scan job
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Scan Preview
Off
On
Specifies whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Allow Save as Shortcut
On
Off
Enables shortcut creation for FTP addresses
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Background Removal
‑4 to 4
Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Color Balance
Cyan - Red
Magenta - Green
Yellow - Blue
Enables an equal balance of colors in the output
Understanding printer menus 204
Menu item Description
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Specifies which color to drop during scanning, and how much to increase or decrease
the dropout
Notes:
•None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
•128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Specifies the contrast of the output
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Mirror Image
Off
On
Creates a mirror image of the original document
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Negative Image
Off
On
Creates a negative image of the original document
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4
Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Scan edge to edge
Off
On
Specifies whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Sharpness
1–5
Adjusts the amount of sharpness of a scanned image
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Temperature
‑4 to 4
Enables the user to specify “warm” or “cool” outputs. "Cool” values generate a bluer
output than the default while “warm” values generate a redder output than the
default.
Understanding printer menus 205
Flash Drive menu
Scan Settings
Menu item Description
Format
PDF (.pdf)
Secure PDF
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)
Specifies the format of the file to be sent through FTP
Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.
PDF Version
1.2–1.6
A‑1a
Sets the version of the PDF file to be sent through FTP
Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.
Content Type
Text/Photo
Photo
Text
Graphics
Specifies the content of the original document
Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Content Source
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Black and White Laser
Specifies how the original document is produced
Note: Color Laser is the factory default setting.
Color
On
Off
Specifies whether prints are in black‑and‑white or color
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Resolution
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi
75 dpi
Specifies the resolution of the scan in dots per inch (dpi)
Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.
Darkness
1–9
Lightens or darkens the output
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Specifies the orientation of the scanned image
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 206
Menu item Description
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Tabloid
Folio
Statement
Universal
4 x 6 in.
3 x 5 in.
Business Card
Custom Scan Size [x]
A3
A4
A5
Oficio (Mexico)
A6
JIS B4
JIS B5
Book Original
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
Specifies the paper size of the original document
Note: Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default
setting.
Sides (Duplex)
Off
Long edge
Short edge
Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on a page
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for
portrait and top edge for landscape).
•Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait and left edge for landscape).
JPEG Quality
Best for content
5–90
Sets the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality
Notes:
•“Best for content” is the factory default setting.
•5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.
•90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.
•This menu applies to all scan functions.
Text Default
5–90
Sets the quality of the text in relation to file size and the quality of the image
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Text/Photo Default
5–90
Sets the quality of a text/photo image in relation to file size and quality
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Photo Default
5–90
Sets the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and quality
Note: 50 is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 207
Menu item Description
Use Multi‑Page TIFF
On
Off
Provides a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files. For a
multiple-page scan to FTP job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages,
or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•This menu applies to all scan functions.
Scan Bit Depth
8 bit
1 bit
Enables the Text/Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1‑bit images when
Color is set to Off
Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.
File Name Lets you enter a base file name
Note: A maximum of 53 characters is allowed.
Custom Job Scanning
Off
On
Lets you copy a document containing mixed paper sizes in a single copy job
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Scan Preview
Off
On
Specifies whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobs
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Background Removal
‑4 to 4
Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Color Balance
Cyan - Red
Magenta - Green
Yellow - Blue
Enables an equal balance of colors in the scanned image
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Specifies which color to drop during scanning, and how much to increase or decrease
in the dropout
Notes:
•None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
•128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Contrast
Best for content
0–5
Specifies the contrast of the scanned image
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Mirror Image
Off
On
Creates a mirror image of the original document
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 208
Menu item Description
Negative Image
Off
On
Creates a negative image of the original document
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4
Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Scan edge to edge
Off
On
Specifies whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Sharpness
1–5
Adjusts the amount of sharpness on a scanned image
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Temperature
‑4 to 4
Enables the user to specify “warm” or “cool” outputs. "Cool” values generate a bluer
output than the default while “warm” values generate a redder output than the
default.
Print Settings
Copies
1–999
Specifies a default number of copies for each print job
Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Paper Source
Tray [x]
MP Feeder
Manual Paper
Manual Envelope
Sets a default paper source for all print jobs
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Color
Color
Black Only
Specifies whether copies are printed in color or black‑and‑white
Note: Color is the factory default setting.
Collate
On (1,2,1,2,1,2)
Off (1,1,1,2,2,2)
Stacks the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Sides (Duplex)
1 sided
2 sided
Specifies whether prints are on one side or on both sides of the page
Note: 1 sided is the factory default setting.
Staple
Off
Auto
Back
Dual
Dual Double
Front
Specifies whether prints are stapled
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•This menu appears only when a stapler is installed.
Understanding printer menus 209
Hole Punch
Off
On
Specifies whether prints have punched holes
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•This menu appears only when a puncher is installed.
Hole Punch Mode
2 holes
3 holes
4 holes
Determines the type of punch finishing performed on prints
Notes:
•“3 holes” is the factory default setting if 3‑hole puncher is installed.
•“4 holes” is the factory default setting if 2‑hole and 4‑hole puncher is installed.
•This menu appears only when a puncher is installed.
Duplex Binding
Long Edge
Short Edge
Defines the way duplexed pages are bound and how the printing on the back of the page is
oriented in relation to the printing on the front of the page
Notes:
•Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top
edge for landscape).
•Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait and
left edge for landscape).
Paper Saver Orientation
Auto
Landscape
Portrait
Specifies the orientation of a multiple‑page document
Note: Auto is the factory default setting. The printer chooses between portrait and landscape.
Paper Saver
Off
2‑Up
3‑Up
4‑Up
6‑Up
9‑Up
12‑Up
16‑Up
Specifies that multiple‑page images be printed on one side of a paper
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•The number selected is the number of page images that will print per side.
Paper Saver Border
None
Solid
Prints a border on each page image
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Paper Saver Ordering
Horizontal
Reverse Horizontal
Reverse Vertical
Vertical
Specifies the positioning of multiple‑page images
Notes:
•Horizontal is the factory default setting.
•Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they are in portrait or
landscape orientation.
Understanding printer menus 210
Separator Sheets
Off
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages
Specifies whether blank separator sheets are inserted
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if Collate is set to
On. If Collate is set to Off, then a blank page is inserted between each set of printed pages,
such as after all page 1's and after all page 2's.
•Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs.
•Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of the print job. This setting is
useful when printing transparencies or when inserting blank pages in a document .
Separator Sheet Source
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder
Specifies the paper source for separator sheets
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Blank Pages
Do Not Print
Print
Specifies whether blank pages are inserted in a print job
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
Print Settings
Setup menu
Menu item Description
Printer Language
PS Emulation
PCL Emulation
Sets the default printer language
Notes:
•PS Emulation is the factory default printer language.
•Setting a printer language as the default does not prevent a
software program from sending print jobs that use another
printer language.
Job Waiting
Off
On
Specifies that print jobs be removed from the print queue if they
require unavailable printer options or custom settings. They are
stored in a separate print queue, so other jobs print normally. When
the missing information and/or options are obtained, the stored
jobs print.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•This menu appears only when a non-read‑only printer hard
disk is installed. This requirement ensures that stored jobs
are not deleted if the printer loses power.
Understanding printer menus 211
Menu item Description
Print Area
Normal
Whole Page
Sets the logical and physical printable area
Notes:
•Normal is the factory default setting. When attempting to
print data in the non‑printable area defined by the Normal
setting, the printer clips the image at the boundary.
•Whole Page allows the image to be moved into the
non‑printable area defined by the Normal setting, but the
printer will clip the image at the Normal setting boundary.
Whole Page only affects pages printed using a PCL 5e
interpreter. This setting has no effect on pages printed using
the PCL XL or PostScript interpreter.
Printer Usage
Max Speed
Max Yield
Sets color toner use in printing
Notes:
•Max Speed is the default printer setting.
•The printer driver is capable of overriding this setting
Black Only Mode
Off
On
Sets the printer to print text and graphics using only the black print
cartridge
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Download Target
RAM
Flash
Disk
Sets the storage location for downloads
Notes:
•RAM is the factory default setting. Storing downloads in RAM
is temporary.
•Storing downloads in flash memory or on a printer hard disk
places them in permanent storage. Downloads remain in
flash memory or on the printer hard disk even when the
printer is turned off.
•This menu appears only when a flash and/or disk option is
installed.
Resource Save
Off
On
Specifies how the printer handles temporary downloads, such as
fonts and macros stored in RAM, when the printer receives a job
that requires more memory than is available
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting. Off sets the printer to retain
the downloads only until memory is needed. Downloads are
deleted in order to process print jobs.
•On retains the downloads during language changes and
printer resets. If the printer runs out of memory, then 38
Memory Full appears, and downloads are not deleted.
Print All Order
Alphabetical
Oldest First
Newest First
Specifies the order in which held and confidential jobs are printed
when Print All is selected
Note: Alphabetical is the factory default setting. Print jobs always
appear in alphabetical order on the printer control panel.
Understanding printer menus 212
Job Accounting menu
Note: This menu item appears only if a formatted, non-defective printer hard disk is installed. The printer hard disk
cannot be read/write‑ or write‑protected.
Menu item Description
Job Accounting Log
Off
On
Determines if the printer creates a log of the print jobs it receives
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Job Accounting Utilities Lets you print and delete log files or export them to a flash drive
Accounting Log Frequency
Monthly
Weekly
Determines how often a log file is created
Note: Monthly is the factory default setting.
Log Action at End of Frequency
None
E‑mail Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Current Log
Post Current Log
Post & Delete Current Log
Determines how the printer responds when the frequency threshold expires
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Disk Near Full Level
1–99
Off
Specifies the maximum size of the log file before the printer executes the Disk Near
Full Action
Note: 5MB is the factory default setting.
Disk Near Full Action
None
E‑mail Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Oldest Log
Post Current Log
Post & Delete Current Log
Post & Delete Oldest Log
Delete Current Log
Delete Oldest Log
Delete All Logs
Delete All But Current
Determines how the printer responds when the printer hard disk is nearly full
Notes:
•None is the factory default setting.
•The value defined in Disk Near Full Level determines when this action is
triggered.
Disk Full Action
None
E‑mail & Delete Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Oldest Log
Post & Delete Current Log
Post & Delete Oldest Log
Delete Current Log
Delete Oldest Log
Delete All Logs
Delete All But Current
Determines how the printer responds when disk usage reaches the maximum limit
(100MB)
Note: None is the factory default setting.
URL to Post Logs Determines where the printer posts job accounting logs
Understanding printer menus 213
Menu item Description
E‑mail Address to Send Logs Specifies the e‑mail address to which the device sends job accounting logs
Log File Prefix Note: The current host name defined in the TCP/IP menu is used as the default log
file prefix.
Finishing menu
Menu item Description
Sides (Duplex)
1 sided
2 sided
Specifies whether duplex (2‑sided) printing is set as the default setting for all print
jobs
Notes:
•1 sided is the factory default setting.
•You can set 2‑sided printing from the software program. For Windows users,
click File > Print, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup. For
Macintosh users, choose File > Print, and then adjust the settings from the
print dialog and pop‑up menus.
Duplex Binding
Long Edge
Short Edge
Defines the way duplexed pages are bound and how the printing on the back of the
page is oriented in relation to the printing on the front of the page
Notes:
•Long Edge is the factory default setting. Long edge assumes binding along the
long edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape).
•Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait and left edge for landscape).
Copies
1–999
Specifies the default number of copies for each print job
Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Blank Pages
Do Not Print
Print
Specifies whether blank pages are inserted in a print job
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
Collate
On (1,2,1,2,1,2)
Off (1,1,1,2,2,2)
Stacks the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•On stacks the print job in sequence.
Understanding printer menus 214
Menu item Description
Separator Sheets
Off
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages
Specifies whether blank separator sheets are inserted
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if
Collate is set to On. If Collate is set to Off, then a blank page is inserted
between each set of printed pages, such as after all page 1's and after all page
2's.
•Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs.
•Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of a print job. This
setting is useful when printing transparencies or when inserting blank pages in
a document.
Separator Source
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder
Specifies the paper source for separator sheets
Notes:
•Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.
•From the Paper menu, Configure MP must be set to Cassette for Manual
Feeder to appear as a menu setting.
Paper Saver
Off
2‑Up
3‑Up
4‑Up
6‑Up
9‑Up
12‑Up
16‑Up
Specifies that multiple‑page images be printed on one side of a paper
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•The number selected is the number of page images that will print per side.
Paper Saver Ordering
Horizontal
Reverse Horizontal
Reverse Vertical
Vertical
Specifies the positioning of multiple‑page images when using Paper Saver
Notes:
•Horizontal is the factory default setting.
•Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they are in
portrait or landscape orientation.
Paper Saver Orientation
Auto
Landscape
Portrait
Specifies the orientation of a multiple‑page document
Note: Auto is the factory default setting. The printer chooses between portrait and
landscape.
Paper Saver Border
None
Solid
Prints a border on each page image
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 215
Menu item Description
Staple Job
Off
Auto
Back
Dual
Dual Double
Front
Specifies whether the prints are stapled
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•This menu appears only when a stapler is installed.
Hole Punch
Off
On
Specifies whether the prints have punched holes
Note: This menu appears only when a puncher is installed.
Hole Punch Mode
2 holes
3 holes
4 holes
Determines the type of punch finishing performed on a printed output
Notes:
•“2 holes” is the factory default setting regardless of hardware.
•“3 holes” and “4 holes” appear only when their respective hole punch
hardware is installed.
•
Offset Pages
None
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Offsets pages at certain instances
Notes:
•None is the factory default setting.
•Between Copies offsets each copy of a print job if Collate is set to On. If Collate
is set to Off, each set of printed pages are offset, such as all page 1's and all
page 2's.
•Between Jobs sets the same offset position for the entire print job regardless
of the number of copies printed.
•This menu appears only when a stapler is installed.
Quality menu
Menu item Description
Print Mode
Color
Black Only
Specifies whether images are printed in color or in black and white
Notes:
•Color is the factory default setting.
•The printer driver is capable of overriding this setting.
Understanding printer menus 216
Menu item Description
Color Correction
Auto
Off
Manual
Adjusts the color output on the printed page
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting. Auto applies different color conversion tables
to each object on the printed page.
•Manual allows customization of color tables using the settings available from the
Manual Color menu.
•Due to the differences in additive and subtractive colors, certain colors that
appear on computer screens are impossible to duplicate on a printed page.
Print Resolution
2400 Image Q
1200 dpi
Specifies the printed output resolution
Notes:
•2400 Image Q is the factory default setting.
•1200 dpi provides the highest resolution output, and increases gloss.
Toner Darkness
1–5
Lightens or darkens the printed output
Notes:
•4 is the factory default setting.
•Selecting a smaller number can help conserve toner.
•If Print Mode is set to Black Only, then a setting of 5 increases toner density and
darkness for all print jobs.
•If Print Mode is set to Color, then a setting of 5 is the same as a setting of 4.
Enhance Fine Lines
Off
On
Enables a print mode preferable for files such as architectural drawings, maps, electrical
circuit diagrams, and flow charts
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•You can set this option from the software program. For Windows users, click
File > Print, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup. For
Macintosh users, choose File > Print, and then adjust the settings from the print
dialog and pop‑up menus.
•To set this option using the Embedded Web Server, type the network printer IP
address or host name in a browser window.
Color Saver
Off
On
Reduces the amount of toner used for graphics and images. The amount of toner used
for text is not reduced.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•On overrides Toner Darkness settings.
RGB Brightness
‑6 to 6
Adjusts brightness in color outputs
Notes:
•0 is the factory default setting.
•This does not affect files where CMYK color specifications are used.
Understanding printer menus 217
Menu item Description
RGB Contrast
0–5
Adjusts contrast in color outputs
Notes:
•0 is the factory default setting.
•This does not affect files where CMYK color specifications are used.
RGB Saturation
0–5
Adjusts saturation in color outputs
Notes:
•0 is the factory default setting.
•This does not affect files where CMYK color specifications are used.
Color Balance
Cyan
‑5 to 5
Magenta
‑5 to 5
Yellow
‑5 to 5
Black
‑5 to 5
Reset Defaults
Adjusts color in printed output by increasing or decreasing the amount of toner used
for each color
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Color Samples
sRGB Display
sRGB Vivid
Display—True Black
Vivid
Off—RGB
US CMYK
Euro CMYK
Vivid CMYK
Off—CMYK
Prints sample pages for each of the RGB and CMYK color conversion tables used in the
printer
Notes:
•Selecting any setting prints the sample.
•Color samples consist of a series of colored boxes along with the RGB or CMYK
combination that creates the color observed. These pages can be used to help
decide which combinations to use to get the desired printed output.
•From a browser window, type the IP address of the printer to access a complete
list of color sample pages from the Embedded Web Server.
Understanding printer menus 218
Menu item Description
Manual Color
RGB Image
Vivid
sRGB Display
Display—True Black
sRGB Vivid
Off
RGB Text
Vivid
sRGB Display
Display—True Black
sRGB Vivid
Off
RGB Graphics
Vivid
sRGB Display
Display—True Black
sRGB Vivid
Off
Customizes the RGB color conversions
Notes:
•sRGB Display is the factory default setting for RGB Image. This applies a color
conversion table to an output that matches the colors displayed on a computer
monitor.
•sRGB Vivid is the factory default setting for RGB Text and RGB Graphics. sRGB
Vivid applies a color table that increases saturation. This is preferred for business
graphics and text.
•Vivid applies a color conversion table that produces brighter, more saturated
colors.
•Display—True Black applies a color conversion table that uses only black toner for
neutral gray colors.
Manual Color
CMYK Image
US CMYK
Euro CMYK
Vivid CMYK
Off
CMYK Text
US CMYK
Euro CMYK
Vivid CMYK
Off
CMYK Graphics
US CMYK
Euro CMYK
Vivid CMYK
Off
Customizes the CMYK color conversions
Notes:
•US CMYK is the US factory default setting. US CMYK applies a color conversion
table that tries to produce output that matches SWOP color output.
•Euro CMYK is the international factory default setting. Euro CMYK applies a color
conversion table that tries to produce output that matches EuroScale color
output.
•Vivid CMYK increases color saturation for the US CMYK color conversion table.
Spot Color Replacement Allows users to create and save custom spot colors with corresponding CMYK values
Understanding printer menus 219
Utilities menu
Menu item Description
Remove Held Jobs
Confidential
Held
Not Restored
All
Removes confidential and held jobs from the printer hard disk
Notes:
•Selecting a setting affects only print jobs that are resident in the printer.
Bookmarks, print jobs on flash drives, and other types of held jobs are not
affected.
•Not Restored removes all Print and Hold jobs that are not restored from the
printer hard disk or memory.
Format Flash
Yes
No
Formats the flash memory
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not turn off the printer while the flash memory is
being formatted.
Notes:
•Yes deletes all data stored in flash memory.
•No cancels the format request.
•Flash memory refers to the memory added by installing a flash memory option
card in the printer.
•A flash memory option card must be installed in the printer and operating
properly for this menu item to be available.
•The flash memory option card must not be read/write‑ or write‑protected.
Delete Downloads on Disk
Delete Now
Do Not Delete
Removes downloads from the printer hard disk, including all held jobs, buffered jobs,
and parked jobs
Notes:
•Delete Now configures the printer control panel to return to the originating
screen after the deletion process is completed.
•Do Not Delete sets the printer control panel to return to the main Utilities
menu.
Activate Hex Trace Assists in isolating the source of a print job problem
Notes:
•When activated, all data sent to the printer is printed in hexadecimal and
character representation, and control codes are not executed.
•To exit or deactivate Hex Trace, turn the printer off or reset the printer.
Coverage Estimator
Off
On
Provides an estimate of the percentage coverage of toner on a page. The estimate is
printed on a separate page at the end of each print job.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 220
XPS menu
Menu item Description
Print Error Pages
Off
On
Prints a page containing information on errors, including XML markup errors
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
PDF menu
Menu item Description
Scale to Fit
No
Yes
Scales page content to fit the selected paper size
Note: No is the factory default setting.
Annotations
Do Not Print
Print
Prints annotations in a PDF
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
PostScript menu
Menu item Description
Print PS Error
Off
On
Prints a page containing the PostScript error
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Lock PS Startup Mode
Off
On
Enables users to disable the SysStart file
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Font Priority
Resident
Flash/Disk
Establishes the font search order
Notes:
•Resident is the factory default setting.
•This menu item is available only if a formatted flash memory option card
or printer hard disk is installed and operating properly.
•Make sure the flash memory option or printer hard disk is not
read/write‑, write‑, or password‑protected.
•Job Buffer Size must not be set to 100%.
Image Smoothing
Off
On
Enhances the contrast and sharpness of low‑resolution images and smooths
their color transitions
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•Image Smoothing has no effect on images that are 300 dpi or higher in
resolution.
Understanding printer menus 221
PCL Emul menu
Menu item Description
Font Source
Resident
Disk
Download
Flash
All
Specifies the set of fonts used by the Font Name menu item
Notes:
•Resident is the factory default setting. It shows the factory default set of
fonts downloaded in RAM.
•Flash and Disk settings show all fonts resident in that option. Make sure
the flash option is properly formatted and is not read/write‑, or
password‑protected.
•Download shows all the fonts downloaded in RAM.
•All shows all fonts available to any option.
Font Name
RO Courier
Identifies a specific font and where it is stored
Note: RO Courier is the factory default setting. The RO Courier format shows
the font name, font ID, and storage location in the printer. The font source
abbreviation is R for Resident, F for Flash, K for Disk, and D for Download.
Symbol Set
10U PC‑8
12U PC‑850
Specifies the symbol set for each font name
Notes:
•10U PC‑8 is the US factory default setting. 12U PC‑850 is the international
factory default setting.
•A symbol set is a set of alphabetical and numeric characters, punctuation,
and special symbols. Symbol sets support the different languages or
specific programs such as math symbols for scientific text. Only the
supported symbol sets are shown.
PCL Emulation Settings
Point Size
1.00–1008.00
Changes the point size for scalable typographic fonts
Notes:
•12 is the factory default setting.
•Point Size refers to the height of the characters in the font. One point
equals approximately 1/72 of an inch.
•Point sizes can be increased or decreased in 0.25‑point increments.
PCL Emulation Settings
Pitch
0.08–100
Specifies the font pitch for scalable monospaced fonts
Notes:
•10 is the factory default setting.
•Pitch refers to the number of fixed‑space characters per inch (cpi).
•Pitch can be increased or decreased in 0.01‑cpi increments.
•For non‑scalable monospaced fonts, the pitch appears on the display but
cannot be changed.
Understanding printer menus 222
Menu item Description
PCL Emulation Settings
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Specifies the orientation of text and graphics on a page
Notes:
•Portrait is the factory default setting.
•Portrait prints text and graphics parallel to the short edge of the page.
•Landscape prints text and graphics parallel to the long edge of the page.
PCL Emulation Settings
Lines per Page
1–255
Specifies the number of lines that print on each page
Notes:
•60 is the US factory default setting. 64 is the international default setting.
•The printer sets the amount of space between each line based on the
Lines per Page, Paper Size, and Orientation settings. Select the desired
Paper Size and Orientation before setting Lines per Page.
PCL Emulation Settings
A4 Width
198 mm
203 mm
Sets the printer to print on A4‑size paper
Notes:
•198 mm is the factory default setting.
•The 203‑mm setting sets the width of the page to allow the printing of
eighty 10‑pitch characters.
PCL Emulation Settings
Auto CR after LF
Off
On
Specifies whether the printer automatically performs a carriage return (CR) after
a line feed (LF) control command
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
PCL Emulation Settings
Auto LF after CR
Off
On
Specifies whether the printer automatically performs a line feed (LF) after a
carriage return (CR) control command
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Tray Renumber
Assign MP Feeder
Off
None
0–199
Assign Tray [x]
Off
None
0–199
Assign Manual Paper
Off
None
0–199
Assign Manual Env
Off
None
0–199
Configures the printer to work with printer software or programs that use
different source assignments for trays, drawers, and feeders
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•None ignores the Select Paper Feed command. This selection is displayed
only when it is selected by the PCL 5e interpreter.
•0–199 allows a custom setting to be assigned.
Understanding printer menus 223
Menu item Description
Tray Renumber
View Factory Defaults
MPF Default = 8
T1 Default = 1
T2 Default = 4
T3 Default = 5
T4 Default = 20
T5 Default = 21
Env Default = 6
MPaper Default = 2
MEnv Default = 3
Displays the factory default setting assigned to each tray, drawer, or feeder
Tray Renumber
Restore Defaults
Yes
No
Returns all tray, drawer, and feeder assignments to the factory default settings
HTML menu
Menu Item Description
Font Name
Albertus MT
Antique Olive
Apple Chancery
Arial MT
Avant Garde
Bodoni
Bookman
Chicago
Clarendon
Cooper Black
Copperplate
Coronet
Courier
Eurostile
Garamond
Geneva
Gill Sans
Goudy
Helvetica
Hoefler Text
Intl CG Times
Intl Courier
Intl Univers
Joanna MT
Letter Gothic
Lubalin Graph
Marigold
MonaLisa Recut
Monaco
New CenturySbk
New York
Optima
Oxford
Palatino
StempelGaramond
Taffy
Times
TimesNewRoman
Univers
Zapf Chancery
NewSansMTCS
NewSansMTCT
New SansMTJA
NewSansMTKO
Sets the default font for HTML documents
Note: The Times font is used in HTML documents that do not
specify a font.
Understanding printer menus 224
Menu item Description
Font Size
1–255 pt
Sets the default font size for HTML documents
Notes:
•12 pt is the factory default setting.
•Font size can be increased in 1‑point increments.
Scale
1–400%
Scales the default font for HTML documents
Notes:
•100% is the factory default setting.
•Scaling can be increased in 1% increments.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Sets the page orientation for HTML documents
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Margin Size
8–255 mm
Sets the page margin for HTML documents
Notes:
•19 mm is the factory default setting.
•Margin size can be increased in 1‑mm increments.
Backgrounds
Print
Do Not Print
Specifies whether to print backgrounds on HTML documents
Note: Print is the factory default setting.
Image menu
Menu item Description
Auto Fit
On
Off
Selects the optimal paper size, scaling, and orientation
Note: On is the factory default setting. It overrides scaling and orientation settings
for some images.
Invert
Off
On
Inverts bi‑tonal monochrome images
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•This setting does not apply to GIF or JPEG images.
Scaling
Best Fit
Anchor Center
Fit Height/Width
Fit Height
Fit Width
Anchor Top Left
Scales the image to fit the selected paper size
Notes:
•Best Fit is the factory default setting.
•When Auto Fit is set to On, Scaling is automatically set to Best Fit.
Understanding printer menus 225
Menu item Description
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Rev Portrait
Rev Landscape
Sets the image orientation
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Booklet Adjustments menu
The Booklet Adjustments menu is available only when a booklet finisher is installed. You can select various adjustments
from this menu when printing booklets.
To access the Booklet Adjustments menu:
1Turn off the printer.
2Hold down and
6
MNO
while turning on the printer.
3Release the buttons when the screen with the progress bar appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration Menu appears.
4Touch the arrows until Booklet Adjustments appears.
5Touch Booklet Adjustments.
Menu item Description
Size of paper
JIS B4
Letter
A4
Legal
11 x 17
12 x 18
A3
SRA3
Oficio
Folio
Specifies the paper size
Note: This setting defaults to the Tray 1 paper size value.
Total number of sheets
1–2 sheets
3 sheets
4 sheets
5–7 sheets
8–15 sheets
Specifies the total number of sheets in a booklet
Note: The factory default setting is 1–2 sheets.
Adjust for folding overlap
Top overlap
Bottom overlap
Selects top or bottom overlap based on prints
Adjust for skew during booklet making
Clockwise skew
Counter‑clockwise skew
Selects skew direction based on prints
Understanding printer menus 226
Help menu
The Help menu consists of a series of Help pages that are stored in the multifunction printer (MFP) as PDF files. They
contain information about using the printer and performing various tasks, including copying, scanning, and faxing.
English, French, German, and Spanish translations are stored in the printer.
Other translations are available on the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com.
Menu item Description
Print All Guides Prints all the guides
Copy Guide Provides information about making copies and changing settings
Fax Guide Provides information about sending faxes using fax numbers, shortcut numbers,
or the address book, and about changing settings
E‑mail Guide Provides information about sending e‑mails using addresses, shortcut numbers, or
the address book, and about changing settings
FTP Guide Provides information about scanning documents directly to an FTP server using an
FTP address, shortcut numbers, or the address book, and about changing settings
Print Defects Guide Provides help in resolving repeating defects in copies or prints
Information Guide Provides help in locating additional information
Supplies Guide Provides part numbers for ordering supplies
Understanding printer menus 227
Securing the hard disk and other installed memory
Statement of Volatility
Your printer contains various types of memory that are capable of storing device and network settings, information
from embedded solutions, and user data. The types of memory—along with the types of data stored by each—are
described below.
•Volatile memory—Your device utilizes standard Random Access Memory (RAM) to temporarily buffer user data
during simple print and copy jobs.
•Non‑volatile memory—Your device may utilize two forms of non-volatile memory: EEPROM and NAND (flash
memory). Both types are used to store the operating system, device settings, network information, scanner and
bookmark settings, and embedded solutions.
•Hard disk memory—Some devices have a hard disk drive installed. The printer hard disk is designed for
device‑specific functionality and cannot be used for long term storage for data that is not print‑related. The hard
disk does not provide the capability for users to extract information, create folders, create disk or network file
shares, or FTP information directly from a client device. The hard disk can retain buffered user data from complex
scan, print, copy, and fax jobs, as well as form data, and font data.
There are several circumstances under which you might wish to erase the contents of the memory devices installed in
your printer. A partial list includes:
•The printer is being decommissioned
•The printer hard drive is being replaced
•The printer is being moved to a different department or location
•The printer is being serviced by someone from outside your organization
•The printer is being removed from your premises for service
•The printer is being sold to another organization
Disposing of a hard drive
Note: Not all printers have a hard disk installed.
In high‑security environments, it may be necessary to take additional steps to ensure that confidential data stored on
the printer hard disk cannot be accessed once the printer—or its hard disk—is removed from your premises. While
most data can be erased electronically, you may want to consider one or more of the following actions before disposing
of a printer or hard disk:
•Degaussing—Flushes the hard drive with a magnetic field that erases stored data
•Crushing—Physically compresses the hard disk to break component parts and render them unreadable
•Milling—Physically shreds the hard disk into small metal bits
Note: While most data can be erased electronically, the only way to guarantee that all data is completely erased is to
physically destroy each memory device on which data could have been stored.
Erasing volatile memory
The volatile memory (RAM) installed on your printer requires a power source to retain information. To erase the
buffered data, simply power down the device.
Securing the hard disk and other installed memory 228
Erasing non‑volatile memory
•Individual settings, device and network settings, security settings, and embedded solutions—Erase information
and settings by selecting Wipe All Settings in the Configuration menu.
•Fax data—Erase fax settings and data by selecting Wipe All Settings in the Configuration menu.
1Turn off the printer.
2Hold down and
6
MNO
while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress
bar appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is fully
powered up, the touch screen displays a list of functions, instead of the standard home screen icons.
3Touch Wipe All Settings.
The printer will reboot several times during this process.
Note: Wipe All Settings securely removes device settings, solutions, jobs, faxes, and passwords on the printer.
4Touch Back > Exit Config Menu.
The printer will power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.
Erasing printer hard disk memory
Note: Your printer may not have a hard disk installed.
Configuring Disk Wiping in the printer menus enables you to remove residual confidential material left by scan, print,
copy, and fax jobs, by securely overwriting files that have been marked for deletion.
Using the printer control panel
1Turn off the printer.
2Hold down and
6
MNO
while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress
bar appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is fully
powered up, the touch screen displays a list of functions, instead of the standard home screen icons.
3Touch Wipe Disk, and then touch one of the following:
•Wipe disk (fast)—This lets you overwrite the disk with all zeroes in a single pass.
•Wipe disk (secure)—This lets you overwrite the disk with random bit patterns several times, followed by a
verification pass. A secure overwrite is compliant with the DoD 5220.22‑M standard for securely erasing data
from a hard disk. Highly confidential information should be wiped using this method.
4Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping. A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task.
Note: Disk wiping can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be
unavailable for other user tasks.
5Touch Back > Exit Config Menu.
The printer will power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.
Securing the hard disk and other installed memory 229
Configuring printer hard disk encryption
Note: Your printer may not have a hard disk installed.
Enabling hard disk encryption helps prevent the loss of sensitive data in the event your printer or its hard disk is stolen.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1From the Embedded Web Server, click Settings > Security > Disk Encryption.
Note: Disk Encryption appears in the Security Menu only when a formatted, non‑defective printer hard disk is
installed.
2From the Disk encryption menu, select Enable.
Notes:
•Enabling disk encryption will erase the content of the printer hard disk.
•Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be
unavailable for other user tasks.
3Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1Turn off the printer.
2Hold down and
6
MNO
while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress
bar appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. Once the printer is fully
powered up, the touch screen displays a list of functions, instead of standard home screen icons such as Copy or
Fax.
3Touch Disk Encryption > Enable.
Note: Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk.
4Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping.
A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task. After the disk has been encrypted, the printer will
return to the Enable/Disable screen.
Notes:
•Do not turn off the printer during the encryption process. Doing so may result in loss of data.
•Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be
unavailable for other user tasks.
5Touch Back, and then Exit Config Menu.
The printer will power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.
Securing the hard disk and other installed memory 230
Maintaining the printer
Periodically, certain tasks are required to maintain optimum performance of your printer.
Cleaning the exterior of the printer
1Make sure that the printer is turned off and unplugged from the wall outlet.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer,
unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables to the printer before proceeding.
2Remove paper from the standard exit bin.
3Dampen a clean, lint‑free cloth with water.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not use household cleaners or detergents, as they may damage the finish of
the printer.
4Wipe only the outside of the printer, making sure to include the standard exit bin.
Warning—Potential Damage: Using a damp cloth to clean the interior may cause damage to your printer.
5Make sure the paper support and standard exit bin are dry before beginning a new print job.
Maintaining the printer 231
Cleaning the scanner glass
Clean the scanner glass if you encounter print quality problems, such as streaks on copied or scanned images.
1Slightly dampen a soft, lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.
2Open the scanner cover.
1
2
3
4
1White underside of the ADF cover
2White underside of the scanner cover
3Scanner glass
4ADF glass
3Wipe the areas shown and let them dry.
4Close the scanner cover.
Maintaining the printer 232
Cleaning the printhead lenses
Clean the printhead lenses when you encounter print quality problems.
1Open the front door.
2Slide the release lever to the left to unlock the cover.
3Open the cover.
Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid overexposing the photoconductor unit, do not leave the cover open for
more than 10 minutes.
Maintaining the printer 233
4Locate the printhead wipers.
Maintaining the printer 234
5Gently pull the printhead wipers out until it stops, and then slowly slide them back into place.
3x
3x
3x
6Close the cover.
Maintaining the printer 235
7Slide the release lever to the right to lock the cover.
8Close the front door.
Maintaining the printer 236
Emptying the hole punch box
1Open door G.
2Pull out the hole punch box.
Maintaining the printer 237
3Empty the container.
4Insert the emptied hole punch box back into the finisher until it stops.
5Close door G.
Storing supplies
Choose a cool, clean storage area for the printer supplies. Store supplies right side up in their original packing until you
are ready to use them.
Do not expose supplies to:
•Direct sunlight
•Temperatures above 35°C (95°F)
•High humidity above 80%
•Salty air
Maintaining the printer 238
•Corrosive gases
•Heavy dust
Checking the status of parts and supplies
A message appears on the display when a replacement supply item is needed or when maintenance is required.
Checking the status of parts and supplies on the printer control panel
From the home screen, touch Status/Supplies > View Supplies.
Checking the status of parts and supplies from a network computer
Note: The computer must be connected to the same network as the printer.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer control panel home screen. The IP address appears as four sets
of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2Click Device Status.
Ordering parts and supplies
To order parts and supplies in the U.S., contact Lexmark at 1-800-539-6275 for information about Lexmark authorized
supplies dealers in your area. In other countries or regions, visit the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com or contact
the place where you purchased the printer.
Notes:
•The gauges displayed are an estimate of the life left for the supply or part indicated next to each gauge.
•All page life estimates for supplies assume printing on a single side of letter or A4 size plain paper.
Ordering toner cartridges
When 88.xx [color] cartridge low or 88.xx [color] cartridge nearly low appears, order a
new cartridge.
When 88 Replace [color] cartridge appears, replace the specified cartridge.
Estimated cartridge yield is based on the ISO/IEC 19798 standard (with about 5% coverage per color). Extremely low
print coverage (less than 1.25% for a color) for extended periods of time may negatively affect actual yield for that color
and may cause cartridge parts to fail prior to exhaustion of toner.
Part name Part number
Black high‑yield toner cartridge X950X2KG
Yellow high‑yield toner cartridge X950X2YG
Magenta high‑yield toner cartridge X950X2MG
Maintaining the printer 239
Part name Part number
Cyan high‑yield toner cartridge X950X2CG
Ordering a photoconductor unit
When 84.xx [Color] photoconductor low or 84.xx [Color] photoconductor nearly low
appears, order a replacement photoconductor unit.
When 84.xx Replace [color] photoconductor appears, replace the specified photoconductor.
Part name Part number
Photoconductor unit
•Black
•Cyan
•Magenta
•Yellow
C950X71G
CMY (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow) Photoconductor Kit
Note: CMY photoconductor units may reach end of life all at
the same time.
C950X73G
Ordering a waste toner bottle
When 82.xx Waste toner bottle nearly full appears, order a replacement waste toner bottle.
When 82.xx Replace waste toner bottle appears, replace the waste toner bottle.
Note: Waste toner bottle reuse is not recommended.
Part name Part number
Waste toner bottle C950X76G
Ordering staple cartridges
When Staples Low or Staples Empty appears, order the specified staple cartridge.
For more information, see the illustrations inside the stapler door.
Part name Part number
Staple Cartridges‑‑3 pack (Staples G5) 25A0013
Advanced Booklet Staples (Staples G11 and Staples G12) 21Z0357
Ordering a maintenance kit
When [x] Maintenance Kit appears on the printer display, order the indicated maintenance kit to replace the
worn parts. All maintenance kit parts except that in the 480K maintenance kit are designed to be user‑replaceable. The
kits come with instructions.
Maintaining the printer 240
Maintenance kit Service part number
160K Maintenance Kit 40X7540
200K ADF Maintenance Kit 40X7530
320K (100 V) Maintenance Kit 40X7568
320K (110 V) Maintenance Kit 40X7550
320K (220 V) Maintenance Kit 40X7569
480K Maintenance Kit 40X7560
Replacing parts and supplies
Replacing a maintenance kit
1Replace the maintenance kit.
2Reset the maintenance count to zero to clear the 80 scheduled maintenance [x] message.
Note: For more information on replacing the maintenance kit and resetting the maintenance count, see the
instruction sheets that came with the maintenance kit.
Replacing a photoconductor unit
1Open the front door.
Maintaining the printer 241
2Rotate the release lever counterclockwise to open the cover.
3Lower the cover.
Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid overexposing the photoconductor unit, do not leave the door open for
more than 10 minutes.
Maintaining the printer 242
4Grasp the handle of the photoconductor unit and pull it out of the machine.
5Unpack the replacement photoconductor unit.
6Align and insert the end of photoconductor unit.
Maintaining the printer 243
7Remove the tape from the top of the photoconductor unit.
8Push the tab forward to insert the photoconductor unit.
Maintaining the printer 244
9Push the photoconductor unit until it clicks into place
10 Gently pull the printhead wipers out until it stops, and then slowly slide them back into place.
3x
3x
3x
Maintaining the printer 245
11 Close the cover.
12 Rotate the release lever clockwise to lock the cover.
Maintaining the printer 246
13 Close the front door.
Replacing a toner cartridge
1Open the front door.
2Put your hand under the dent of the toner cartridge, and then slightly lift up the cartridge.
Maintaining the printer 247
3Pull out the toner cartridge.
4Unpack the replacement toner cartridge, and then shake it front‑to‑back and side‑to‑side to evenly distribute the
toner.
5Remove the red packing strip from the new cartridge.
6Insert the new cartridge into the printer.
Maintaining the printer 248
7Close the front door.
Replacing the waste toner bottle
1Turn the printer off.
2Open the front door.
3Remove the used waste toner bottle.
Maintaining the printer 249
4Unpack the new waste toner bottle.
5Insert the new waste toner bottle into the printer until it clicks into place.
6Rotate the release lever counterclockwise to open the cover.
Maintaining the printer 250
7Lower the cover.
8Slide out the printhead wipers.
3x
3x
3x
Maintaining the printer 251
9Slide the printhead wipers back into place.
10 Close the cover.
Maintaining the printer 252
11 Rotate the release lever clockwise to lock the cover.
12 Close the front door.
13 Turn the printer back on.
Maintaining the printer 253
Replacing a staple cartridge
Note: A message on the printer display indicates which staple cartridge needs to be replaced.
Replacing staple cartridge in the standard stapler unit
1Open door G.
2Grasp the handle of the staple cartridge holder, and then pull out the holder to the right.
3Pull the staple cartridge out of the finisher.
Note: Use just a slight force when removing the staple cartridge.
Maintaining the printer 254
4Squeeze both sides of the empty staple case with your fingers, and then remove the staple case from the cartridge.
1
2
1
5Insert the front side of the new staple case into the staple cartridge, and then push the rear side into the cartridge.
1
2
Maintaining the printer 255
6Push the staple cartridge into the finisher until it clicks into place.
7Close door G.
Replacing staple cartridge in the booklet stapler unit
Note: This task is applicable only when a booklet finisher is installed.
1Open door G.
Maintaining the printer 256
2Press the handles of the staple cartridge to the right, and then take the staple cartridge unit out of the finisher.
1
2
Maintaining the printer 257
3Hold the tabs on both sides of the staple cartridge.
Maintaining the printer 258
4Rotate the booklet staple cartridge at an angle.
Maintaining the printer 259
5Lift the booklet staple cartridge out of the unit.
6Squeeze both sides of the empty staple case with your fingers, and then remove the staple case from the cartridge.
1
2
1
7Insert the front side of the new staple case into the staple cartridge, and then push the rear side into the cartridge.
1
2
Maintaining the printer 260
8Return the cartridge to its original position, and then gently push the cartridge in until it clicks into place.
9Return the unit to its original position.
10 Close door G.
Maintaining the printer 261
Moving the printer
Before moving the printer
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or
printer damage:
•Turn the printer off using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
•Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it.
•Lift the printer off of the optional drawer and set it aside instead of trying to lift the drawer and printer at the same
time.
Note: Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it off the optional drawer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Damage to the printer caused by improper moving is not covered by the printer
warranty.
Moving the printer to another location
The printer and options can be safely moved to another location by following these precautions:
•Any cart used to move the printer must have a surface able to support the full footprint of the printer. Any cart
used to move the options must have a surface able to support the dimensions of the options.
•Keep the printer in an upright position.
•Avoid severe jarring movements.
Shipping the printer
When shipping the printer, use the original packaging or call the place of purchase for a relocation kit.
Maintaining the printer 262
Administrative support
Finding advanced networking and administrator information
This chapter covers basic administrative support tasks using the Embedded Web Server. For more advanced system
support tasks, see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD or the Embedded Web Server
Administrator's Guide at http://support.lexmark.com.
Checking the status of the printer
1Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
•View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
•Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2Click Device Status.
The device status shows the following:
•Paper tray settings
•Level of toner in the print cartridge
•Percentage of life remaining in the maintenance kit
•Capacity measurements of certain printer parts
Checking the virtual display
1Open an Embedded Web Server associated with your printer.
Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
•View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
•Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2Check the virtual display that appears in the top left corner of the screen.
The virtual display works as an actual display would work on a printer control panel, showing printer messages.
Setting up e‑mail alerts
Configure the printer to send you e‑mail alerts when the supplies are getting low or when the paper needs to be changed
or added, or when there is a paper jam.
1Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
•View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
•Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
Administrative support 263
2Click Settings.
3Under Other Settings, click E‑mail Alert Setup.
4Select the items for notification, and type the e‑mail addresses.
5Click Submit.
Note: For information on setting up the e‑mail server, contact your system support person.
Viewing reports
You can view some reports from the Embedded Web Server. These reports are useful for assessing the status of the
printer, the network, and supplies.
To view reports from a network printer:
1Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can:
•View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
•Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2Click Reports, and then click the type of report you want to view.
Restoring factory default settings
If you want to retain a list of the current menu settings for reference, then print a menu settings page before restoring
the factory default settings.
Warning—Potential Damage: Restoring factory defaults returns most printer settings to the original factory default
settings. Exceptions include the display language, custom sizes and messages, and network/port menu settings. All
downloads stored in RAM are deleted. Downloads stored in flash memory or on a printer hard disk are not affected.
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Factory Defaults > Restore Now > Submit
Administrative support 264
Clearing jams
Carefully select paper and specialty media and load it properly to avoid most jams. If jams do occur, follow the steps
outlined in this section.
Note: Jam recovery is set to Auto by default. The printer reprints jammed pages unless the memory required to hold
the pages is needed for other printer tasks.
Avoiding jams
Paper tray recommendations
•Make sure the paper lies flat in the tray.
•Do not remove a tray while the printer is printing.
•Do not load a tray while the printer is printing. Load it prior to printing, or wait for a prompt to load it.
•Do not load too much paper. Make sure the stack height does not exceed the indicated maximum height.
•Make sure the guides in the tray or the multipurpose feeder are properly positioned and are not pressing too tightly
against the paper or envelopes.
•Push the tray in firmly after loading paper.
Paper recommendations
•Use only recommended paper or specialty media.
•Do not load wrinkled, creased, damp, bent, or curled paper.
•Flex and straighten paper before loading it.
•Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
•Do not mix paper sizes, weights, or types in the same stack.
•Make sure all sizes and types are set correctly in the printer control panel menus.
•Store paper per manufacturer recommendations.
Understanding jam numbers and locations
When a jam occurs, a message indicating the jam location appears on the printer display. Open doors and covers, and
remove trays to access jam locations. To resolve any paper jam message, you must clear all jammed paper from the
paper path.
Clearing jams 265
9
10
87
1
2
12
4
13
14
3
5
6
11
Area Area name Jam numbers What to do
1Cover F (paper
transport)
4yy.xx
455
Open cover F, and then remove jammed paper.
Open door G and H, and then remove the jammed paper.
Open staple door, remove the staple cartridge, and then remove the jammed
staple.
2Standard finisher bin
3Door G
4Door H
5Finisher bin 1
6Finisher bin 2
7Door C
Trays 1–4
24x Open door C, and then remove the jammed paper
Open each tray, and then remove the jammed paper.
8Multipurpose feeder 250 Remove all paper from the multipurpose feeder, and then remove the
jammed paper.
9Standard exit bin 201–202
203
Remove all paper from the standard exit bin, and then remove the jammed
paper.
10 Automatic Document
Feeder (ADF)
28y.xx Remove all paper from the ADF, and then remove the jammed paper.
11 Tray 5 (high‑capacity
feeder)
24x Open the tray, and then remove the jammed paper.
Open the top cover, and then remove the jammed paper.
Gently move the tray to the left until it stops, and then remove the jammed
paper.
Clearing jams 266
Area Area name Jam numbers What to do
12 Door B 230 Open door B, and then remove jammed paper.
13 Door A 201–202
231
281
Open door A, and then remove the jammed paper.
Remove all jammed paper in the fuser.
14 Door D 203 Open door A, and then door D, and then remove the jammed paper.
201–202 paper jams
If the jammed paper is visible in the standard exit bin, then firmly grasp the paper on each side, and then gently pull it
out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
Paper jam in the fuser
1Open door A by lifting the release latch and lowering the door.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
2Lift the green lever.
Clearing jams 267
3Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the center of the fuser unit. Doing so will damage the fuser.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
4Push the green lever back into place.
5Close door A.
6If necessary, touch Continue from the printer control panel.
Paper jam under the fuser
1Open door A.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
2If the jammed paper is visible under the fuser, then firmly grasp the paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
3Close door A.
4If necessary, touch Continue from the printer control panel.
203 paper jam
If the jammed paper is visible in the standard exit bin, then firmly grasp the paper on each side, and then gently pull it
out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams 268
1Open door A, and then door D by lifting the release latch of each door and lowering the doors.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
2Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
3Close door D, and then close door A.
4If necessary, touch Continue from the printer control panel.
230 paper jam
1Lower the multipurpose feeder, and then open door B.
2
1
Clearing jams 269
2Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
3Close door B.
4If necessary, touch Continue from the printer control panel.
231 paper jam
1Open door A by lifting the release latch, and then lowering the door.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.
1
2
Clearing jams 270
2Lift the green lever.
3Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
4Push the green lever back into place.
5Close door A.
6If necessary, touch Continue from the printer control panel.
24x paper jam
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed when pulling out any jammed paper.
Clearing jams 271
Paper jam in Tray 1
1Open Tray 1.
2Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
3Close Tray 1.
4If necessary, touch Continue, jam cleared from the printer control panel.
Clearing jams 272
Paper jam in one of the optional trays (Trays 2–4)
1Check door C, and then firmly grasp the jammed paper and then pull it out.
2Open the specified tray.
3Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
4Close the tray.
5If necessary, touch Continue, jam cleared from the printer control panel.
Clearing jams 273
Paper jam in Tray 5 (high‑capacity feeder)
Paper jam inside the tray
1Pull out the tray until it stops.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not pull out the tray with too much force. Doing so may hit and injure your
knees.
2Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
3Push the tray gently until it stops.
4If necessary, touch Continue, jam cleared from the printer control panel.
Clearing jams 274
Paper jam in the tray exit
1Gently move the tray to the left until it stops.
2Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
3Gently put the tray back into position.
4If necessary, touch Continue, jam cleared from the printer control panel.
Paper jam in the top cover
1Gently move the tray to the left until it stops.
Clearing jams 275
2Open the top cover.
1
2
2
3Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Clearing jams 276
4Close the top cover.
5Gently put the tray back into position.
6If necessary, touch Continue, jam cleared from the printer control panel.
250 paper jam
1Remove any jammed pages from the multipurpose feeder.
2Load paper into the multipurpose feeder.
3If necessary, touch Continue, jam cleared from the printer control panel.
Clearing jams 277
281 paper jam
Paper jam in door A
1Open door A.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
2Determine where the jam is located, and then remove it:
aIf the paper is visible under the fuser, firmly grasp it on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
bIf the paper is not visible, then you will need to remove the fuser unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the center of the fuser unit. Doing so will damage the fuser.
1Remove the thumbscrew from each side of the fuser unit by rotating them counterclockwise.
2Lift the handles on each side of the fuser, and then pull to remove the fuser unit.
2
1
1
3Lift the green lever, firmly grasp the paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Notes:
•Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
•If the paper is in the fuser, then lower the fuser nip release lever and switch it to envelope mode.
•After removing the jammed paper, return the lever to the proper position.
Clearing jams 278
4Align the fuser unit using the handles on each side, and then place it back into the printer.
1
2
2
3Close door A.
4If necessary, touch Continue from the printer control panel.
Paper jam in cover F (paper transport)
1Open cover F.
2Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
Note: If the paper jam on the right is difficult to remove, then rotate the knob counterclockwise.
3Close cover F.
4If necessary, touch Continue from the printer control panel.
Clearing jams 279
4yy.xx paper jams
If the jammed paper is visible in any of the finisher exit bins, then firmly grasp the paper on each side, and then gently
pull it out.
1Standard finisher bin
2Finisher bin 1
3Finisher bin 2
Note: Finisher bin 2 is available only when a booklet finisher is installed.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
Paper jam in door H
1Open door H.
Note: Door H is located between the finisher exit bins.
2Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams 280
3Close door H.
4If necessary, touch Continue from the printer control panel.
Paper jam in door G
1Open door G.
Clearing jams 281
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Area Cover, knob, or handle name
1Cover G1
2Cover G2
3Knob G3
4Cover G4
5Cover G7
6Knob G8
7Handle G9
2Lift cover G1 lever.
3Firmly grasp any jammed paper, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure to remove all paper fragments after gently pulling out any jammed paper inside door G.
4Move cover G2 to the right, and then remove any jammed paper.
Note: If the paper is jammed in the rollers, then rotate knob G3 counterclockwise.
5Move cover G4 down, and then remove any jammed paper.
6Move cover G7 to the left, and then remove any jammed paper.
Clearing jams 282
7Pull handle G9 until the tray is completely open.
8Lift the inside cover. If the paper is jammed in the rollers, then rotate knob G8 counterclockwise, and then remove
the jammed paper.
9Close door G.
10 If necessary, touch Continue from the printer control panel.
Clearing jams 283
Paper jam in cover F (paper transport)
1Open cover F.
2Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
Note: If the paper jam on the right is difficult to remove, then rotate the knob counterclockwise.
3Close cover F.
4If necessary, touch Continue from the printer control panel.
Clearing jams 284
455 staple jam
1Open door G.
2Press the latch to open the stapler door.
Note: The stapler door is located behind the finisher.
3Lower the latch of the staple cartridge holder, and then pull the staple cartridge holder out of the printer.
Clearing jams 285
4Use the metal tab to lift the staple guard, and then remove any jammed or loose staples.
5Close the staple guard.
6Press down on the staple guard until it clicks into place.
7Push the staple cartridge holder firmly back into the stapler unit until the staple cartridge holder clicks into place.
8Close the stapler door.
Clearing jams 286
9Close door G.
10 If necessary, touch Continue, jam cleared from the printer control panel.
28y.xx paper jams
The scanner failed to feed one or more pages through the ADF.
1Remove all original documents from the ADF.
Note: The message clears when the pages are removed from the ADF.
2Open the ADF cover.
3Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
4Close the ADF cover.
5Reload original documents into the ADF, straighten the stack, and then adjust the paper guide.
Clearing jams 287
Troubleshooting
Understanding printer messages
Adjusting color
Wait for the process to complete.
Bin 2 is unable to lower, remove paper and check for an obstruction
Try one or more of the following:
•Remove paper and clear any obstruction from the bin.
•Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Change [paper source] to [custom type name]
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Use current [paper source] to ignore the message and print from the selected tray.
•Load the correct paper size and type in the tray, verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the printer
control panel Paper menu, and then touch Paper changed, continue.
•Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job.
Change [paper source] to [custom type name] load [orientation]
Try one or more of the following
•Touch Use current [paper source] to ignore the message and print from the selected tray.
•Load the correct paper size and type in the tray, verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the printer
control panel Paper menu, and then touch Paper changed, continue.
•Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job.
Change [paper source] to [custom string]
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Use current [paper source] to ignore the message and print from the selected tray.
•Load the correct paper size and type in the tray, verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the printer
control panel Paper menu, and then touch Paper changed, continue.
•Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job.
Troubleshooting 288
Change [paper source] to [custom string] load [orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Use current [paper source] to ignore the message and print from the selected tray.
•Load the correct paper size and type in the tray, verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the printer
control panel Paper menu, and then touch Paper changed, continue.
•Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job.
Change [paper source] to [paper size]
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Use current [paper source] to ignore the message and print from the selected tray.
•Load the correct paper size and type in the tray, verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the printer
control panel Paper menu, and then touch Paper changed, continue.
•Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job.
Change [paper source] to [paper size] load [orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Use current [paper source] to ignore the message and print from the selected tray.
•Load the correct paper size and type in the tray, verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the printer
control panel Paper menu, and then touch Paper changed, continue.
•Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job.
Change [paper source] to [paper size] [paper type]
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Use current [paper source] to ignore the message and print from the selected tray.
•Load the correct paper size and type in the tray, verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the printer
control panel Paper menu, and then touch Paper changed, continue.
•Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job.
Change [paper source] to [paper size] [paper type] load [orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Use current [paper source] to ignore the message and print from the selected tray.
•Load the correct paper size and type in the tray, verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the printer
control panel Paper menu, and then touch Paper changed, continue.
•Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job.
Troubleshooting 289
Check [src] orientation or guides
Try one or more of the following:
•Move the paper guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.
•Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Size setting.
2Before sending the print job, specify the correct size setting:
–For Windows users, specify the paper size from Print Properties.
–For Macintosh users, specify the paper size from the Page Setup dialog.
Close cover [x]
Close the specified cover to clear the message.
Close door [x]
Close the specified door.
Disk corrupted
The printer attempted a hard disk recovery on a corrupted hard disk, and the hard disk cannot be repaired. The hard
disk must be reformatted.
Touch Format disk to reformat the printer hard disk and clear the message.
Note: Formatting deletes all the files stored on the printer hard disk.
Empty the hole punch box
1Empty the hole punch box.
For instructions on emptying the hole punch box, from the printer control panel touch More Information.
2Reinsert the hole punch box into the finisher, and then touch Continue to clear the message.
Error reading USB drive. Remove USB.
An unsupported USB device has been inserted. Remove the USB device, and then install a supported one.
Error reading USB hub. Remove hub.
An unsupported USB hub has been inserted. Remove the USB hub, and then install a supported one.
Fax memory full
There is not enough memory to send the fax job.
Touch Continue to clear the message.
Troubleshooting 290
Fax partition inoperative. Contact system administrator.
The fax partition appears to be corrupted. Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Continue to clear the message.
•Turn the printer off and then back on to reset the printer. If the message appears again, then contact your system
support person.
Fax server 'To Format' not set up. Contact system administrator.
The printer is in Fax Server mode, but the Fax Server setup has not been completed.
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Continue to clear the message.
•Complete the Fax Server setup. If the message appears again, contact your system support person.
Fax Station Name not set up
The Fax Station Name has not been entered. Sending and receiving faxes is disabled until fax is configured properly.
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Continue to clear the message.
•Complete the Analog Fax Setup. If the message appears again, contact your system support person.
Fax Station Number not set up
The Fax Station Number has not been entered. Sending and receiving faxes is disabled until fax is configured properly.
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Continue to clear the message.
•Complete the Analog Fax Setup. If the message appears again, contact your system support person.
Insert Tray [x]
Insert the specified tray into the printer.
Insert the hole punch box
Insert the hole punch box into the finisher, and then touch Continue to clear the message.
Install Tray [x]
Try one or more of the following:
•Install the specified tray:
1Turn the printer off.
2Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3Install the specified tray.
Troubleshooting 291
4Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5Turn the printer back on.
•Cancel the print job.
Load [src] with [custom type name]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the specified paper in the tray or feeder.
•Touch Paper loaded, continue to clear the message and continue printing.
If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size, it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot find
a tray with the correct paper type and size, it prints from the default paper source.
•Cancel the print job.
Load [src] with [custom string]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the specified paper in the tray or feeder.
•Touch Paper loaded, continue to clear the message and continue printing.
If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size, it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot find
a tray with the correct paper type and size, it prints from the default paper source.
•Cancel the print job.
Load [src] with [size]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the specified paper in the tray or feeder.
•Touch Paper loaded, continue to clear the message and continue printing.
If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size, it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot find
a tray with the correct paper type and size, it feeds from the default paper source.
•Cancel the print job.
Load [src] with [type] [size]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the specified paper in the tray or feeder.
•Touch Paper loaded, continue to clear the message and continue printing.
If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size, it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot find
a tray with the correct paper type and size, it feeds from the default paper source.
•Cancel the print job.
Troubleshooting 292
Load Manual Feeder with [custom type name]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the specified paper in the manual feeder.
•Touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded to clear the message and continue printing.
•Touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
•Cancel the print job.
Load Manual Feeder with [custom string]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the specified paper in the manual feeder.
•Touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded to clear the message and continue printing.
•Touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
•Cancel the print job.
Load Manual Feeder with [paper size]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the specified paper in the manual feeder.
•Touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded to clear the message and continue printing.
•Touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
•Cancel the print job.
Load Manual Feeder with [paper type] [paper size]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the specified paper in the manual feeder.
•Touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded to clear the message and continue printing.
•Touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
•Cancel the print job.
Load staples
Try one or more of the following:
•Replace the specified staple cartridge in the finisher.
•Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Note: The print job will be stapled if the staple cartridge is replaced or inserted.
•Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job.
Troubleshooting 293
Manual feeder expects [paper size]. Check [paper source] guides
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the specified paper size in the manual feeder.
•Physically adjust [paper source] guides to a recognized paper size.
•Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size, then it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot
find a tray with the correct paper type and size, then it prints from the default source.
Memory full, cannot print faxes
There is not enough memory to print the fax job.
Touch Continue to clear the message without printing. Held faxes will attempt to print after the printer has been
restarted.
Power off, wait 2 seconds, power on
Turn the printer off and wait for 2 seconds before turning the printer back on.
Remove paper from standard output bin
Remove the stack of paper from the standard exit bin.
Remove paper from bin [x]
Remove the paper from the specified bin. The printer automatically senses paper removal and resumes printing.
If removing the paper does not clear the message, then touch Continue.
Remove paper from [linked set bin name]
Remove paper from the specified bin. The printer automatically detects paper removal and resumes printing.
If removing the paper does not clear the message, then touch Continue.
Remove paper from all bins
Remove the paper from all of the bins. The printer automatically senses paper removal and resumes printing.
If removing the paper does not clear the message, then touch Continue.
Restore held jobs?
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Restore to restore all held jobs stored on the printer hard disk.
•Touch Do not restore if you do not want any print jobs to be restored.
Troubleshooting 294
Scanner ADF Cover Open
The ADF cover is open. The message clears when the cover is closed.
Scan Document Too Long
The scan job exceeds the maximum number of pages. Touch Cancel Job to clear the message.
SMTP server not set up. Contact system administrator.
An error occurred on the SMTP server, or the SMTP server is not configured properly. Touch Continue to clear the
message. If the message appears again, contact your system support person.
Some held jobs were not restored
Touch Continue to delete the specified job.
Note: Held jobs that are not restored stay on the hard disk and are inaccessible.
Unsupported disk
An unsupported printer hard disk has been installed. Remove the unsupported device, and then install a supported
one.
31.xx Missing or defective [color] cartridge
Try one or more of the following:
1Remove and reinstall the specified print cartridge.
For instructions on removing a print cartridge, touch More Information.
2Touch Continue to clear the message.
Note: If the message is not cleared, then replace the defective print cartridge.
32.xx [color] cartridge part number unsupported by device
Remove the unsupported toner cartridge, and then install a supported one.
34 Incorrect paper size, check [paper source]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the appropriate paper or specialty media in the proper tray.
•Confirm that the wheel on Tray 1 is set to the paper size loaded in the tray. Make sure the paper size matches the
document you are trying to print.
•Touch Continue to clear the message and print using a different tray.
•Check the tray length and width guides and make sure the paper is loaded properly in the tray.
•Make sure the correct paper size and type are specified on the Print Properties or Print dialog settings.
Troubleshooting 295
•Check that the paper size is correctly set. For example, if the MP Feeder Size is set to Universal, make sure the paper
is large enough for the data being printed.
•Cancel the print job.
34 Incorrect paper type, check [paper source]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the appropriate paper or specialty media in the proper tray.
•Confirm that the wheel on Tray 1 is set to the paper type loaded in the tray. Make sure the paper type matches the
document you are trying to print.
•Touch Continue to clear the message and print using a different tray.
•Check the tray length and width guides and make sure the paper is loaded properly in the tray.
•Make sure the correct paper size and type are specified on the Print Properties or Print dialog settings.
•Check that the paper type is correctly set. For example, if the MP Feeder Type is set to Universal, then make sure
the paper is large enough for the data being printed.
•Cancel the print job.
35 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Continue to disable Resource Save and continue printing.
•To enable Resource Save after receiving this message, make sure the link buffers are set to Auto, and then exit the
menus to activate the link buffer changes. When Ready appears, enable Resource Save.
•Install additional memory.
36 Printer service required
Touch Continue to clear the message or contact customer support.
37 Insufficient memory to collate job
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Continue to print the portion of the job already stored and begin collating the rest of the print job.
•Cancel the current print job.
37 Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Continue to stop the defragment operation and continue printing.
•Delete fonts, macros, and other data in printer memory.
•Install additional printer memory.
Troubleshooting 296
37 Insufficient memory, some Held Jobs were deleted
The printer deleted some held jobs in order to process current jobs.
Touch Continue to clear the message.
37 Insufficient memory, some held jobs will not be restored
The printer was unable to restore some or all of the confidential or held jobs on the printer hard disk.
Touch Continue to clear the message.
38 Memory full
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Cancel job to clear the message.
•Install additional printer memory.
39 Complex page, some data may not have printed
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
•Cancel the current print job.
•Install additional printer memory.
40 [color] invalid refill, change cartridge
Replace the specified cartridge to continue printing.
51 Defective flash detected
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
•Cancel the current print job.
52 Not enough free space in flash memory for resources
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Downloaded fonts and macros not previously stored in flash memory are deleted.
•Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in flash memory.
•Upgrade to a larger capacity flash memory card.
Troubleshooting 297
53 Unformatted flash detected
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Continue to stop the defragment operation and continue printing.
•Format the flash memory. If the error message remains, the flash memory may be defective and require replacing.
54 Network [x] software error
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Continue to continue printing.
•Turn the printer off, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on.
•Upgrade (flash) the network firmware in the printer.
54 Serial option [x] error
Try one or more of the following:
•Check that the serial cable is properly connected and is the correct one for the serial port.
•Check that the serial interface parameters (protocol, baud, parity, and data bits) are set correctly on the printer
and host computer.
•Touch Continue to continue printing.
•Turn the printer power off and then back on to reset the printer.
54 Standard network software error
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Continue to continue printing.
•Turn the printer off and then back on to reset the printer.
•Upgrade (flash) the network firmware in the printer or print server.
55 Unsupported option in slot [x]
1Turn the printer off.
2Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3Remove the unsupported option card from the printer system board, and then replace it with a supported card.
4Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5Turn the printer back on.
Troubleshooting 298
56 Parallel port [x] disabled
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Continue to clear the message.
The printer discards any data received through the parallel port.
•Make sure the Parallel Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled.
56 Serial port [x] disabled
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Continue to clear the message.
The printer discards any data received through the serial port.
•Make sure the Serial Buffer menu is not set to Disabled.
56 Standard USB port disabled
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Continue to clear the message.
The printer discards any data received through the USB port.
•Make sure the USB Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled.
56 Standard parallel port disabled
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Continue to clear the message.
The printer discards any data received through the parallel port.
•Make sure the Parallel Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled.
56 USB port [x] disabled
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Continue to clear the message.
The printer discards any data received through the USB port.
•Make sure the USB Buffer menu is not set to Disabled.
58 Too many disks installed
1Turn the printer off.
2Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3Remove the excess disks.
4Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5Turn the printer back on.
Troubleshooting 299
58 Too many flash options installed
1Turn the printer off.
2Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3Remove the excess flash memory.
4Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.
5Turn the printer back on.
58 Too many trays attached
1Turn the printer off.
2Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3Remove the additional trays.
4Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.
5Turn the printer back on.
59 Incompatible tray [x]
Try one or more of the following:
•Remove the specified tray.
•Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing without using the specified tray.
61 Remove defective disk
Try one or more of the following:
•Remove the defective printer hard disk.
•Install a different printer hard disk before performing any operations that require a printer hard disk.
62 Disk full
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Continue to clear the message and continue processing.
•Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored on the printer hard disk.
•Install a printer hard disk with larger capacity.
63 Unformatted disk
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
•Format the printer hard disk.
If the error message remains, the hard disk may be defective and require replacing.
Troubleshooting 300
80.xx Fuser life warning
•Order a replacement fuser immediately. When print quality is reduced, install the new fuser, following the
instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.
•Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
80 Replace fuser
1Replace the fuser using the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.
2Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
80 Scanner maintenance required, use ADF kit
Contact customer support, and report the message. The printer is scheduled for maintenance.
80 Scheduled maintenance [x]
Contact customer support, and report the message. The printer is scheduled for maintenance.
80 Replace paper pick rollers in [paper source], use parts and instructions in tray
1 compartment
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Continue and replace later to ignore the message and continue printing.
Note: Worn or defective paper pick rollers may cause paper jams.
•Replace the worn or defective paper pick rollers, and then touch Rollers replaced to clear the message and continue
printing.
82.xx Replace waste toner bottle
1Replace the waste toner bottle.
For instructions on replacing the waste toner bottle, from the printer control panel touch More Information.
2Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
82.xx Waste toner bottle missing
Reinsert the waste toner bottle into the printer.
Troubleshooting 301
82.xx Waste toner bottle nearly full
Order a replacement waste toner bottle immediately.
1Replace the waste toner bottle.
For instructions on installing the waste toner bottle, from the printer control panel touch More Information.
2Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
84 unsupported [color] photoconductor
Remove the specified photoconductor, and then install a supported one.
84.xx [color] photoconductor missing
Install the specified color photoconductor, following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.
84.xx [color] photoconductor nearly low
1Order a replacement photoconductor.
2When print quality is reduced, install the new photoconductor, following the instruction sheet that came with the
replacement part.
3Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
84.xx [color] photoconductor low
1Order a replacement photoconductor immediately.
2When print quality is reduced, install the new photoconductor, following the instruction sheet that came with the
replacement part.
3Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
83.xx Transfer module missing
Insert the transfer module into the printer.
84.xx Replace [color] photoconductor
1Replace the photoconductor, following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.
2From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
88.2x Replace [color] cartridge
The specified toner cartridge is empty.
1Replace the specified toner cartridge.
2Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Troubleshooting 302
88.xx [color] cartridge low
1Order a replacement toner cartridge immediately.
2Remove the specified cartridge.
3Firmly shake the cartridge side‑to‑side and front‑to‑back several times to redistribute the toner.
4Reinsert the cartridge, and then touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Note: Repeat this procedure multiple times until the print remains faded, and then replace the cartridge.
88.xx [Color] cartridge very low
The specified print cartridge is very low.
1For instructions on replacing a print cartridge, from the printer control panel touch More Information.
2Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
2yy.xx Close flatbed cover and load originals if restarting job
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Cancel job to cancel the job and clear the message.
•Touch Scan from automatic feeder to resume the scan job from the ADF immediately following the last successfully
scanned page.
•Touch Scan from flatbed to resume the scan job from the scanner glass immediately following the last successfully
scanned page.
•Touch Finish job without further scanning to end the scan job at the last successfully scanned page.
Note: This does not cancel the scan job. All successfully scanned pages will be processed further for copying,
faxing, and e-mailing.
280.06 Paper missing
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Continue to clear the message.
•Touch Cancel job to cancel the job and clear the message.
•Touch Scan from automatic feeder to resume the scan job from the ADF immediately following the last successfully
scanned page.
•Touch Scan from flatbed to resume the scan job from the scanner glass immediately following the last successfully
scanned page.
•Touch Finish job without further scanning to end the scan job at the last successfully scanned page.
Note: This does not cancel the scan job. All successfully scanned pages will be processed further for copying,
faxing, or e‑mailing.
•Touch Restart job to clear the message and start a new scan job with the same settings as the previous job.
Troubleshooting 303
840.01 Scanner disabled by admin
Print without the scanner or contact your system support person.
840.02 Scanner disabled. Contact system administrator if problem persists.
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Continue with scanner disabled to return to the home screen, and then contact your system support person.
•Touch Reboot and automatically enable scanner to cancel the job.
Note: This attempts to bring the scanner back online.
1565 Emulation error, load emulation option
The printer automatically clears the message in 30 seconds, and then disables the download emulator on the firmware
card.
Solving basic printer problems
If there are basic printer problems, or the printer is unresponsive, make sure:
•The power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.
•The electrical outlet is not turned off by any switch or breaker.
•The printer is not plugged into any surge protectors, uninterrupted power supplies, or extension cords.
•Other electronic equipment plugged into the outlet is working.
•The printer is turned on. Check the printer power switch.
•The printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the host computer, print server, option, or other network
device.
•All options are properly installed.
•The printer driver settings are correct.
Once you have checked each of these possibilities, turn the printer off, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the
printer back on. This often fixes the problem.
Solving printing problems
Multiple‑language PDF files do not print
The PDF files may contain unavailable fonts.
1Open the document you want to print in Adobe Acrobat.
2Click the printer icon > Advanced > Print as image > OK > OK.
Printer control panel display is blank or displays only diamonds
The printer self test failed. Turn the printer off, wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer on.
Troubleshooting 304
If Ready does not appear, then turn the printer off and contact Customer Support.
Error message about reading USB drive appears
Make sure the flash drive is supported.
Print jobs do not print
Try one or more of the following:
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO PROBLEM WITH YOUR PRINTER
From the printer control panel, check the status. If necessary, follow the recovery instructions.
MAKE SURE THE PRINTER IS READY TO PRINT
Make sure Ready appears on the display before sending a print job.
CHECK IF A SUPPLY IS MISSING OR NEEDS REPLACEMENT
Remove and then reinstall or replace the supply.
CHECK IF THE STANDARD EXIT BIN IS FULL
Remove the paper stack from the standard exit bin.
CHECK IF THE PAPER TRAY IS EMPTY
Load paper in the tray.
MAKE SURE THE CORRECT PRINTER SOFTWARE IS INSTALLED
•Verify that you are using the correct printer software.
•If the printer is connected to your computer through a USB port, then make sure you are running a supported
operating system and using a compatible printer software.
MAKE SURE THE INTERNAL PRINT SERVER IS WORKING PROPERLY
•Make sure the internal print server is properly installed and that the printer is connected to the network.
•Print a network setup page and check that the status shows Connected. If the status is Not Connected,
then check the network cables, and then try printing the network setup page again. Contact your system support
person to make sure the network is functioning correctly.
The printer software is available on the Lexmark Web site at http://support.lexmark.com.
MAKE SURE YOU ARE USING A RECOMMENDED USB, SERIAL, OR ETHERNET CABLE
For more information, visit the Lexmark Web site at http://support.lexmark.com.
Troubleshooting 305
MAKE SURE PRINTER CABLES ARE SECURELY CONNECTED
Check the cable connections to the printer and print server to make sure they are secure.
For more information, see the setup documentation that came with the printer.
Confidential and other held jobs do not print
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
PARTIAL JOB, NO JOB, OR BLANK PAGE PRINTS
The print job may contain a formatting error or invalid data.
•Delete the print job, and then print it again.
•For PDF documents, recreate the PDF and then print it again.
If you are printing from the Internet, then the printer may be reading multiple job titles as duplicates and deleting
all jobs except the first one.
•For Windows users, open Print Properties. From the Print and Hold dialog, select the "Keep duplicate documents"
check box under the User name text box before entering a PIN number.
•For Macintosh users, save each print job, naming each job differently, and then send the individual jobs to the
printer.
MAKE SURE THE PRINTER HAS SUFFICIENT MEMORY
Free up additional printer memory by scrolling through the list of held jobs and deleting some of them.
Print job takes longer than expected
Try one or more of the following:
REDUCE THE COMPLEXITY OF THE PRINT JOB
Eliminate the number and size of fonts, the number and complexity of images, and the number of pages in the print
job.
TURN OFF THE PAGE PROTECT SETTING
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Print Recovery > Page Protect > Off >
CHANGE THE ENVIRONMENTAL SETTINGS
When using Eco‑Mode or Quiet Mode settings, you may notice a reduction in performance.
Troubleshooting 306
Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE AND PAPER SIZE SETTINGS
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the paper type and paper size settings.
2Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:
•For Windows users, specify the paper type from Print Properties.
•For Macintosh users, specify the paper type from the Print dialog.
Incorrect characters print
•Make sure the printer is not in Hex Trace mode. If Ready Hex appears on the display, you must exit Hex Trace
mode before you can print your job. Turn the printer off and back on to exit Hex Trace mode.
•Make sure the SmartSwitch settings are set to On in the Network and USB menus.
Tray linking does not work
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
LOAD THE SAME SIZE AND TYPE OF PAPER
•Load the same size and type of paper in each tray to be linked.
•Move the paper guides to the correct positions for the paper size loaded in each tray.
USE THE SAME PAPER SIZE AND PAPER TYPE SETTINGS
•Print a menu settings page and compare the settings for each tray.
•If necessary, adjust the settings from the Paper Size/Type menu.
Note: The standard 550-sheet tray and the multipurpose feeder do not automatically sense the paper size. You
must set the size from the Paper Size/Type menu.
Large jobs do not collate
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
MAKE SURE COLLATE IS SET TO ON
From the Finishing menu or Print Properties, set Collate to On.
Note: Setting Collate to Off in the software overrides the setting in the Finishing menu.
REDUCE THE COMPLEXITY OF THE PRINT JOB
Reduce the complexity of the print job by eliminating the number and size of fonts, the number and complexity of
images, and the number of pages in the job.
Troubleshooting 307
MAKE SURE THE PRINTER HAS ENOUGH MEMORY
Add printer memory or an optional hard disk.
Unexpected page breaks occur
INCREASE THE PRINT TIMEOUT VALUE
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Timeouts
2Touch the left or right arrow next to Print Timeout until the desired value appears.
3Touch Submit.
Solving copy problems
Copier does not respond
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES
Clear any error messages.
CHECK THE POWER
Make sure the printer is plugged in, the power is on, and Ready appears.
Scanner unit does not close
Make sure there are no obstructions:
1Lift the scanner unit.
2Remove any obstruction keeping the scanner unit open.
3Lower the scanner unit.
Poor copy quality
These are some examples of poor copy quality:
•Blank pages
•Checkerboard pattern
•Distorted graphics or pictures
•Missing characters
•Faded print
Troubleshooting 308
•Dark print
•Skewed lines
•Smudges
•Streaks
•Unexpected characters
•White lines in print
Try one or more of the following:
CLEAR ANY ERROR MESSAGES
Check the display and clear any error messages.
REPLACE THE TONER OR PRINT CARTRIDGE
When the print remains faded, replace the toner or print cartridge.
CLEAN THE SCANNER GLASS
The scanner glass may be dirty. Clean the scanner glass with a clean, lint‑free cloth dampened with water.
For more information, see “Cleaning the scanner glass” on page 232.
ADJUST THE TONER DARKNESS OF THE COPY
Adjust the toner darkness from the Copy menus.
MAKE SURE THE QUALITY OF THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENT IS SATISFACTORY
Check the quality of the original document.
PLACE THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENT PROPERLY
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
MAKE SURE TO USE THE APPROPRIATE COPY SETTINGS
When patterns (moiré) appear in the output:
•On the Copy screen make sure the Content Type and Source settings are appropriate for the document being
scanned.
•From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Sharpness > lower the Sharpness setting
•On the Copy screen, make sure no scaling is being selected.
Troubleshooting 309
When the text is light or disappearing:
•From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Content > Text > > select the appropriate source for the original document being copied >
•From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Sharpness > increase the current setting
•From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Background removal, and then reduce the current setting
•From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Contrast > increase the current setting
•From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Shadow detail > reduce the current setting
When the output appears washed out or overexposed:
•On the Copy screen make sure the Content Type and Source settings are appropriate for the document being
scanned.
•From the Copy screen, adjust the Darkness setting.
•From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Shadow detail > reduce the current setting
•From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Background removal > reduce the current setting
Partial document or photo copies
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING
Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1From the printer control panel, check the Paper Size setting from the Paper menu.
2Before sending the job to print, specify the correct size setting:
•For Windows users, specify the size from Print Properties.
•For Macintosh users, specify the size from the Page Setup dialog.
Troubleshooting 310
Solving scanner problems
Checking an unresponsive scanner
If your scanner is not responding, then make sure:
•The printer is turned on.
•The printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the host computer, print server, option, or other network
device.
•The power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.
•The electrical outlet is not turned off by any switch or breaker.
•The printer is not plugged into any surge protectors, uninterrupted power supplies, or extension cords.
•Other electrical equipment plugged into the outlet is working.
Once you have checked each of these possibilities, turn the printer off and then back on. This often fixes the problem
with the scanner.
Scan was not successful
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE CABLE CONNECTIONS
Make sure the network or USB cable is securely connected to the computer and the printer.
AN ERROR MAY HAVE OCCURRED IN THE PROGRAM
Turn off and then restart the computer.
Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
OTHER SOFTWARE PROGRAMS MAY BE INTERFERING WITH SCANNING
Close all programs not being used.
THE SCAN RESOLUTION MAY BE SET TOO HIGH
Select a lower scan resolution.
Poor scanned image quality
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES
Clear any error messages.
Troubleshooting 311
THE SCANNER GLASS MAY BE DIRTY
Clean the scanner glass with a clean, lint‑free cloth dampened with water. For more information, see “Cleaning the
scanner glass” on page 232.
ADJUST THE SCAN RESOLUTION
Increase the resolution of the scan for a higher quality output.
CHECK THE QUALITY OF THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENT
Make sure the quality of the original document is satisfactory.
CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
Partial document or photo scans
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING
Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1From the printer control panel, check the Paper Size setting from the Paper menu.
2Before sending the job to print, specify the correct size setting:
•For Windows users, specify the size from Print Properties.
•For Macintosh users, specify the size from the Page Setup dialog.
Cannot scan from a computer
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES
Clear any error messages.
CHECK THE POWER
Make sure the printer is plugged in, the power is on, and Ready appears.
CHECK THE CABLE CONNECTIONS
Make sure the network or USB cable is securely connected to the computer and the printer.
Troubleshooting 312
Solving fax problems
Fax and e-mail functions are not set up
The indicator light blinks red until you set up fax and e‑mail. To set up fax and e‑mail, follow these steps:
Note: Before completing these instructions for a printer on a network, make sure the fax cables are connected.
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> General Settings > Run initial setup > Yes > Submit
2Turn the printer off, and then turn it back on.
3From the printer control panel, touch your language.
4Touch your country or region, and then touch Continue.
5Select your time zone, and then touch Continue.
6Touch Fax and E‑mail to clear the icons, and then touch Continue.
Note: You can use these same steps to disable fax and e‑mail.
Caller ID is not shown
Contact your telecommunications company to verify that your telephone line is subscribed to the caller ID service.
If your region supports multiple caller ID patterns, you may have to change the default setting. There are two settings
available: FSK (pattern 1) and DTMF (pattern 2). The availability of these settings by way of the Fax menu depends on
whether your country or region supports multiple caller ID patterns. Contact your telecommunications company to
determine which pattern or switch setting to use.
Cannot send or receive a fax
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES
Clear any error messages.
CHECK THE POWER
Make sure the printer is plugged in, the power is on, and Ready appears.
CHECK THE PRINTER CONNECTIONS
Make sure the cable connections for the following hardware are secure, if applicable:
•Telephone
•Handset
•Answering machine
Troubleshooting 313
CHECK THE TELEPHONE WALL JACK
1Plug a telephone into the wall jack.
2Listen for a dial tone.
3If you do not hear a dial tone, then plug a different telephone into the wall jack.
4If you still do not hear a dial tone, then plug a telephone into a different wall jack.
5If you hear a dial tone, then connect the printer to that wall jack.
REVIEW THIS DIGITAL PHONE SERVICE CHECKLIST
The fax modem is an analog device. Certain devices can be connected to the printer so that digital telephone services
can be used.
•If you are using an ISDN telephone service, then connect the printer to an analog telephone port (an R-interface
port) on an ISDN terminal adapter. For more information and to request an R-interface port, contact your ISDN
provider.
•If you are using DSL, then connect to a DSL filter or router that will support analog use. For more information,
contact your DSL provider.
•If you are using a PBX telephone service, then make sure you are connecting to an analog connection on the PBX.
If none exists, consider installing an analog telephone line for the fax machine.
CHECK FOR A DIAL TONE
•Place a test call to the telephone number to which you want to send a fax to make sure that it is working correctly.
•If the telephone line is being used by another device, then wait until the other device is finished before sending
a fax.
•If you are using the On Hook Dial feature, then turn up the volume to verify a dial tone.
TEMPORARILY DISCONNECT OTHER EQUIPMENT
To ensure the printer is working correctly, connect it directly to the telephone line. Disconnect any answering
machines, computers with modems, or telephone line splitters.
CHECK FOR JAMS
Clear any jams, and then make sure that Ready appears.
TEMPORARILY DISABLE CALL WAITING
Call Waiting can disrupt fax transmissions. Disable this feature before sending or receiving a fax. Call your telephone
company to obtain the keypad sequence for temporarily disabling Call Waiting.
VOICE MAIL SERVICE MAY BE INTERFERING WITH THE FAX TRANSMISSION
Voice Mail offered through your local telephone company may disrupt fax transmissions. To enable both Voice Mail
and the printer to answer calls, you may want to consider adding a second telephone line for the printer.
Troubleshooting 314
THE PRINTER MEMORY MAY BE FULL
1Dial the fax number.
2Scan the original document one page at a time.
Can send but not receive faxes
Try one or more of the following:
LOAD PAPER
If the tray is empty, then load paper in the tray or feeder.
CHECK THE RING COUNT DELAY SETTINGS
The ring count delay sets the number of times the phone rings before the printer answers. If you have extension
phones on the same line as the printer, or subscribe to the telephone company's Distinctive Ring service, then keep
the Ring Delay setting at 4.
1Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then you can:
•View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
•Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
3In the Rings to Answer field, enter the number of times you want the phone to ring before the printer answers.
4Click Submit.
REPLACE THE TONER OR PRINT CARTRIDGE
Replace the toner or print cartridge.
Can receive but not send faxes
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
THE PRINTER IS NOT IN FAX MODE
On the home screen, touch Fax to put the printer in Fax mode.
THE DOCUMENT IS NOT LOADED PROPERLY
Load the original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left
corner.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
Troubleshooting 315
MAKE SURE THE SHORTCUT NUMBER IS SET UP PROPERLY
•Check to make sure the shortcut number has been programmed for the number that you want to dial.
•As an alternative, dial the telephone number manually.
Received fax has poor print quality
Try one or more of the following:
RESEND THE DOCUMENT
Ask the person who sent you the fax to:
•Check that the quality of the original document is satisfactory.
•Resend the fax. There may have been a problem with the quality of the telephone line connection.
•Increase the fax scan resolution, if possible.
REPLACE THE CARTRIDGE
When 88 Cartridge low appears or when the prints appear faded, replace the cartridge.
MAKE SURE THE FAX TRANSMISSION SPEED IS NOT SET TOO HIGH
Decrease the incoming fax transmission speed:
1Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP
address in the TCP/IP section.
2Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
3In the Max Speed box, click one of the following:
2400
4800
9600
14400
33600
4Click Submit.
Solving home screen applications problems
An application error has occurred
CHECK THE SYSTEM LOG FOR RELEVANT DETAILS
1Type the printer IP address or host name in the address field of your Web browser.
Troubleshooting 316
If you do not know the IP address or host name of the printer, then you can:
•View the information on the printer control panel home screen, or in the TCP/IP section under the
Networks/Ports menu.
•Print a network setup page or menu settings page and locate the information in the TCP/IP section.
2Click Settings or Configuration.
3Click Device Solutions > Solutions (eSF) > System tab > Log.
4From the Filter menu, select an application status.
5From the Application menu, select an application, and then click Submit.
MAKE SURE THE FILE NAME YOU WANT TO SCAN TO IS NOT ALREADY IN USE
Verify that the file to which you want to scan is not open by another application or user.
To help prevent errors, make sure either “Append time stamp” or “Overwrite existing file” is selected in the
destination configuration settings.
ADJUST THE SCAN SETTINGS
In the destination configuration settings, lower the scan settings. For example, lower the scan resolution, disable
Color, or change the Content type to Text.
CONTACT CUSTOMER SUPPORT
If you still cannot isolate the problem, then contact customer support.
Solving option problems
Option does not operate correctly or quits after it is installed
Try one or more of the following:
RESET THE PRINTER
Turn the printer off, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer on.
CHECK TO SEE IF THE OPTION IS CONNECTED TO THE PRINTER
1Turn the printer off using the power switch.
2Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, and then from the printer.
3Check the connection between the option and the printer.
MAKE SURE THE OPTION IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY
Print a menu settings page and check to see if the option is listed in the Installed Options list. If the option is not
listed, then reinstall it. For more information, see the hardware setup documentation that came with the option, or
go to www.lexmark.com to view the option instruction sheet.
Troubleshooting 317
MAKE SURE THE OPTION IS SELECTED
From the computer you are printing from, select the option.
For more information, see “Updating available options in the printer driver” on page 46.
Paper tray problems
Try one or more of the following:
MAKE SURE THE PAPER IS LOADED CORRECTLY
1Open the paper tray.
2Check for paper jams or misfeeds.
3Make sure the paper guides are aligned against the edges of the paper.
4Make sure the paper tray closes properly.
RESET THE PRINTER
Turn the printer off, wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer on.
MAKE SURE THE PAPER TRAY IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY
If the paper tray is listed on the menu settings page, but paper jams when it enters or exits the tray, then it may not
be properly installed. Reinstall the paper tray. For more information, see the hardware setup documentation that
came with the paper tray, or go to http://support.lexmark.com to view the paper tray instruction sheet.
2,000-sheet drawer problems
CHECK THE DRAWER CONNECTION
Make sure the 2,000‑sheet drawer is properly connected to the printer.
LOAD PAPER
If the tray is empty, then load paper in the tray or feeder
CLEAR ANY JAMS
Open the side door of the tray or feeder, and then remove any jammed paper.
AVOID PAPER JAMS
•Flex the paper.
•Make sure the drawer is properly installed.
•Make sure paper is loaded correctly.
•Make sure the paper stack you load does not exceed the maximum stack height indicated in the tray.
Troubleshooting 318
•Make sure the paper or specialty media meets specifications and is not damaged.
•Make sure the guides are positioned correctly for the paper size loaded.
Memory card
Make sure the memory card is securely connected to the printer system board.
Cannot detect flash memory card
Make sure the flash memory card is securely connected to the printer system board.
Cannot detect printer hard disk
Make sure the printer hard disk is securely connected to the printer system board.
Internal Solutions Port does not operate correctly
Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE INTERNAL SOLUTIONS PORT (ISP) CONNECTIONS
Make sure the ISP is securely connected to the printer system board.
CHECK THE CABLE
Make sure you are using the correct cable and that it is securely connected to the Internal Solutions (ISP) port.
MAKE SURE THE NETWORK SOFTWARE IS CONFIGURED CORRECTLY
For information on installing the network printing software, see the Networking Guide on the Software and
Documentation CD.
Internal print server does not operate correctly
Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE PRINT SERVER CONNECTIONS
•Make sure the internal print server is attached securely to the printer system board.
•Make sure you are using the correct cable and that it is securely connected.
MAKE SURE THE NETWORK SOFTWARE IS CONFIGURED CORRECTLY
For more information on installing the network printing software, do the following:
1Open the Software and Documentation CD.
2Click Additional.
Troubleshooting 319
3Under Publications on this CD, select Networking Guide.
USB/parallel interface card does not operate correctly
CHECK THE USB/PARALLEL INTERFACE CARD CONNECTION
Make sure the USB/parallel interface card is securely connected to the printer system board.
CHECK THE CABLE
Make sure you are using the correct cable and that it is securely connected.
Solving paper feed problems
Paper frequently jams
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE PAPER
Use recommended paper and specialty media. For more information, see the chapter about paper and specialty
media guidelines.
MAKE SURE THERE IS NOT TOO MUCH PAPER IN THE PAPER TRAY
Make sure the stack of paper you load does not exceed the maximum stack height indicated in the tray or on the
multipurpose feeder.
CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES
Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.
THE PAPER MAY HAVE ABSORBED MOISTURE DUE TO HIGH HUMIDITY
•Load paper from a fresh package.
•Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
Paper jam message remains after jam is cleared
CHECK THE PAPER PATH
The paper path is not clear. Clear jammed paper from the entire paper path, and then touch Continue.
Troubleshooting 320
Jammed pages are not reprinted
TURN ON JAM RECOVERY
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Print Recovery
2Touch the arrows next to Jam Recovery until On or Auto appears.
3Touch Submit.
Solving print quality problems
If these suggestions do not correct the problem, then contact customer support. You may have a printer part that
requires adjustment or replacement.
Characters have jagged or uneven edges
If you are using downloaded fonts, verify that the fonts are supported by the printer, the host computer, and the
software program.
Clipped images
Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE GUIDES
Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.
CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING
Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Size setting.
2Before sending the job to print, specify the correct size setting:
•For Windows users, specify the size from Print Properties.
•For Macintosh users, specify the size from the Page Setup dialog.
Troubleshooting 321
Fine horizontal lines appear on color pages
You may notice fine, horizontal lines in photographs or pages with a high concentration of color. This can occur when
the printer is in Quiet Mode. To fix this, set Quiet Mode to Off (Image/Photo).
Shadow images appear on prints
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE AND WEIGHT SETTINGS
Make sure the paper type and weight settings match the paper loaded in the tray or feeder:
1From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type and Paper Weight settings.
2Before sending the print job, specify the correct paper type setting:
•For Windows users, specify the paper type from Print Properties.
•For Macintosh users, specify the paper type from the Print dialog.
MAKE SURE THE PRINT CARTRIDGE IS NOT LOW ON TONER
When 88.xx [color] cartridge low appears, make sure that toner is distributed evenly among all four
print cartridges or whichever color has the shadow images.
1Remove the print cartridge.
Warning—Potential Damage: Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print
quality of future print jobs.
2Firmly shake the cartridge side-to-side and front-to-back several times to redistribute the toner.
3Reinsert the print cartridge.
Note: If print quality does not improve, replace the print cartridge of the color that is giving a shadow.
If the problem continues, the printer may need to be serviced. For more information, contact customer support.
Troubleshooting 322
Gray background
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
CHECK THE TONER DARKNESS SETTING
Select a lighter Toner Darkness setting:
•From the printer control panel Quality menu, change the setting.
•For Windows users, change the setting from Print Properties.
•For Macintosh users, change the setting from the Print dialog.
THE TONER CARTRIDGE MAY BE WORN OR DEFECTIVE
Replace the toner cartridge.
Incorrect margins
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES
Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.
CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING
Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Size setting.
2Before sending the job to print, specify the correct size setting:
•For Windows users, specify the size from Print Properties.
•For Macintosh users, specify the size from the Page Setup dialog.
Troubleshooting 323
Light colored line, white line, or incorrectly colored line appears on prints
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Try one or more of the following:
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO DEFECTIVE TONER CARTRIDGE
Replace the defective toner cartridge.
MAKE SURE THE PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT IS NOT DEFECTIVE
Replace the defective photoconductor unit.
MAKE SURE THE TRANSFER MODULE IS NOT DEFECTIVE
Replace the defective transfer module.
CLEAN THE PRINTHEAD LENSES
1Open the front door, and then the internal cover.
2Locate the printhead wipers.
3Gently pull the printhead wiper out until it stops, and then slowly slide it back into place.
4Clean the remaining three printhead lenses.
Paper curl
Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE AND WEIGHT SETTINGS
Make sure the paper type and weight settings match the paper loaded in the tray or feeder:
1From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type and Paper Weight settings.
2Before sending the print job, specify the correct paper type setting:
•For Windows users, specify the paper type from Print Properties.
•For Macintosh users, specify the paper type from the Print dialog.
LOAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE
Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
Troubleshooting 324
Print irregularities
Try one or more of the following:
LOAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE
The paper may have absorbed moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE AND WEIGHT SETTINGS
Make sure the paper type and weight settings match the paper loaded in the tray or feeder:
1From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type and Paper Weight settings.
2Before sending the print job, specify the correct paper type setting:
•For Windows users, specify the paper type from Print Properties.
•For Macintosh users, specify the paper type from the Print dialog.
AVOID TEXTURED PAPER WITH ROUGH FINISHES
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO DEFECTIVE TONER CARTRIDGE
Replace the worn or defective toner cartridge.
MAKE SURE THE TRANSFER MODULE IS NOT DEFECTIVE
Replace the defective transfer module. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the
replacement part.
MAKE SURE THE FUSER IS NOT DEFECTIVE
Replace the defective fuser. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.
Troubleshooting 325
Print is too dark
Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE DARKNESS, BRIGHTNESS, AND CONTRAST SETTINGS
The Toner Darkness setting may be too dark, the Brightness setting may be too dark, or the Contrast setting may be
too high.
•Change these settings from the printer control panel Quality menu.
•For Windows users, change these settings from Print Properties.
•For Macintosh users:
1Choose File > Print.
2From the “Orientation pictures” menu, choose Printer Features.
3Choose a lower value for the Toner Darkness, Brightness, and Contrast settings.
LOAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE
The paper may have absorbed moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
AVOID TEXTURED PAPER WITH ROUGH FINISHES
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray or feeder:
•From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type setting.
•For Windows users, check this setting from Print Properties.
•For Macintosh users, check this setting from the Print dialog.
Print is too light
Troubleshooting 326
Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE DARKNESS, BRIGHTNESS, AND CONTRAST SETTINGS
The Toner Darkness setting may be too light, the Brightness setting may be too light, or the Contrast setting may be
too low.
•Change these settings from the printer control panel Quality menu.
•For Windows users, change these settings from Print Properties
•For Macintosh users:
1Choose File > Print.
2From the Orientation pictures drop‑down menu, choose Printer Features.
3Choose a higher value for the Toner Darkness, Brightness, and Contrast settings.
LOAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE
The paper may have absorbed moisture from high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
AVOID TEXTURED PAPER WITH ROUGH FINISHES
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING
Make sure the Paper Type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray or feeder:
•From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type setting.
•For Windows users, check this setting from Print Properties.
•For Macintosh users, check this setting from the Print dialog.
Printer is printing blank pages
Try one or more of the following:
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO PACKING MATERIAL LEFT ON THE TONER OR PRINT CARTRIDGE
Remove the cartridge and make sure the packing material is properly removed. Reinstall the cartridge.
Troubleshooting 327
MAKE SURE THE TONER OR PRINT CARTRIDGE IS NOT LOW ON TONER
When 88.xx [color] cartridge low appears, make sure that toner is distributed evenly among all four
cartridges:
1Remove the cartridge.
Warning—Potential Damage: Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print
quality of future print jobs.
2Firmly shake the cartridge side-to-side and front-to-back several times to redistribute the toner.
3Reinsert the cartridge.
Note: If print quality does not improve, then replace the cartridge of the color that is not printing.
If the problem continues, then the printer may need to be serviced. For more information, contact customer support.
Repeating defects appear on a page
Try one or more of the following:
MAKE SURE THE PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT IS NOT DEFECTIVE
The photoconductor unit may be defective if marks occur repeatedly in only one color and multiple times on a page.
•Replace the photoconductor unit if the defects occur every 94.2 mm (3.71 in.) or 37.68 mm (1.48 in.).
MAKE SURE THE FUSER IS NOT DEFECTIVE
The fuser may be defective if the marks occur down repeatedly in all colors.
•Replace the fuser if the defects occur every 141 mm (5.55 in.).
Skewed print
Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES
Adjust the length and width guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.
•Make sure the guides are not too far from the paper stack.
•Make sure the guides are not pressing too lightly against the paper stack.
CHECK THE PAPER
Make sure you are using paper that meets the printer specifications.
Troubleshooting 328
MAKE SURE THE PRINTER IS CLEAN OR IS NOT CONTAMINATED WITH PAPER DUST
Clean the exterior of the printer
1Make sure that the printer is turned off and unplugged from the wall outlet.
Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer,
unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables to the printer before proceeding.
2Remove paper from the standard exit bin.
3Dampen a clean, lint-free cloth with water.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not use household cleaners or detergents, as they may damage the finish of
the printer.
4Wipe only the exterior of the printer, making sure to include the standard exit bin.
Warning—Potential Damage: Using a damp cloth to clean the interior may cause damage to your printer.
5Make sure the paper support and standard exit bin are dry before beginning a new print job.
MAKE SURE THE PAPER FEED ROLLERS ARE CLEAN AND ARE NOT CONTAMINATED WITH DUST
1Turn the printer off using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
2Remove the paper feed rollers.
Note: For instructions on how to remove and reinstall the paper feed rollers, see the setup sheet that came with
the rollers inside the compartment box of Tray 1.
3Dampen a clean, lint-free cloth with water.
4Clean the paper feed rollers.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the rubber. Doing so will damage the rollers.
5Reinstall the paper feed rollers.
Note: Make sure to replace the worn or defective paper feed rollers.
Solid color pages
MAKE SURE THE PHOTOCONDUCTOR IS NOT DEFECTIVE AND IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY
Remove and then reinstall the photoconductor. If the problem continues, then the photoconductor may need to be
replaced.
Troubleshooting 329
Black or white streaks appear on transparencies or paper
Try one or more of the following:
ENSURE THAT THE FILL PATTERN IS CORRECT
If the fill pattern is incorrect, choose a different fill pattern from your software program.
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE
•Use only the recommended transparencies.
•Ensure that the Paper Type setting matches what is loaded in the tray or feeder.
•Ensure that the Paper Texture setting is correct for the type of paper or specialty media loaded in the tray or
feeder.
MAKE SURE THE PRINT CARTRIDGE IS NOT LOW ON TONER
When 88.xx [color] cartridge low appears, make sure the toner is distributed evenly within the print
cartridge:
1Remove the print cartridge.
Warning—Potential Damage: Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print
quality of future print jobs.
2Firmly shake the cartridge side-to-side and front-to-back several times to redistribute the toner.
3Reinsert the print cartridge.
If the problem continues, the printer may need to be serviced. For more information, contact Customer Support.
Streaked horizontal lines appear on prints
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Try one or more of the following:
Troubleshooting 330
SELECT ANOTHER TRAY OR FEEDER
•From the printer control panel Paper Menu, select Default Source.
•For Windows users, select the paper source from Print Properties.
•For Macintosh users, select the paper source from the Print dialog and pop‑up menus.
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO WORN, DEFECTIVE, OR EMPTY TONER CARTRIDGE
Replace the worn, defective, or empty toner cartridge.
CLEAR THE PAPER PATH AROUND THE TONER CARTRIDGE
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
Clear any paper you see or clean any visible toner from the paper path. If the problem persists, then contact Customer
Support.
Streaked vertical lines appear on prints
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Try one or more of the following:
SELECT ANOTHER TRAY OR FEEDER
•From the printer control panel Paper menu, select Default Source
•For Windows users, select the paper source from Print Properties.
•For Macintosh users, select the paper source from the Print dialog and pop‑up menus.
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO WORN, DEFECTIVE, OR EMPTY TONER CARTRIDGE
Replace the worn, defective, or empty toner cartridge.
CLEAR THE PAPER PATH AROUND THE TONER CARTRIDGE
Check the paper path around the toner cartridge.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
Clear any paper you see.
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO TONER IN THE PAPER PATH
Troubleshooting 331
Toner fog or background shading appears on the page
Try one or more of the following:
MAKE SURE THE TONER CARTRIDGE IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY OR IS NOT DEFECTIVE
Reinstall or replace the defective toner cartridge.
MAKE SURE THE TRANSFER MODULE IS NOT WORN OR DEFECTIVE
Replace the worn or defective transfer module.
MAKE SURE THE PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT IS NOT WORN OR DEFECTIVE
Replace the word or defective photoconductor unit.
MAKE SURE THE FUSER IS NOT WORN OR DEFECTIVE
Replace the worn or defective fuser.
MAKE SURE THE PRINTER HAS RECALIBRATED RECENTLY
Perform color adjust from the Quality menu.
MAKE SURE THE APPLICATION HAS NOT SPECIFIED AN OFF‑WHITE BACKGROUND
Check the application settings.
MAKE SURE NO TONER IS IN THE PAPER PATH
Contact customer support.
Toner rubs off
Try one or more of the following:
Troubleshooting 332
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE AND WEIGHT SETTINGS
Make sure the paper type and weight settings match the paper loaded in the tray or feeder:
1From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type and Paper Weight settings. Change the Paper
Weight setting from Normal to Heavy.
2Before sending the print job, specify the correct paper type setting:
•For Windows users, specify the paper type from Print Properties.
•For Macintosh users, specify the paper type from the Print dialog.
CHECK THE PAPER TEXTURE SETTING
From the printer control panel Paper menu, make sure the Paper Texture setting matches the paper loaded in the
tray or feeder. If necessary, change the Paper Texture setting from Normal to Rough.
MAKE SURE THE FUSER IS NOT WORN OR DEFECTIVE
Replace the worn or defective fuser. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the replacement
part.
Toner specks
Try one or more of the following:
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO DEFECTIVE TONER CARTRIDGE
Replace the defective or worn cartridges.
MAKE SURE THE PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT IS NOT DEFECTIVE
Replace the defective photoconductor unit.
CALL CUSTOMER SUPPORT
Transparency print quality is poor
Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE TRANSPARENCIES
Use only transparencies that meet the printer specifications.
Troubleshooting 333
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING
Make sure the paper type setting is set to Transparency:
1From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type setting.
2Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:
•For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.
•For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.
Solving color quality problems
FAQ about color printing
What is RGB color?
Red, green, and blue light can be added together in various amounts to produce a large range of colors observed in
nature. For example, red and green can be combined to create yellow. Televisions and computer monitors create
colors in this manner. RGB color is a method of describing colors by indicating the amount of red, green, or blue
needed to produce a certain color.
What is CMYK color?
Cyan, magenta, yellow, and black inks or toners can be printed in various amounts to produce a large range of colors
observed in nature. For example, cyan and yellow can be combined to create green. Printing presses, inkjet printers,
and color laser printers create colors in this manner. CMYK color is a method of describing colors by indicating the
amount of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black needed to reproduce a particular color.
How is color specified in a document to be printed?
Software programs typically specify document color using RGB or CMYK color combinations. Additionally, they allow
users to modify the color of each object in a document. For more information, see the software program Help topics.
How does the printer know what color to print?
When a user prints a document, information describing the type and color of each object is sent to the printer. The
color information is passed through color conversion tables that translate the color into the appropriate amounts of
cyan, magenta, yellow, and black toner needed to produce the desired color. The object information determines the
application of color conversion tables. For example, it is possible to apply one type of color conversion table to text
while applying a different color conversion table to photographic images.
Why doesn't the printed color match the color I see on the computer screen?
The color conversion tables used in Auto Color Correction mode generally approximate the colors of a standard
computer monitor. However, because of technology differences that exist between printers and monitors, there are
many colors that can also be affected by monitor variations and lighting conditions. For recommendations on how
the printer color sample pages may be useful in solving certain color‑matching problems, see the question, “How
can I match a particular color (such as a corporate logo)?”
Troubleshooting 334
The printed page appears tinted. Can I adjust the color?
Sometimes a printed page may appear tinted (for example, everything printed seems to be too red). This can be
caused by environmental conditions, paper type, lighting conditions, or user preference. In these instances, adjust
the Color Balance setting to create a more preferable color. Color Balance provides the user with the ability to make
subtle adjustments to the amount of toner being used in each color plane. Selecting positive or negative values for
cyan, magenta, yellow, and black (from the Color Balance menu) will slightly increase or decrease the amount of
toner used for the chosen color. For example, if a printed page has a red tint, then decreasing both magenta and
yellow could potentially improve the color balance.
My color transparencies seem dark when they are projected. Is there anything I can do to improve the color?
This problem most commonly occurs when projecting transparencies with reflective overhead projectors. To obtain
the highest projected color quality, transmissive overhead projectors are recommended. If a reflective projector
must be used, then adjusting the Toner Darkness setting to 1, 2, or 3 will lighten the transparency. Make sure to print
on the recommended type of color transparencies.
What is manual color correction?
When manual color correction is enabled, the printer employs user‑selected color conversion tables to process
objects. However, Color Correction must be set to Manual, or no user‑defined color conversion will be implemented.
Manual color correction settings are specific to the type of object being printed (text, graphics, or images), and how
the color of the object is specified in the software program (RGB or CMYK combinations).
Notes:
•Manual color correction is not useful if the software program does not specify colors with RGB or CMYK
combinations. It is also not effective in situations in which the software program or the computer operating
system controls the adjustment of colors.
•The color conversion tables—applied to each object when Color Correction is set to Auto—generate preferred
colors for the majority of documents.
To manually apply a different color conversion table:
1From the Quality menu, select Color Correction, and then select Manual.
2From the Quality menu, select Manual Color, and then select the appropriate color conversion table for the
affected object type.
Object type Color conversion tables
RGB Image
RGB Text
RGB Graphics
•Vivid—Produces brighter, more saturated colors and may be applied
to all incoming color formats.
•sRGB Display—Produces an output that approximates the colors
displayed on a computer monitor. Black toner usage is optimized for
printing photographs.
•Display—True Black—Produces an output that approximates the
colors displayed on a computer monitor. Uses only black toner to create
all levels of neutral gray.
•sRGB Vivid—Provides an increased color saturation for the sRGB
Display color correction. Black usage is optimized for printing business
graphics.
•Off—No color correction is implemented.
Troubleshooting 335
Object type Color conversion tables
CMYK Image
CMYK Text
CMYK Graphics
•US CMYK—Applies color correction to approximate the SWOP
(Specifications for Web Offset Publishing) color output.
•Euro CMYK—Applies color correction to approximated EuroScale color
output.
•Vivid CMYK—Increases the color saturation of the US CMYK color
correction setting.
•Off—No color correction is implemented.
How can I match a particular color (such as a corporate logo)?
From the printer Quality menu, nine types of Color Samples sets are available. These are also available from the Color
Samples page of the Embedded Web Server. Selecting any sample set generates a multiple‑page printout consisting
of hundreds of colored boxes. Either a CMYK or RGB combination is located on each box, depending on the table
selected. The observed color of each box is obtained by passing the CMYK or RGB combination labeled on the box
through the selected color conversion table.
By examining Color Samples sets, a user can identify the box whose color is the closest to the desired color. The color
combination labeled on the box can then be used for modifying the color of the object in a software program. For
more information, see the software program Help topics. Manual color correction may be necessary to utilize the
selected color conversion table for the particular object.
Selecting which Color Samples set to use for a particular color‑matching problem depends on the Color Correction
setting being used (Auto, Off, or Manual), the type of object being printed (text, graphics, or images), and how the
color of the object is specified in the software program (RGB or CMYK combinations). When the printer Color
Correction setting is set to Off, the color is based on the print job information; and no color conversion is implemented.
Note: The Color Samples pages are not useful if the software program does not specify colors with RGB or CMYK
combinations. Additionally, certain situations exist in which the software program or the computer operating
system adjusts the RGB or CMYK combinations specified in the program through color management. The resulting
printed color may not be an exact match of the Color Samples pages.
What are detailed Color Samples and how do I access them?
Detailed Color Samples sets are available only through the Embedded Web Server of a network printer. A detailed
Color Samples set contains a range of shades (displayed as colored boxes) that are similar to a user‑defined RGB or
CMYK value. The likeness of the colors in the set are dependent on the value entered in the RGB or CMYK Increment
box.
To access a detailed Color Samples set from the Embedded Web Server:
1Type the printer IP address or host name in the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address or host name of the printer, then you can:
•View the information on the printer control panel home screen, or in the TCP/IP section under the
Networks/Ports menu.
•Print a network setup page or menu settings page and locate the information in the TCP/IP section.
2Click Configuration > Color Samples > Detailed Options.
3Select a color conversion table.
4Enter the RGB or CMYK color number.
Troubleshooting 336
5Enter an increment value from 1–255.
Note: The closer the value is to 1, the narrower the color sample range will appear.
6Click Print.
Embedded Web Server does not open
Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE NETWORK CONNECTION
Make sure the printer and computer are turned on and connected to the same network.
CHECK THE ADDRESS ENTERED IN THE WEB BROWSER
•Depending on the network settings, you may need to type “https://” instead of “http://” before the printer
IP address to access the Embedded Web Server. For more information, contact your system support person.
•Make sure printer IP address is correct.
TEMPORARILY DISABLE WEB PROXY SERVERS
Proxy servers may block or restrict you from accessing certain Web sites including the Embedded Web Server. For
more information, contact your system support person.
Contacting customer support
When you call customer support, describe the problem you are experiencing, the message on the display, and the
troubleshooting steps you have already taken to find a solution.
You need to know your printer model type and serial number. For more information, see the label on the inside top
front cover of the printer. The serial number is also listed on the menu settings page.
In the U.S. or Canada, call 1‑800‑539‑6275. For other countries or regions, visit the Lexmark Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com.
Troubleshooting 337
Notices
Product information
Product name:
Lexmark X950de, X952dte, X954dhe, XS955de, XS955dhe
Machine type:
7558
Model(s):
032, 036, 232, 236, 432, 436, 496
Edition notice
May 2013
The following paragraph does not apply to any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law:
LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC., PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain
transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you.
This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the
information herein; these changes will be incorporated in later editions. Improvements or changes in the products or
the programs described may be made at any time.
References in this publication to products, programs, or services do not imply that the manufacturer intends to make
these available in all countries in which it operates. Any reference to a product, program, or service is not intended to
state or imply that only that product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program,
or service that does not infringe any existing intellectual property right may be used instead. Evaluation and verification
of operation in conjunction with other products, programs, or services, except those expressly designated by the
manufacturer, are the user’s responsibility.
For Lexmark technical support, visit support.lexmark.com.
For information on supplies and downloads, visit www.lexmark.com.
If you don't have access to the Internet, you can contact Lexmark by mail:
Lexmark International, Inc.
Bldg 004-2/CSC
740 New Circle Road NW
Lexington, KY 40550
USA
© 2013 Lexmark International, Inc.
All rights reserved.
Notices 338
UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RIGHTS
This software and any accompanying documentation provided under this agreement are commercial computer
software and documentation developed exclusively at private expense.
Trademarks
Lexmark, Lexmark with diamond design, and MarkVision are trademarks of Lexmark International, Inc., registered in
the United States and/or other countries.
ScanBack is a trademark of Lexmark International, Inc.
Mac and the Mac logo are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
PCL® is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company. PCL is Hewlett-Packard Company’s designation of a
set of printer commands (language) and functions included in its printer products. This printer is intended to be
compatible with the PCL language. This means the printer recognizes PCL commands used in various application
programs, and that the printer emulates the functions corresponding to the commands.
The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of these companies:
Albertus The Monotype Corporation plc
Antique Olive Monsieur Marcel OLIVE
Apple-Chancery Apple Computer, Inc.
Arial The Monotype Corporation plc
CG Times Based on Times New Roman under license from The Monotype Corporation plc, is a product of
Agfa Corporation
Chicago Apple Computer, Inc.
Clarendon Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Eurostile Nebiolo
Geneva Apple Computer, Inc.
GillSans The Monotype Corporation plc
Helvetica Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Hoefler Jonathan Hoefler Type Foundry
ITC Avant Garde Gothic International Typeface Corporation
ITC Bookman International Typeface Corporation
ITC Mona Lisa International Typeface Corporation
ITC Zapf Chancery International Typeface Corporation
Joanna The Monotype Corporation plc
Marigold Arthur Baker
Monaco Apple Computer, Inc.
New York Apple Computer, Inc.
Oxford Arthur Baker
Notices 339
Palatino Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Stempel Garamond Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Taffy Agfa Corporation
Times New Roman The Monotype Corporation plc
Univers Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple, Inc.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) compliance information statement
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
The FCC Class A limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment
is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case
the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended
cables or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could
void the user's authority to operate this equipment.
Note: To assure compliance with FCC regulations on electromagnetic interference for a Class A computing device,
use a properly shielded and grounded cable such as Lexmark part number 1021231 for parallel attach or 1021294 for
USB attach. Use of a substitute cable not properly shielded and grounded may result in a violation of FCC
regulations.
Modular component notice
This product may contain the following modular component(s):
Lexmark regulatory type/model LEX-M01-003; FCC ID:IYLM01003; IC:2376A-M01003
Lexmark regulatory type/model LEX-M05-001; FCC ID:IYLLEXM05001; IC:2376A-M05001
Lexmark regulatory type/model LEX-M05-002; FCC ID:IYLLEXM05002; IC:2376A-M05002
Licensing notices
All licensing notices associated with this product can be viewed from the CD:\LEGAL directory of the installation software
CD.
Noise emission levels
The following measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 and reported in conformance with ISO 9296.
Notices 340
Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.
1-meter average sound pressure, dBA
Printing 53 dBA
Ready 35 dBA
Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.
Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) directive
The WEEE logo signifies specific recycling programs and procedures for electronic products in countries of the European
Union. We encourage the recycling of our products.
If you have further questions about recycling options, visit the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com for your local
sales office phone number.
Static sensitivity notice
This symbol identifies static-sensitive parts. Do not touch in the areas near these symbols without first touching the
metal frame of the printer.
ENERGY STAR
Any Lexmark product bearing the ENERGY STAR emblem on the product or on a start-up screen is certified to comply
with Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) ENERGY STAR requirements as configured when shipped by Lexmark.
Notices 341
Temperature information
Ambient temperature 15.6 to 32.2°C (60 to 90°F)
Shipping and storage temperature ‑40° to 40° C (‑40 to 104° F) and ‑0° to 35° C (32 to 95° F)
Power consumption
Product power consumption
The following table documents the power consumption characteristics of the product.
Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.
Mode Description Power consumption (Watts)
Printing The product is generating hard‑copy output from
electronic inputs.
675 W (x950de) ; 710 W (x952de and x952dte) ;
750 W (x954de and x954dhe)
Copy The product is generating hard‑copy output from
hard‑copy original documents.
810 W (x950de) ; 830 W (x952de and x952dte) ;
850 W (x954de and x954dhe)
Scan The product is scanning hard‑copy documents. 125 W (x950de) ; 130 W (x952de and x952dte) ;
135 W (x954de and x954dhe)
Ready The product is waiting for a print job. 110 W (x950de) ; 115 W (x952de and x952dte) ;
120 W (x954de and x954dhe)
Sleep Mode The product is in a high‑level energy‑saving mode. 17 W
Hibernate The product is in a low‑level energy‑saving mode. 1.0 W
Off The product is plugged into a wall outlet, but the power
switch is turned off.
0.35 W
The power consumption levels listed in the previous table represent time-averaged measurements. Instantaneous
power draws may be substantially higher than the average.
Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.
Power Saver
This product is designed with an energy-saving mode called Power Saver. The Power Saver Mode is equivalent to the
Sleep Mode. The Power Saver Mode saves energy by lowering power consumption during extended periods of inactivity.
The Power Saver Mode is automatically engaged after this product is not used for a specified period of time, called the
Power Saver Timeout.
Factory default Power Saver Timeout for this product (in minutes): 30
By using the configuration menus, the Power Saver Timeout can be modified between 2 minutes and 240 minutes.
Setting the Power Saver Timeout to a low value reduces energy consumption, but may increase the response time of
the product. Setting the Power Saver Timeout to a high value maintains a fast response, but uses more energy.
Notices 342
Off mode
If this product has an off mode which still consumes a small amount of power, then to completely stop product power
consumption, disconnect the power supply cord from the wall outlet.
Total energy usage
It is sometimes helpful to calculate the total product energy usage. Since power consumption claims are provided in
power units of Watts, the power consumption should be multiplied by the time the product spends in each mode in
order to calculate energy usage. The total product energy usage is the sum of each mode's energy usage.
Industry Canada compliance statement
This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Standard
ICES-003.
Avis de conformité aux normes de l’industrie du Canada
Cet appareil numérique de classe A est conforme aux exigences de la norme canadienne relative aux équipements
pouvant causer des interférences NMB-003.
European Community (EC) directives conformity
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC and 2006/95/EC
on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility
and safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon
request from the Authorized Representative.
This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950.
Radio interference notice
Warning
This is a product that complies with the emission requirements of EN55022 Class A limits and immunity requirements
of EN55024. This product is not intended to be used in residential/domestic environments.
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio interference, in which case the user
may be required to take adequate measures.
Notice to users of the US telephone network: FCC requirements
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the Administrative Council
for Terminal Attachments (ACTA). On the back of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a
product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to your telephone
company.
Notices 343
This equipment uses the RJ-11C Universal Service Order Code (USOC) jack.
A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises’ wiring and telephone network must comply with the
applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is
provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See your
setup documentation for more information.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone
line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most
but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be
connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact your local telephone company. For products approved
after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX.
The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (for example, 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products,
the REN is shown separately on the label.
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that
temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will
notify the customer as soon as possible. You will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC.
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that could affect the
operation of this equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to
make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service.
If you experience trouble with this equipment, for repair or warranty information, contact Lexmark International, Inc.
at www.lexmark.com or your Lexmark representative. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the
telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved.
This equipment contains no user serviceable parts. For repair and warranty information, contact Lexmark International,
Inc. See the previous paragraph for contact information.
Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service
commission, or corporation commission for information.
If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the installation of this
equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment,
consult your telephone company or a qualified installer.
Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to customer
terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide problem. It is
recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is
connected. An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated, and certified by UL (Underwriter's
Laboratories), another NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory), or a recognized safety certification body in
the country/region of use. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical
surges.
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic
device, including fax machines, to send any message unless said message clearly contains in a margin at the top or
bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification
of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending
machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or
any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges.)
See your user documentation in order to program this information into your fax machine.
Notices 344
Notice to users of the Canadian telephone network
This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is
an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The terminus of
an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of
all the devices does not exceed five. The modem REN is located on the rear of the equipment on the product labeling.
Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to customer
terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide problem. It is
recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is
connected. An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated, and certified by UL (Underwriter’s
Laboratories), another NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory), or a recognized safety certification body in
the country/region of use. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical
surges.
This equipment uses CA11A telephone jacks.
Avis réservé aux utilisateurs du réseau téléphonique du Canada
Ce produit est conforme aux spécifications techniques d’Industrie Canada. Le numéro REN (ringer equivalence number :
numéro d’équivalence de sonnerie) fournit une indication du nombre maximum de terminaux pouvant être connectés
à l’interface téléphonique. En bout de ligne, le nombre d’appareils qui peuvent être connectés n’est pas directement
limité, mais la somme des REN de ces appareils ne doit pas dépasser cinq. Le numéro REN du modem est indiqué sur
l’étiquette produit située à l’arrière de l’équipement.
Les compagnies de téléphone constatent que les surtensions électriques, en particulier celles dues à la foudre,
entraînent d'importants dégâts sur les terminaux privés connectés à des sources d’alimentation CA. Il s’agit-là d’un
problème majeur d’échelle nationale. En conséquence, il vous est recommandé de brancher un parasurtenseur dans
la prise de courant à laquelle l’équipement est connecté. Utilisez un parasurtenseur répondant à des caractéristiques
nominales satisfaisantes et certifié par le laboratoire d’assureurs UL (Underwriter’s Laboratories), un autre laboratoire
agréé de type NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory) ou un organisme de certification agréé dans votre région
ou pays. Ceci prévient tout endommagement de l’équipement causé par les orages et autres surtensions électriques.
Cet équipement utilise des prises de téléphone CA11A.
Notice to users of the New Zealand telephone network
The following are special conditions for the Facsimile User Instructions. The grant of a telepermit for any item of terminal
equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection
to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above
all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of telepermitted
equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network
services.
This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom's 111 Emergency Service.
This equipment may not provide for the effective hand-over of a call to another device connected to the same line.
This equipment should not be used under any circumstances that may constitute a nuisance to other Telecom
customers.
Notices 345
Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment
associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance
to Telecom's specifications:
•There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30 minute period for any single manual
call initiation, and
•The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the
beginning of the next call attempt.
•The equipment shall be set to ensure that automatic calls to different numbers are spaced such that there is not
less than 5 seconds between the end of one call attempt and the beginning of another.
Using this product in Switzerland
This product requires a Swiss billing tone filter (Lexmark part number 14B5109 or 80D1877) to be installed on any line
which receives metering pulses in Switzerland. The Lexmark filter must be used, as metering pulses are present on all
analog telephone lines in Switzerland.
Utilisation de ce produit en Suisse
Cet appareil nécessite l’utilisation d’un filtre de tonalité de facturation suisse (nº de référence Lexmark : 14B5109 ou
80D1877) devant être installé sur toute ligne recevant des impulsions de comptage en Suisse. Ce filtre doit être utilisé
pour toute installation car ces impulsions existent sur toutes les lignes téléphoniques suisses.
Verwendung dieses Produkts in der Schweiz
Für dieses Produkt muss ein schweizerischer Billing Tone Filter zur Zählzeichenübertragung (Lexmark Teilenummer
14B5109 oder 80D1877) für jede Leitung installiert werden, über die in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte übertragen werden.
Die Verwendung des Lexmark Filters ist obligatorisch, da in allen analogen Telefonleitungen in der Schweiz
Zeitsteuertakte vorhanden sind.
Uso del prodotto in Svizzera
Questo prodotto richiede un filtro toni Billing svizzero, (codice Lexmark 14B5109 o 80D1877) da installare su tutte le
linee che ricevono impulsi remoti in Svizzera. È necessario utilizzare il filtro Lexmark poiché gli impulsi remoti sono
presenti su tutte le linee analogiche in Svizzera.
Notice to Users in the European Union
Products bearing the CE mark are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC,
2006/95/EC, and 1999/5/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to
electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and on radio
equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment.
Notices 346
Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon
request from the Authorized Representative.
Refer to the table at the end of the Notices section for further compliance information.
Regulatory notices for wireless products
This section contains the following regulatory information pertaining to wireless products that contain transmitters,
for example, but not limited to, wireless network cards or proximity card readers.
Exposure to radio frequency radiation
The radiated output power of this device is far below the radio frequency exposure limits of the FCC and other regulatory
agencies. A minimum separation of 20 cm (8 inches) must be maintained between the antenna and any persons for
this device to satisfy the RF exposure requirements of the FCC and other regulatory agencies.
Industry Canada (Canada)
This device complies with Industry Canada specification RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of the device.
This device has been designed to operate only with the antenna provided. Use of any other antenna is strictly prohibited
per regulations of Industry Canada.
To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from
windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to
licensing.
The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit RF
fields in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health
Canada's Web site www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb.
The term "IC:" before the certification/registration number only signifies that the Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
Industry Canada (Canada)
Cet appareil est conforme à la norme RSS-210 d'Industry Canada. Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions
suivantes :
(1) cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d'interférences et (2) il doit accepter toute interférence reçue, y compris celles
risquant d'altérer son fonctionnement.
Notices 347
Cet appareil a été conçu pour fonctionner uniquement avec l'antenne fournie. L'utilisation de toute autre antenne est
strictement interdite par la réglementation d'Industry Canada.
En application des réglementations d'Industry Canada, l'utilisation d'une antenne de gain supérieur est strictement
interdite.
Pour empêcher toute interférence radio au service faisant l'objet d'une licence, cet appareil doit être utilisé à l'intérieur
et loin des fenêtres afin de garantir une protection optimale.
Si le matériel (ou son antenne d'émission) est installé à l'extérieur, il doit faire l'objet d'une licence.
L'installateur de cet équipement radio doit veiller à ce que l'antenne soit implantée et dirigée de manière à n'émettre
aucun champ HF dépassant les limites fixées pour l'ensemble de la population par Santé Canada. Reportez-vous au
Code de sécurité 6 que vous pouvez consulter sur le site Web de Santé Canada www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb.
Le terme « IC » précédant le numéro de d'accréditation/inscription signifie simplement que le produit est conforme
aux spécifications techniques d'Industry Canada.
Notice to users in the European Union
Products bearing the CE mark are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC,
2006/95/EC, and 1999/5/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to
electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and on radio
equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment.
Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon
request from the Authorized Representative.
This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950.
Products equipped with 2.4GHz Wireless LAN option are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council
directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC, and 1999/5/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the
Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain
voltage limits and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment.
Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.
Operation is allowed in all EU and EFTA countries, but is restricted to indoor use only.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon
request from the Authorized Representative.
This product may be used in the countries indicated in the table below.
Notices 348
AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE
EL ES FI FR HR HU IE IS IT
LI LT LU LV MT NL NO PL PT
RO SE SI SK TR UK
Česky Společnost Lexmark International, Inc. tímto prohlašuje, že výrobek tento výrobek je ve shodě se základními
požadavky a dalšími příslušnými ustanoveními směrnice 1999/5/ES.
Dansk Lexmark International, Inc. erklærer herved, at dette produkt overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige relevante
krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Deutsch Hiermit erklärt Lexmark International, Inc., dass sich das Gerät dieses Gerät in Übereinstimmung mit den
grundlegenden Anforderungen und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG
befindet.
Ελληνική ΜΕ ΤΗΝ ΠΑΡΟΥΣΑ Η LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC. ΔΗΛΩΝΕΙ ΟΤΙ ΑΥΤΟ ΤΟ ΠΡΟΪΟΝ
ΣΥΜΜΟΡΦΩΝΕΤΑΙ ΠΡΟΣ ΤΙΣ ΟΥΣΙΩΔΕΙΣ ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣ ΚΑΙ ΤΙΣ ΛΟΙΠΕΣ ΣΧΕΤΙΚΕΣ ΔΙΑΤΑΞΕΙΣ
ΤΗΣ ΟΔΗΓΙΑΣ 1999/5/ΕΚ.
English Hereby, Lexmark International, Inc., declares that this type of equipment is in compliance with the
essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Español Por medio de la presente, Lexmark International, Inc. declara que este producto cumple con los requisitos
esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.
Eesti Käesolevaga kinnitab Lexmark International, Inc., et seade see toode vastab direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ
põhinõuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele muudele asjakohastele sätetele.
Suomi Lexmark International, Inc. vakuuttaa täten, että tämä tuote on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten
ja muiden sitä koskevien direktiivin ehtojen mukainen.
Français Par la présente, Lexmark International, Inc. déclare que l'appareil ce produit est conforme aux exigences
fondamentales et autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.
Magyar Alulírott, Lexmark International, Inc. nyilatkozom, hogy a termék megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ
követelményeknek és az 1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb elõírásainak.
Íslenska Hér með lýsir Lexmark International, Inc. yfir því að þessi vara er í samræmi við grunnkröfur og aðrar
kröfur, sem gerðar eru í tilskipun 1999/5/EC.
Italiano Con la presente Lexmark International, Inc. dichiara che questo questo prodotto è conforme ai requisiti
essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.
Latviski Ar šo Lexmark International, Inc. deklarē, ka šis izstrādājums atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām
prasībām un citiem ar to saistītajiem noteikumiem.
LietuviųŠiuo Lexmark International, Inc. deklaruoja, kad šis produktas atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas
1999/5/EB direktyvos nuostatas.
Malti Bil-preżenti, Lexmark International, Inc., jiddikjara li dan il-prodott huwa konformi mal-ħtiġijiet
essenzjali u ma dispożizzjonijiet oħrajn relevanti li jinsabu fid-Direttiva 1999/5/KE.
Nederlands Hierbij verklaart Lexmark International, Inc. dat het toestel dit product in overeenstemming is met de essentiële
eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.
Norsk Lexmark International, Inc. erklærer herved at dette produktet er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og
øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Notices 349
Polski Niniejszym Lexmark International, Inc. oświadcza, że niniejszy produkt jest zgodny z zasadniczymi
wymogami oraz pozostałymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.
Português A Lexmark International Inc. declara que este este produto está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras
disposições da Diretiva 1999/5/CE.
Slovensky Lexmark International, Inc. týmto vyhlasuje, že tento produkt spĺňa základné požiadavky a všetky
príslušné ustanovenia smernice 1999/5/ES.
Slovensko Lexmark International, Inc. izjavlja, da je ta izdelek v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi
relevantnimi določili direktive 1999/5/ES.
Svenska Härmed intygar Lexmark International, Inc. att denna produkt står i överensstämmelse med de väsentliga
egenskapskrav och övriga relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG.
Statement of Limited Warranty
Lexmark X950de, X952dte, X954dhe, XS955de, XS955dhe
Lexmark International, Inc., Lexington, KY
This limited warranty applies to the United States and Canada. For customers outside the U.S., refer to the country-
specific warranty information that came with your product.
This limited warranty applies to this product only if it was originally purchased for your use, and not for resale, from
Lexmark or a Lexmark Remarketer, referred to in this statement as “Remarketer.”
Limited warranty
Lexmark warrants that this product:
—Is manufactured from new parts, or new and serviceable used parts, which perform like new parts
—Is, during normal use, free from defects in material and workmanship
If this product does not function as warranted during the warranty period, contact a Remarketer or Lexmark for repair
or replacement (at Lexmark's option).
If this product is a feature or option, this statement applies only when that feature or option is used with the product
for which it was intended. To obtain warranty service, you may be required to present the feature or option with the
product.
If you transfer this product to another user, warranty service under the terms of this statement is available to that user
for the remainder of the warranty period. You should transfer proof of original purchase and this statement to that
user.
Limited warranty service
The warranty period starts on the date of original purchase as shown on the purchase receipt and ends 12 months later
provided that the warranty period for any supplies and for any maintenance items included with the printer shall end
earlier if it, or its original contents, are substantially used up, depleted, or consumed.
To obtain warranty service you may be required to present proof of original purchase. You may be required to deliver
your product to the Remarketer or Lexmark, or ship it prepaid and suitably packaged to a Lexmark designated location.
You are responsible for loss of, or damage to, a product in transit to the Remarketer or the Lexmark designated location.
Notices 350
When warranty service involves the exchange of a product or part, the item replaced becomes the property of the
Remarketer or Lexmark. The replacement may be a new or repaired item.
The replacement item assumes the remaining warranty period of the original product.
Replacement is not available to you if the product you present for exchange is defaced, altered, in need of a repair not
included in warranty service, damaged beyond repair, or if the product is not free of all legal obligations, restrictions,
liens, and encumbrances.
Before you present this product for warranty service, remove all print cartridges, programs, data, and removable storage
media (unless directed otherwise by Lexmark).
For further explanation of your warranty alternatives and the nearest Lexmark authorized servicer in your area contact
Lexmark on the World Wide Web at http://support.lexmark.com.
Remote technical support is provided for this product throughout its warranty period. For products no longer covered
by a Lexmark warranty, technical support may not be available or only be available for a fee.
Extent of limited warranty
Lexmark does not warrant uninterrupted or error-free operation of any product or the durability or longevity of prints
produced by any product.
Warranty service does not include repair of failures caused by:
—Modification or unauthorized attachments
—Accidents, misuse, abuse or use inconsistent with Lexmark user’s guides, manuals, instructions or guidance
—Unsuitable physical or operating environment
—Maintenance by anyone other than Lexmark or a Lexmark authorized servicer
—Operation of a product beyond the limit of its duty cycle
—Use of printing media outside of Lexmark specifications
—Refurbishment, repair, refilling or remanufacture by a third party of products, supplies or parts
—Products, supplies, parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces not furnished by Lexmark
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NEITHER LEXMARK NOR ITS THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS OR
REMARKETERS MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH
RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT, AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND SATISFACTORY QUALITY. ANY WARRANTIES THAT
MAY NOT BE DISCLAIMED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD. NO
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WILL APPLY AFTER THIS PERIOD. ALL INFORMATION, SPECIFICATIONS, PRICES,
AND SERVICES ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE.
Limitation of liability
Your sole remedy under this limited warranty is set forth in this document. For any claim concerning performance or
nonperformance of Lexmark or a Remarketer for this product under this limited warranty, you may recover actual
damages up to the limit set forth in the following paragraph.
Lexmark's liability for actual damages from any cause whatsoever will be limited to the amount you paid for the product
that caused the damages. This limitation of liability will not apply to claims by you for bodily injury or damage to real
property or tangible personal property for which Lexmark is legally liable. IN NO EVENT WILL LEXMARK BE LIABLE FOR
ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS, INCIDENTAL DAMAGE, OR OTHER ECONOMIC OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.
Notices 351
This is true even if you advise Lexmark or a Remarketer of the possibility of such damages. Lexmark is not liable for any
claim by you based on a third party claim.
This limitation of remedies also applies to claims against any Suppliers and Remarketers of Lexmark. Lexmark's and its
Suppliers' and Remarketers' limitations of remedies are not cumulative. Such Suppliers and Remarketers are intended
beneficiaries of this limitation.
Additional rights
Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, or do not allow the exclusion or limitation
of incidental or consequential damages, so the limitations or exclusions contained above may not apply to you.
This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights that vary from state to state.
ADOBE SYSTEMS INCORPORATED NOTICE
Contains Flash®, Flash® Lite™ and/or Reader® technology by Adobe Systems Incorporated
This Product contains Adobe® Flash® player software under license from Adobe Systems Incorporated, Copyright ©
1995-2007 Adobe Macromedia Software LLC. All rights reserved. Adobe, Reader and Flash are trademarks of Adobe
Systems Incorporated.
Patent acknowledgment
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Elliptic Curve Cryptography (ECC) Cipher Suites for Transport
Layer Security (TLS) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for TLS Elliptic Curve Cipher Suites with SHA-256/382 and AES Galois
Counter Mode (GCM) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for TLS Suite B Profile for Transport Layer Security (TLS) implemented
in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Addition of the Camellia Cipher Suites to Transport Layer Security
(TLS) implemented in the product or service.
The use of certain patents in this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the
Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for AES-CCM ECC Cipher Suites for TLS
implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for IKE and IKEv2 Authentication Using the Eliptic Curve Digital
Signature Algorithm (ECDSA) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Suite B Cryptographic Suites for IPSec implemented in the
product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Algorithms for Internet Key Exchange version 1 (IKEv1)
implemented in the product or service.
Notices 352
Index
Numerics
1565 Emulation error, load
emulation option 304
1‑tray module
installing 41
2,000‑sheet high‑capacity feeder
installing 41
2000‑sheet high‑capacity feeder
loading 70
203 paper jam 268
230 paper jam 269
24x paper jam 271
250 paper jam 277
280.06 Paper missing 303
28y.xx paper jams 287
2yy.xx Close flatbed cover and load
originals if restarting job 303
31.xx Missing or Defective [color]
cartridge 295
32.xx [color] cartridge part number
unsupported by device 295
34 Incorrect paper size, check
[paper source] 295
34 Incorrect paper type, check
[paper source] 296
35 Insufficient memory to support
Resource Save feature 296
36 Printer service required 296
37 Insufficient memory for Flash
Memory Defragment
operation 296
37 Insufficient memory to collate
job 296
37 Insufficient memory, some Held
Jobs were deleted 297
37 Insufficient memory, some held
jobs will not be restored 297
38 Memory full 297
39 Complex page, some data may
not have printed 297
3‑tray module
installing 41
40 [color] invalid refill, change
cartridge 297
455 staple jam 285
4yy.xx paper jams 280
51 Defective flash detected 297
52 Not enough free space in flash
memory for resources 297
520‑sheet tray (standard or
optional)
loading 64
53 Unformatted flash detected 298
54 Network [x] software error 298
54 Serial option [x] error 298
54 Standard network software
error 298
55 Unsupported option in slot
[x] 298
56 Parallel port [x] disabled 299
56 Serial port [x] disabled 299
56 Standard parallel port
disabled 299
56 Standard USB port disabled 299
56 USB port [x] disabled 299
58 Too many disks installed 299
58 Too many flash options
installed 300
58 Too many trays attached 300
59 Incompatible tray [x] 300
61 Remove defective disk 300
62 Disk full 300
63 Unformatted disk 300
80 Replace fuser 301
80 Replace paper pick rollers in
[paper source] 301
80 Scanner maintenance
required 301
80 Scheduled maintenance [x] 301
80.xx Fuser life warning 301
82.xx Replace waste toner
bottle 301
82.xx Waste toner bottle
missing 301
82.xx Waste toner bottle nearly
full 302
83.xx Transfer module missing 302
84 unsupported [color]
photoconductor 302
84.xx [color] photoconductor
low 302
84.xx [color] photoconductor
missing 302
84.xx [color] photoconductor nearly
low 302
84.xx Replace [color]
photoconductor 302
840.01 Scanner disabled by
admin 304
840.02 Scanner disabled. Contact
system administrator if problem
persists. 304
88.2x Replace [color] cartridge 302
88.xx [color] cartridge low 303
A
accessing the Embedded Web
Server 21
accessing the system board 26
Active NIC menu 154
adding a date and time stamp 104
ADF
copying using 97
Adjusting color 288
adjusting copy quality 101
adjusting Sleep Mode 61
adjusting toner darkness 88
advanced options, touch‑screen
copy 107
e‑mail 114
fax 127
FTP 134
scanning to computer 137
AppleTalk menu 159
assigning a custom paper type
name 76
attaching cables 43
available internal options 26
avoiding paper jams 265
B
Bin 2 is unable to lower 288
Bin Setup menu 152
black‑and‑white printing 88
blank pages 327
blocking junk faxes 125
Booklet Adjustments menu 226
buttons, printer control panel 15
buttons, touch screen
using 18
Index 353
C
cables
Ethernet 43
USB 43
calling customer support 337
canceling
print job, from computer 96
canceling a print job
from a computer 96
from the printer control panel 96
canceling an e-mail 112
cannot open Embedded Web
Server 337
card stock
tips 94
Change [paper source] to [custom
string] 288
Change [paper source] to [custom
string] load [orientation] 289
Change [paper source] to [custom
type name] 288
Change [paper source] to [custom
type name] load [orientation] 288
Change [paper source] to [paper
size] 289
Change [paper source] to [paper
size] [paper type] 289
Change [paper source] to [paper
size] [paper type] load
[orientation] 289
Change [paper source] to [paper
size] load [orientation] 289
Check [src] orientation or
guides 290
checking an unresponsive
printer 304
checking an unresponsive
scanner 311
checking printer status
on Embedded Web Server 263
checking printer status using the
Embedded Web Server 263
checking status of parts and
supplies 239
checking the status of parts and
supplies 239
checking the virtual display
using the Embedded Web
Server 263
checking virtual display
using the Embedded Web
Server 263
choosing a fax connection 117
cleaning
exterior of the printer 231
scanner glass 232
cleaning the printhead lenses 233
Close cover [x] 290
Close door [x] 290
collating copies 102
confidential print jobs 94
printing from a Macintosh
computer 95
printing from Windows 95
Confidential Print menu 169
configuration information
wireless network 47
Configure MP menu 146
configuring e‑mail settings 108
configuring port settings 55
connecting printer to distinctive
ring service 119
connecting the printer to
regional adapters 119
conservation settings
brightness, adjusting 62
Eco‑Mode 60
Quiet Mode 60
Sleep Mode 61, 62
conserving supplies 59
contacting customer support 337
control panel, printer 15
copy quality
adjusting 101
copy screen
advanced options 107
options 105, 106, 107, 132
Copy Settings menu 182
copy troubleshooting
copier does not respond 308
partial document or photo
copies 310
poor copy quality 308
poor scanned image quality 311
scanner unit does not close 308
copying
adding a date and time stamp 104
adding an overlay message 104
adjusting quality 101
canceling a copy job 104, 105
collating copies 102
custom job (job build) 103
different paper sizes 100
enlarging 101
multiple pages on one sheet 103
on both sides of the paper
(duplexing) 100
on letterhead 98
on transparencies 98
photos 98
placing separator sheets between
copies 102
quick copy 97
reducing 101
selecting a tray 99
to a different size 99
using the ADF 97
using the scanner glass
(flatbed) 98
copying different paper sizes 100
copying multiple pages on one
sheet 103
copying on both sides of the paper
(duplexing) 100
copying on letterhead 98
copying on transparencies 98
copying photos 98
corrupted printer hard disk 290
creating a fax destination shortcut
using the Embedded Web
Server 121
creating an FTP shortcut
using the Embedded Web
Server 130
creating profiles
using the ScanBack Utility 136
custom name
configuring 76
Custom Names menu 150
custom paper type name
creating 76
Custom Scan Sizes menu 151
Custom Type [x]
changing name 76
changing paper type 76
Custom Types menu 150
D
date and time, fax
setting 120
daylight savings time, faxing 121
Default Source menu 142
different paper sizes, copying 100
Index 354
directory list
printing 96
disk wiping 229
Disk Wiping menu 169
display troubleshooting
display is blank 304
display shows only diamonds 304
display, printer control panel 15
adjusting brightness 62
disposing of printer hard disk 228
distinctive ring service, fax
connecting to 119
documents, printing
from Macintosh 88
from Windows 88
duplexing 100
E
Eco‑Mode setting 60
Edit Security Setups menu 167
Embedded Web Server
accessing 21
administrator settings 263
checking printer status 263
checking the status of parts 239
checking the status of
supplies 239
creating a fax destination
shortcut 121
creating an FTP shortcut 130
creating e‑mail shortcuts 109
initial fax setup 116
networking settings 263
problem accessing 337
setting up e‑mail alerts 263
Embedded Web Server
Administrator's Guide
where to find 263
emission notices 340, 343, 347, 348
Empty the hole punch box 290
emptying the hole punch box 237
encrypting the printer hard
disk 230
enlarging a copy 101
envelopes
tips 93
environmental settings
brightness, adjusting 62
conserving supplies 59
Eco‑Mode 60
Hibernate Mode 62
Quiet Mode 60
Sleep Mode 61
erasing hard disk memory 229
erasing non‑volatile memory 229
erasing volatile memory 228
Error reading USB hub. Remove
hub. 290
Ethernet network setup
using Macintosh 52
using Windows 52
Ethernet networking
Macintosh 52
Windows 52
Ethernet port 43
exit bins 87
exporting a configuration
using the Embedded Web
Server 24
exterior of the printer
cleaning 231
e‑mail
canceling 112
e‑mail alerts
low supply levels 263
paper jam 263
setting up 263
e‑mail function
setting up 108
e‑mail screen
advanced options 114
options 112, 113, 114
E‑mail Settings menu 197
e‑mail shortcuts, creating
using the Embedded Web
Server 109
e‑mail, sending
using a shortcut number 110
using the address book 110
using the touch screen 110
e‑mailing
adding message line 111
adding subject line 111
changing output file type 111
configuring e‑mail settings 108
creating shortcuts using the
Embedded Web Server 109
creating shortcuts using the touch
screen 109
setting up e‑mail function 108
using a shortcut number 110
using the address book 110
using the touch screen 110
F
factory defaults
restoring 264
FAQ about color printing 334
fax
sending 122
fax and e‑mail functions
setting up 313
fax and e‑mail functions are not set
up 313
fax connection
connecting the printer to the wall
jack 117
connecting to a DSL line 118
connecting to a PBX or ISDN 118
fax connections
regional adapters 119
fax log
viewing 125
Fax memory full 290
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup)
menu 187
Fax Mode (Fax Server Setup)
menu 195
Fax partition inoperative. Contact
system administrator. 291
Fax port 43
fax screen
advanced options 127
options 126, 127
Fax server 'To Format' not set up.
Contact system administrator. 291
Fax Station Name not set up 291
Fax Station Number not set up 291
fax troubleshooting
caller ID is not shown 313
can receive but not send
faxes 315
can send but not receive
faxes 315
cannot send or receive a fax 313
received fax has poor print
quality 316
faxing
blocking junk faxes 125
canceling a fax job 125, 126
changing resolution 124
choosing a fax connection 117
configuring the printer to observe
daylight saving time 121
Index 355
creating shortcuts using the
Embedded Web Server 121
creating shortcuts using the touch
screen 121
distinctive ring service 119
fax setup 116
forwarding faxes 128
holding faxes 128
making a fax lighter or darker 124
sending a fax at a scheduled
time 124
sending using the touch
screen 122
setting the date and time 120
setting the fax number or station
number 120
setting the outgoing fax name or
station name 120
viewing a fax log 125
FCC notices 340, 343, 347
features
Scan Center 135
finding more information about the
printer 9
finisher
exit bins 87
finishing features 85
supported paper sizes 85
Finishing menu 214
firmware card
installing 30
flash drive
printing from 90
Flash Drive menu 206
flash drives
supported file types 91
flash memory card
installing 30
troubleshooting 319
font sample list
printing 95
Forms and Favorites
setting up 22
forwarding faxes 128
FTP
scanning using address book 131
FTP address
creating shortcuts using the touch
screen 131
FTP screen
advanced options 134
options 132, 133
FTP Settings menu 202
G
General Settings menu 173
Green settings
Eco‑Mode 60
Quiet Mode 60
green settings
Hibernate Mode 62
H
held jobs 94
printing from a Macintosh
computer 95
printing from Windows 95
Help menu 227
Hibernate Mode
using 62
hiding icons on the home screen 21
holding faxes 128
hole punch box
emptying 237
home screen
hiding icons 21
showing icons 21
home screen buttons and icons
description 16
HTML menu 224
I
icons on the home screen
hiding 21
showing 21
Image menu 225
importing a configuration
using the Embedded Web
Server 24
initial fax setup 116
using the Embedded Web
Server 116
Insert hole punch box 291
Install Tray [x] 291
installing a memory card 28
installing an Internal Solutions
Port 31
installing on a wireless network
using Windows 48
installing options
order of installation 40
installing printer
on wireless network 48
installing printer hard disk 34
installing printer on a network
Ethernet networking 52
installing printer on a wireless
network
using Macintosh 49
installing printer software
adding options 46
installing printer software
(Windows) 45
installing the 1‑tray module 41
installing the 2,000‑sheet
high‑capacity feeder 41
installing the 3‑tray module 41
installing the tandem‑tray
module 41
internal print server
troubleshooting 319
Internal Solutions Port
changing port settings 55
installing 31
troubleshooting 319
IPv6 menu 158
J
jams
avoiding 265
locating jam areas 265
locations 265
numbers 265
jams, clearing
203 paper jam 268
230 paper jam 269
24x paper jam 271
250 paper jam 277
28y.xx paper jams 287
455 staple jam 285
4yy.xx paper jams 280
Job Accounting menu 213
L
labels, paper
tips 93
letterhead
copying on 98
loading, 2000‑sheet high‑capacity
feeder 70
loading, multipurpose feeder 92
loading, trays 92
Index 356
light colored line, white line, or
incorrectly colored line appears on
prints 324
light, indicator 15
linking trays 75
Load Manual Feeder with [custom
string] 293
Load Manual Feeder with [custom
type name] 293
Load Manual Feeder with [paper
size] 293
Load Manual Feeder with [paper
type] [paper size] 293
Load staples 293
loading
2000‑sheet high‑capacity
feeder 70
520‑sheet tray (standard or
optional) 64
letterhead in 2000‑sheet
high‑capacity feeder 70
optional 1,150‑sheet tray 67
optional 850‑sheet tray 67
loading letterhead
paper orientation 92
loading the standard tray 64
M
maintenance kit
ordering 240
replacing 241
making copies using paper from
selected tray 99
Manual feeder expects [paper size].
Check [paper source] guides 294
max speed
using 89
max yield
using 89
memory
types installed on printer 228
memory card
installing 28
troubleshooting 319
Memory full, cannot print
faxes 294
menu settings page
printing 44
menus
Active NIC 154
AppleTalk 159
Bin Setup 152
Booklet Adjustments 226
Confidential Print 169
Configure MP 146
Copy Settings 182
Custom Names 150
Custom Scan Sizes 151
Custom Types 150
Default Source 142
diagram of 139
Disk Wiping 169
Edit Security Setups 167
E‑mail Settings 197
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup) 187
Fax Mode (Fax Server Setup) 195
Finishing 214
Flash Drive 206
FTP Settings 202
General Settings 173
Help 227
HTML 224
Image 225
IPv6 158
Job Accounting 213
Miscellaneous 168
Network [x] 154
Network Card 156
Network Reports 156
Paper Loading 148
Paper Size/Type 143
Paper Texture 146
Parallel [x] 162
PCL Emul 222
PDF 221
PostScript 221
Quality 216
Reports 153
Security Audit Log 171
Serial [x] 164
Set Date/Time 171
Settings 211
SMTP Setup menu 166
Standard Network 154
Standard USB 160
Substitute Size 146
Supplies 140
TCP/IP 157
Universal Setup 151
Utilities 220
Wireless 159
XPS 221
menus diagram 139
Miscellaneous menu 168
mobile device
printing from 89
moving the printer 10, 262
My MFP
setting up 23
N
Network [x] menu 154
Network Card menu 156
network options 26
Network Reports menu 156
network setup page
printing 45
Networking Guide
where to find 263
noise emission levels 340
non‑volatile memory 228
erasing 229
notices 339, 340, 341, 342, 343,
345, 346, 347, 348
O
optional 1,150‑sheet tray
loading 67
optional 850‑sheet tray
loading 67
options
1‑tray module, installing 41
2,000‑sheet high‑capacity feeder,
installing 41
3‑tray module, installing 41
firmware card 30
firmware cards 26
flash memory card 30
Internal Solutions Port,
installing 31
list 26
memory card, installing 28
memory cards 26
network 26
order of installation 40
ports 26
printer hard disk, installing 34
printer hard disk, removing 38
tandem‑tray module, installing 41
updating in printer driver 46
options, touch‑screen
copy 105, 106, 107, 132
e‑mail 112, 113, 114
fax 126, 127
FTP 132, 133
Index 357
scan 136
scan to computer 136, 137
ordering
maintenance kit 240
staple cartridges 240
toner cartridges 239
waste toner bottle 240
ordering photoconductor units 240
output file type
changing 111
P
paper
characteristics 77
different sizes, copying 100
finishing features 85
letterhead 79
preprinted forms 79
recycled 79
saving 103
selecting 78
storing 80
unacceptable 78, 79
Universal size setting 64
using recycled 59
paper feed troubleshooting
message remains after jam is
cleared 320
paper jams
avoiding 265
paper jams, clearing
203 paper jam 268
230 paper jam 269
24x paper jam 271
250 paper jam 277
28y.xx paper jams 287
4yy.xx paper jams 280
Paper Loading menu 148
paper size
setting 64
Paper Size/Type menu 143
paper sizes
supported 81
Paper Texture menu 146
paper type
setting 64
paper types
duplex support 83
supported by printer 83
supported by the finisher 83
where to load 83
Parallel [x] menu 162
parts
checking status 239
checking, from printer control
panel 239
checking, using the Embedded
Web Server 239
parts, replacing
maintenance kit 241
PCL Emul menu 222
PDF menu 221
photoconductor unit
replacing 241
photoconductor units
ordering 240
photos
copying 98
placing separator sheets between
copies 102
port
Ethernet 43
Fax 43
Telephone 43
USB 43
port settings
configuring 55
PostScript menu 221
Power off, wait 2 seconds, power
on 294
print job
canceling, from computer 96
print quality
cleaning the scanner glass 232
replacing a photoconductor
unit 241
print quality troubleshooting
black streaks on a page 330
blank pages 327
characters have jagged edges 321
clipped images 321
fine horizontal lines 322
gray background 323
light colored line, white line, or
incorrectly colored line appears
on prints 324
poor transparency quality 333
print irregularities 325
print is too dark 326
print is too light 326
repeating defects appear on a
page 328
shadow images appear on
prints 322
skewed print 328
solid color pages 329
streaked horizontal lines appear
on prints 330
streaked vertical lines on
prints 331
toner fog or background shading
on the page 332
toner rubs off 332
toner specks 333
white streaks on a page 330
print quality, troubleshooting
cleaning the printhead lenses 233
print troubleshooting
error reading flash drive 305
held jobs do not print 306
incorrect characters print 307
incorrect margins 323
jammed pages are not
reprinted 321
job prints from wrong tray 307
job prints on wrong paper 307
jobs do not print 305
Large jobs do not collate 307
multiple‑language PDF files do not
print 304
paper curl 324
paper frequently jams 320
print job takes longer than
expected 306
tray linking does not work 307
unexpected page breaks
occur 308
printer
basic model 11
fully configured 11
minimum clearances 10
moving 10, 262
selecting a location 10
shipping 262
turning on 25
printer configurations 11
printer control panel 15
adjusting brightness 62
factory defaults, restoring 264
printer hard disk
disposing of 228
encrypting 230
installing 34
removing 38
troubleshooting 319
wiping 229
Index 358
printer hard disk encryption 230
printer hard disk memory
erasing 229
printer information
where to find 9
printer messages
1565 Emulation error, load
emulation option 304
280.06 Paper missing 303
2yy.xx Close flatbed cover and
load originals if restarting
job 303
31.xx Missing or Defective [color]
cartridge 295
32.xx [color] cartridge part
number unsupported by
device 295
34 Incorrect paper size, check
[paper source] 295
34 Incorrect paper type, check
[paper source] 296
35 Insufficient memory to support
Resource Save feature 296
36 Printer service required 296
37 Insufficient memory for Flash
Memory Defragment
operation 296
37 Insufficient memory to collate
job 296
37 Insufficient memory, some
Held Jobs were deleted 297
37 Insufficient memory, some held
jobs will not be restored 297
38 Memory full 297
39 Complex page, some data may
not have printed 297
40 [color] invalid refill, change
cartridge 297
51 Defective flash detected 297
52 Not enough free space in flash
memory for resources 297
53 Unformatted flash
detected 298
54 Network [x] software error 298
54 Serial option [x] error 298
54 Standard network software
error 298
55 Unsupported option in slot
[x] 298
56 Parallel port [x] disabled 299
56 Serial port [x] disabled 299
56 Standard parallel port
disabled 299
56 Standard USB port
disabled 299
56 USB port [x] disabled 299
58 Too many disks installed 299
58 Too many flash options
installed 300
58 Too many trays attached 300
59 Incompatible tray [x] 300
61 Remove defective disk 300
62 Disk full 300
63 Unformatted disk 300
80 Replace fuser 301
80 Replace paper pick rollers in
[paper source] 301
80 Scanner maintenance required,
use ADF kit 301
80 Scheduled maintenance
[x] 301
80.xx Fuser life warning 301
82.xx Replace waste toner
bottle 301
82.xx Waste toner bottle
missing 301
82.xx Waste toner bottle nearly
full 302
83.xx Transfer module
missing 302
84 Replace black pc unit 241
84 Replace color pc units 241
84 unsupported [color]
photoconductor 302
84.xx [color] photoconductor
low 302
84.xx [color] photoconductor
missing 302
84.xx [color] photoconductor
nearly low 302
84.xx Replace [color]
photoconductor 302
840.01 Scanner disabled by
admin 304
840.02 Scanner disabled. Contact
system administrator if problem
persists. 304
88.2x Replace [color]
cartridge 302
88.xx [color] cartridge low 303
Adjusting color 288
Bin 2 is unable to lower 288
Change [paper source] to [custom
string] 288
Change [paper source] to [custom
string] load [orientation] 289
Change [paper source] to [custom
type name] 288
Change [paper source] to [custom
type name] load
[orientation] 288
Change [paper source] to [paper
size] 289
Change [paper source] to [paper
size] [paper type] 289
Change [paper source] to [paper
size] [paper type] load
[orientation] 289
Change [paper source] to [paper
size] load [orientation] 289
Check [src] orientation or
guides 290
Close cover [x] 290
Close door [x] 290
Disk corrupted 290
Empty the hole punch box 290
Error reading USB hub. Remove
hub. 290
Fax memory full 290
Fax partition inoperative. Contact
system administrator. 291
Fax server 'To Format' not set up.
Contact system
administrator. 291
Fax Station Name not set up 291
Fax Station Number not set
up 291
Insert hole punch box 291
Insert Tray [x] 291
Install Tray [x] 291
Load [src] with [custom
string] 292
Load [src] with [custom type
name] 292
Load [src] with [size] 292
Load [src] with [type] [size] 292
Load Manual Feeder with [custom
string] 293
Load Manual Feeder with [custom
type name] 293
Load Manual Feeder with [paper
size] 293
Load Manual Feeder with [paper
type] [paper size] 293
Index 359
Load staples 293
Manual feeder expects [paper
size]. Check [paper source]
guides 294
Memory full, cannot print
faxes 294
Power off, wait 2 seconds, power
on 294
Remove paper from [linked set bin
name] 294
Remove paper from all bins 294
Remove paper from bin [x] 294
Remove paper from standard
output bin 294
Restore held jobs? 294
Scan Document Too Long 295
Scanner ADF Cover Open 295
SMTP server not set up. Contact
system administrator. 295
Some held jobs were not
restored 295
Unsupported disk 295
Unsupported USB device, please
remove 290
Unsupported USB hub, please
remove 290
printer options troubleshooting
2,000‑sheet drawer problems 318
cannot detect flash memory
card 319
cannot detect printer hard
disk 319
internal print server 319
Internal Solutions Port 319
memory card 319
option does not work 317
paper tray problems 318
USB/parallel interface card 320
printer problems, solving basic 304
printer software, installing
(Windows) 45
printhead lenses
cleaning 233
printing
black‑and‑white 88
canceling, from the printer control
panel 96
directory list 96
font sample list 95
from a mobile device 89
from flash drive 90
from Macintosh 88
from Windows 88
max speed and max yield 89
menu settings page 44
network setup page 45
printing a directory list 96
printing a document 88
printing a font sample list 95
printing a menu settings page 44
printing a network setup page 45
printing confidential and other held
jobs
from a Macintosh computer 95
from Windows 95
printing from a flash drive 90
printing from a mobile device 89
printing in black and white 88
publications
where to find 9
Q
Quality menu 216
Quiet Mode
print quality troubleshooting 322
R
recycled paper
using 59, 79
recycling
Lexmark packaging 63
Lexmark products 63
toner cartridges 63
WEEE statement 341
reducing a copy 101
reducing printer noise 60
Remote Operator Panel
setting up 23
Remove paper from [linked set bin
name] 294
Remove paper from all bins 294
Remove paper from bin [x] 294
Remove paper from standard
output bin 294
removing printer hard disk 38
repeat print jobs 94
printing from a Macintosh
computer 95
printing from Windows 95
replacing
maintenance kit 241
replacing a staple cartridge 254
replacing a toner cartridge 247
replacing supplies
staple cartridge 254
toner cartridge 247
waste toner bottle 249
replacing the waste toner
bottle 249
reports
viewing 264
Reports menu 153
reserve print jobs 94
printing from a Macintosh
computer 95
printing from Windows 95
resolution, fax
changing 124
Restore held jobs? 294
restoring factory default
settings 264
S
safety information 7, 8
saving paper 103
Scan Center features 135
Scan Document Too Long 295
scan screen
advanced options 137
options 136
scan to computer
options 136, 137
original size 136
paper orientation, setting 137
Scan to Network
setting up 22
scan troubleshooting
cannot scan from a computer 312
partial document or photo
scans 312
scan was not successful 311
scanner unit does not close 308
scanning takes too long or freezes
the computer 311
ScanBack Utility
using 136
scanner
Automatic Document Feeder
(ADF) 14
functions 13
scanner glass 14
Scanner ADF Cover Open 295
scanner glass
cleaning 232
Index 360
scanner glass (flatbed)
copying using 98
scanning
from a flash drive 135
quick copy 97
to a computer 134
to an FTP address 131
to an FTP, using address book 131
scanning to a computer 134
scanning to a flash drive 135
scanning to an FTP address
creating shortcuts using the
computer 130
using shortcut numbers 131
using the address book 131
using the touch screen 131
Security Audit Log menu 171
selecting a location for the
printer 10
sending a fax 122
sending a fax using shortcuts 123
sending a fax using the touch
screen 122
sending fax
using shortcuts 123
using the address book 123
sending fax at a scheduled
time 124
sending fax using the address
book 123
Serial [x] menu 164
serial printing
setting up 56
Set Date/Time menu 171
setting
TCP/IP address 157
setting the exit bin
finisher 87
setting the fax number or station
number 120
setting the outgoing fax name or
station name 120
setting the paper size 64
setting the paper type 64
setting the Universal paper size 64
setting up e‑mail alerts using the
Embedded Web Server 263
setting up fax and e‑mail
functions 313
setting up serial printing 56
setting up the printer
on an Ethernet network
(Macintosh only) 52
on an Ethernet network (Windows
only) 52
Settings menu 211
shadow images appear on
prints 322
shipping the printer 262
shortcuts, creating
e‑mail 109
fax destination 121
FTP address 131
FTP destination 130
showing icons on the home
screen 21
Sleep Mode
adjusting 61
SMTP server not set up. Contact
system administrator. 295
SMTP Setup menu 166
Some held jobs were not
restored 295
Standard Network menu 154
standard tray
loading 64
Standard USB menu 160
staple cartridge
replacing 254
staple cartridges
ordering 240
staple jam, clearing
455 staple jam 285
statement of volatility 228
status of parts
checking 239
status of supplies
checking 239
storing
paper 80
supplies 238
storing print jobs 94
streaked horizontal lines appear on
prints 330
streaks appear on a page 330
subject and message information
adding to e‑mail 111
Substitute Size menu 146
supplies
checking status 239
checking, from printer control
panel 239
checking, using the Embedded
Web Server 239
conserving 59
storing 238
using recycled paper 59
Supplies menu 140
supplies, ordering
maintenance kit 240
photoconductor units 240
staple cartridges 240
toner cartridges 239
waste toner bottle 240
supported flash drives 91
supported paper sizes 81
supported paper types and
weights 83
system board
accessing 26
system board cover
reattaching 26
T
tandem‑tray module
installing 41
TCP/IP menu 157
telecommunication
notices 343, 345, 346
Telephone port 43
tips
card stock 94
envelopes 93
labels, paper 93
on using letterhead 92
on using transparencies 92
tips on using letterhead 92
toner cartridge
replacing 247
toner cartridges
ordering 239
recycling 63
toner darkness
adjusting 88
toner fog or background shading
appears on the page 332
toner rubs off 332
toner specks 333
touch screen
buttons 18
transparencies
copying on 98
loading 92
tips on using 92
Index 361
using 92
tray linking
assigning a custom paper type
name 76
tray unlinking
assigning a custom paper type
name 76
trays
linking 75
unlinking 75
troubleshooting
an application error has
occurred 316
cannot open Embedded Web
Server 337
checking an unresponsive
printer 304
checking an unresponsive
scanner 311
contacting customer support 337
FAQ about color printing 334
fax and e‑mail functions are not
set up 313
Scan to Network 316
solving basic printer
problems 304
troubleshooting, copy
copier does not respond 308
partial document or photo
copies 310
poor copy quality 308
poor scanned image quality 311
scanner unit does not close 308
troubleshooting, display
display is blank 304
display shows only diamonds 304
troubleshooting, fax
caller ID is not shown 313
can receive but not send
faxes 315
can send but not receive
faxes 315
cannot send or receive a fax 313
received fax has poor print
quality 316
troubleshooting, paper feed
message remains after jam is
cleared 320
troubleshooting, print
error reading flash drive 305
held jobs do not print 306
incorrect characters print 307
incorrect margins 323
jammed pages are not
reprinted 321
job prints from wrong tray 307
job prints on wrong paper 307
jobs do not print 305
Large jobs do not collate 307
multiple‑language PDF files do not
print 304
paper curl 324
paper frequently jams 320
print job takes longer than
expected 306
tray linking does not work 307
unexpected page breaks
occur 308
troubleshooting, print quality
black streaks on a page 330
blank pages 327
characters have jagged edges 321
clipped images 321
fine horizontal lines 322
gray background 323
light colored line, white line, or
incorrectly colored line appears
on prints 324
poor transparency quality 333
print irregularities 325
print is too dark 326
print is too light 326
repeating defects appear on a
page 328
shadow images appear on
prints 322
skewed print 328
solid color pages 329
streaked horizontal lines appear
on prints 330
streaked vertical lines on
prints 331
toner fog or background shading
on the page 332
toner rubs off 332
toner specks 333
white streaks on a page 330
troubleshooting, printer options
2,000‑sheet drawer problems 318
cannot detect flash memory
card 319
cannot detect printer hard
disk 319
internal print server 319
Internal Solutions Port 319
memory card 319
option does not work 317
paper tray problems 318
USB/parallel interface card 320
troubleshooting, scan
cannot scan from a computer 312
partial document or photo
scans 312
scan was not successful 311
scanner unit does not close 308
scanning takes too long or freezes
the computer 311
turning on the printer 25
U
understanding the home screen
buttons and icons 16
Universal Paper Size
setting 64
Universal Setup menu 151
unlinking trays 75
Unsupported disk 295
Unsupported USB device, please
remove 290
Unsupported USB hub, please
remove 290
updating options in printer
driver 46
USB port 43
USB/parallel interface card
troubleshooting 320
using Eco‑Mode 60
using Hibernate Mode 62
using max speed and max yield 89
using Quiet Mode 60
using recycled paper 59
using shortcuts
sending fax 123
using the address book 110
sending fax 123
using the ScanBack Utility 136
using the touch‑screen buttons 18
Utilities menu 220
V
verify print jobs 94
printing from a Macintosh
computer 95
printing from Windows 95
Index 362
viewing
reports 264
viewing a fax log 125
virtual display
checking, using Embedded Web
Server 263
volatile memory 228
erasing 228
volatility
statement of 228
W
waste toner bottle
ordering 240
replacing 249
wiping the printer hard disk 229
Wireless menu 159
wireless network
configuration information 47
installation, using Macintosh 49
installation, using Windows 48
wireless network setup
in Windows 48
wireless printer setup
in Macintosh 49
WS‑Scan
about 23
X
XPS menu 221
Index 363

Navigation menu